United States
Environmental Protection
Agency
Office of Research
and Development
Washington, DC 20460
Research and Development EPA/600/x93/xxx
June 1993
%^- *~K '"'*'•.?'•• Xt !•*' Wl. iS~-xW, ,
<'
-; »•-„" Vjfe;/ '<**?%"V';^ «
* ^%^:;^ft?;:/1
A ^ * " V-Vv.' < s^' -
"^%^V^>'H^:' fc*'
^^•^•••-^V' ^A3:-^:.^C'v.v 'rt%' > ^^jf'-$- '• ^s >?•-•••:•- ^i
' "74 '''•^%'f ;|c-V»%« ^;^?A 'P ^ s
t- ^s-J"Vs&4«">¥.'-ti,t.i"x'5t^;V > C"-
• 93/xxx -.
EMAP - Estuaries
1993 Virginian Province
Field Operations
and Safety Manual
U S EPA Headquarters Library
Mail code 3201
1200 Pennsylvania Avenue NW
Washington DC 20460
Environmental Monitoring
and Assessment Program
.ft
-------
-------
DRAFT 6/20/93
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND ASSESSMENT PROGRAM
NEAR COASTAL COMPONENT
1993 VIRGINIAN PROVINCE EFFORT
FIELD OPERATIONS
and
SAFETY MANUAL
by
D.R. Reifsteck and C.J. Strobel
Science Applications International Corporation
27 Tarzwell Drive
Narragansett, Rhode Island 02882
Darryl Keith
United States Environmental Protection Agency
Environmental Research Laboratory
27 Tarzwell Drive
Narragansett, Rl 02882
Contract Number
68-C1-0005
Project Officer
Barbara Brown
U.S. EPA Headquarters Library
Mail code 3201
1200 Pennsylvania Avenue NW
Washington DC 20460
Environmental Research Laboratory
Office of Research and Development
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Narragansett, Rhode Island 02882
-------
-------
NOTICE
This document is a preliminary draft. It has not been formally released by the
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and should not at this stage be construed to
represent Agency policy. It is being circulated for comments on its technical merit and
policy implications.
Mention of trade names or commercial products does not constitute
endorsement or recommendation for use.
This document is ERL-N contribution number xx
-------
-------
ABSTRACT
The Environmental Monitoring and Assessment Program (EMAP) is a Nation-
wide program initiated by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in 1990. The
purpose of this program is to annually monitor the condition of all the Nation's major
ecosystems. As a component of the Near-Coastal (EMAP-NC) Program, annual
sampling will be conducted in the Virginian Province (Cape Cod, MA to Cape Henry,
VA). The 1993 Field operations are scheduled to begin in July 26, 1993.
Three teams of field personnel will be required to complete data collection
activities. Each team will be comprised of two 4-person crews, alternating on a six
day cycle. Teams win be supplied with a 24 foot workboat on a trailer, a four wheel
drive pick-up truck, a modified van (to serve as a mobile laboratory), and all sampling
gear and supplies required to complete all activities. All field activities will be
monitored and coordinated by the Field Operations Center at the Environmental
Research Laboratory in Narragansett, Rl (ERL-N).
Field crews will collect electronic data (temperature, salinity, dissolved oxygen,
pH, transmission, fluorescence and Photosynthetically Active Radiation) as well as
sediment and water samples, and fish. Data will be recorded on data sheets as well
as in an on-board computer. All data entered into the computer in the field will be
uploaded to the ERL-N VAX computer on a daily basis via modem communications.
This manual describes, in detail, all field collection methods, including Quality
Assurance (QA) and safety. It will serve as a guide for field personnel and will be
carried on the boats at all times. An effort has been made to anticipate problems and
questions that may arise, and to include information on resolving them. All methods,
as described in this manual, must be adhered to by all field personnel. Any changes
in methods will be communicated to the field crews by the Field Coordinator or Project
Manager. As [if] methods change, an updated version of the pertinent section [s] will
be prepared and provided to the field crews.
In addition quick reference handbooks will be supplied to the Field crews for
procedures and protocol for research vessel and mobile lab operations. Handbooks
will be comprised of specific condensed chapters of the Field Manual.
-------
-------
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
This document is a revision of the 1990, 1991 and 1992 Field Manuals, to which the
following authors contributed: Craig Eller, Martin Friday, Jack Gurley, Melissa Hughes,
Paul Kazyak, Kristi KiHam, Kit Peres, Jill Schoenherr, Paul Selvitelli, Ray Valente, and
Steve Weisberg. Rich Jabba, Elise Petrocelli, Matt Aitkenhead and Robert Wallace
assisted in preparing sections of the current document. All of their contributions were
invaluable.
A large number of people provided very useful comments in their review of this
document. Our appreciation is extended to all of them, especially Steve Schimmel,
John Scott, John Baker, Fred Holland, and Steve Weisberg.
Portions of this document were copied from other EMAP-NC documents (Holland,
1990; Schimmel, 1990; and Strobel, 1990).
-------
-------
CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
Notice i
Abstract ii
Acknowledgments iii
List of Figures ix
List of Tables ix
1 - Introduction
Introduction 1
Near Coastal Program 2
EMAP-Estuaries Virginian Province Sampling Effort 4
2 - Overview of Field Sampling Activities
Sampling Period 1
Sampling Design 1
Indicators of Ecosystem Health 4
Site Reconnaissance 5
3 - Description of Field Teams
Personnel 1
Station Assignments 3
Equipment 3
Chain-of-Command 8
4 - Safety
Training 1
Swimming Proficiency Requirement 1
Priorities 1
Accidents 2
Personnel Emergency Information 2
Operation of Equipment 2
Safety Equipment 3
Weather Conditions 3
Responsibility for Safety 3
Boat Itinerary 4
Handling of Hazardous Materials 4
Proper Handling of Potentially Hazardous Samples 5
iv
-------
-------
CONTENTS (continued)
SECTION PAGE
5 - Training
Crew Chief (Chief Scientist) Training .. .. 1
Crew Training 1
6 - Land-Based Facilities
Mobile Laboratories 1
Base facilities 1
Field Operations Center 1
7 - Professionalism
General Contact with the Public 1
Operation of Motor Vehicles 2
Operation of Boats 2
Radio Operation 2
Waste Disposal 2
8 - Vehicle Operation
General Guidelines 1
Procedures Following an Accident 2
Trailering Guidelines 4
Operation of Winch 5
Operation of the CB Radios 6
9 - Operation of the Boats
Weather Conditions 1
Launching and Recovering Procedures 2
Mast Assembly and Antennae Set-Up 6
Gear Check-Out and Loading ; 7
Navigation System 8
General Policies Underway ... 8
Radio Operations 10
Radar Operation 13
Winch Operation 13
Emergencies/Accidents 16
Equipment Failure/Repair 16
-------
-------
CONTENTS (continued)
SECTION
10 - On-Board Computer System
Data Acquisition System 1
11 - Navigation System
Introduction '..... 1
GPS Initialization 2
GPS Use and Status 3
EDAS Calibration 4
System Calibration 5
Point Calibration 6
12 - Communications
Electronic Transfer of Data 1
Communication with the Field Operations Center 2
Ship-to-Shore Communications 3
Truck-to-Truck Communications 3
13 - Sampling Schedule and Station Types
Sampling Schedule 1
Station Types 1
14 - Dissolved Oxygen, Salinity and Temperature
Sea-Bird Sealogger CTD 1
YSI Model 58 1
CTD Dockside QC Checks ; 6
Obtaining a CTD Profile 8
15 - Sediment Collection
Introduction 1
16-Fish Trawls
The EMAP Otter Trawl 1
Trawl Preparation 3
Net Deployment 4
Trawling ~ 5
Net Retrieval 6
Endangered Species 8
Sample Processing 9
VJ
-------
-------
SECTION
CONTENTS (continued)
PAGE
17 - Packaging and Shipping Samples
Proper Packaging Methods 1
Benthic Species Composition and Biomass Samples 4
Grain Size Samples 4
Sediment Chemistry Samples 5
Sediment AVS Samples 6
Sediment Toxicity Samples 7
Fish Chemistry Samples 7
Fish Histopathology Samples 8
Fish QA Samples 8
Total Suspended Solids Samples 9
Field Computer Diskettes 9
1.8 - Contingency Plans
Adverse Weather Conditions ..-. 1
Station Inaccessibility 1
Equipment Failure 2
19 - Maintenance
GRiD Computers 1
Sea-Bird CTD 1
Boats, Motors, and Vehicles 1
20 - Quality Assurance
Data Quality Objectives 1
QA Procedures 2
21 - Field Data Base Management
Events Numbering 2
SAMPLEIDs and Sample Numbers 3
22 - Waste Disposal
Routine Garbage 1
Detergent Washes 1
Formalin and Dietrich's Fixative 1
Fish Waste 2
vit
-------
-------
SECTION
CONTENTS (continued)
23 - Contact Personnel
24 - Lost Gear
Recovery of a DataSonde Mooring
Recovery of a CTD
Recovery of a Grab Sampler
1
2
2
25 • References
Appendices
A. Equipment List and Daily Checklists
B. Hazardous Materials Safety and Handling Information
C. Permit for the Operation of a Marine Band VHP Radio
D. Performing Winkler Trtrations using the Hach DO Kit
E. Operation of the Hydrolab DataSonde 3 Data Logger
F. Data Sheets
VIII
-------
-------
LIST OF FIGURES
NUMBER
Page
3.1 Personnel Distribution for the Virginian Province Project 3-2
3.2 Project Management Scheme ; 3-10
9.1 Boat radio call signs and authorized frequencies 9-12
9.2 Hand signals used during winch operations 9-15
13.1 Row Chart of Field Sampling Activities 13-3
14.1 Flow Chart for obtaining a CTD Profile 13-11
15.1 Criteria for accepting a sediment grab sample 15-3
15.2 Flow Chart of Sediment Collection 15-4
16.1 Flow Chart of Fish Collection 16-18
IX
-------
-------
LIST OF TABLES
4.1 list of Contaminated Sites 4-7
8.1 Commonly Used 10-Codes 6-6
13.1 List of Sampling Stations 13-4
15.1 Directions for preparing stock solutions 15-7
16.1 Amount of Winch Cable to use During Trawling Activities 16-5
16.2 Endangered Species that could Possibly be Caught During Trawling .. 16-8
16.3 Prioritized Pathology Target Species List 16-12
16.4 Fish Target Species and Size 16-14
17.1 Sample Holding and Shipment Conditions 17-3
21.1 Sample Numbers 21-6
21.2 Event Numbers 21-8
19.1 Vehicle Maintenance Schedule 19-2
-------
-------
Section 1
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
P«g« 1 of 4
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1 Introduction
The Environmental Monitoring and Assessment Program (EMAP) was designed
to provide a quantitative assessment of the regional extent of environmental problems
by measuring status and change in selected indicators of ecological condition. As a
regulatory agency, the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) is charged with
the mission to set environmental policy, obtain funds for research and development,
and evaluate the efficacy of environmental regulations in preserving the Nation's
natural resources. EMAP provides a strategy to identify and bound the extent,
magnitude, and location of environmental degradation and improvement on a regional
scale. As stated in tHe 1990 Near Coastal Program Plan (NCPP: Holland, 1990), when
fully implemented EMAP will answer the following questions:
o What is the status, extent, and geographical distribution of the Nation's
important ecological resources?
o What proportion of these resources are declining or improving? Where, and at
what rate?
o What are the factors that are likely to be contributing to declining condition?
o Are control and mitigation programs achieving overall improvements in
ecological conditions?
o Which resources are at greatest risk to pollution impacts?
EMAP has been divided into several ecosystems including surface fresh waters,
rangelands and deserts, forests, wetlands, agroecosystems, Great Lakes, and
estuaries. All the above goals and questions are relevant to each ecosystem, including
estuarines.
The purpose of this document is provide detailed instructions on all field
sampling methods for the EMAP-Estuaries Virginian Province effort in 1993.
-------
Section 1
Revision 0
Oato: 6/9/93
Page 2 of 4
1.2 The Estuaries Program
The Estuaries portion of EMAP (EMAP-E) is a joint EPA/National Oceanic and
Atmospheric Administration. (NOAA) Program that is designed to eventually monitor
the waters, sediment, and biota of the Nation's bays, sounds and estuaries. This
program will complement and may eventually merge with NOAA's existing Status and
Trends Program for Marine Environmental Quality to produce a single, cooperative,
coastal and estuarine monitoring program.
The goals of EMAP-E, as outlined in the 1990 Near Coastal Program Plan
(Holland, 1990) are as follows:
o Provide a quantitative assessment of the regional extent of estuarine
environmental problems by measuring pollution exposure and ecological
condition,
o Measure changes in the regional extent of environmental problems for the
Nation's estuarine ecosystems,
o Identify and evaluate associations between the ecological condition of the
Nation's estuarine ecosystems and pollutant exposure, as welt as other factors
known to affect ecological condition {e.g., climatic conditions, land use
patterns), and
o Assess the effectiveness of pollution control actions and environmental policies
on a regional scale (i.e., large estuaries like Chesapeake Bay and Long Island
Sound)and nationally.
In addition to meeting the overall goals of EMAP, EMAP-E is addressing specific
environmental problems such as: low dissolved oxygen (DO) concentrations,
eutrophication, chemical and biological contamination, habitat modification, and
cumulative impacts.
1.2.1 Low Dissolved Oxygen Concentrations
Well-oxygenated water is critical to support a balanced aquatic community.
Low dissolved oxygen concentrations in water may reduce or eliminate short- and
long-lived vertebrate and invertebrate species (e.g., reduced species composition and
biomass) and allow for the existence of smaller, opportunistic species that may not be
.as compatible with ecosystem stability or human needs.
-------
Section 1
Revision 0
Date: 0/9/93
Page 3 of 4
1.2.2 Eutrophication
The process of eutrophtcation - the over-enrichment of water bodies with
nutrients and minerals that results in an excess in primary production - can cause
severe reductions in the overall stability and productivity of that water body.
Symptoms of stress associated with eutrophication may include (but are not limited
to): widely fluctuating and often acutely toxic low DO concentrations; reduced water
clarity; presence of nuisance algal blooms; alterations in benthic biomass, abundance,
and species composition; and reduced acreage of submerged aquatic vegetation
(SAV).
1.2.3 Contamination
The problem of contamination is manifested in several ways, including: .(1) the
chemical contamination (residues) of anthropogenic materials or excessive, naturally-
occurring materials that result in unacceptable concentrations in marine sediments,
water, and biota; (2) pathogen contamination of sediments, water, and biota generally
through human waste; and (3) toxicity of water, sediment, and biota caused by
excessive amounts of either chemicals or pathogens. The overall effect may be to
reduce resource numbers, diversity, and to render marine resources unsuitable for
human (or non-human) consumption.
1,2.4 Habitat Modification
The modification (and general loss) of specific habitats within the estuarine
environment is a critical problem. Specifically, habitats such as wetlands and SAV
have been significantly reduced, thereby depleting critical spawning and nursery areas
for the production of living resources deemed important to man, including fish and
shellfish. They also help improve water clarity by reducing soil erosion, and buffer
coastlines from the direct effects of coastal storms.
1.2.5 Cumulative Impacts
The cumulative effects of the above stressors on estuaries is likely to elicit
responses that result in decreases in overall productivity, or losses in diversity and
resilience. These general effects may result in reductions in fish and shellfish
recruitment, growth and survival, and increases in pathology (fin rot, cancers, and
other lesions).
-------
Section 1
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 4 of 4
1.3 EMAP-Estuaries Virginian Province Sampling Effort
The EMAP-E Virginian Province is the biogeographical region extending from
Cape Cod, ,MA to Cape Henry, VA.
As a first step, a Demonstration Project (DP) was conducted in the Virginian
Province in 1990 to address several issues prior to full implementation in 1991. The
objectives of the DP were to:
o Provide, on a pilot basis, an estimate of the extent of degraded estuarine
resources in the Virginian Province to demonstrate the usefulness and ease of
presentation of. the data resulting from an EMAP design.
o Evaluate the specificity, sensitivity, reliability, and repeatability of the responses
of the selected indicators over a broad range of environmental conditions.
o Identify and resolve, before the implementation phase (f991), logistical
problems associated with the program design.
o Develop, evaluate, and refine sampling methods for indicators of environmental
quality.
o Develop data handling, quality assurance, and statistical procedures for efficient
analysis and reporting of the data.
o Collect the information necessary to evaluate alternative sampling designs and
to establish appropriate Data Quality Objectives (DQOs) for the Program.
This year is the fourth year of sampling in the Virginian Province, and the
lessons learned and the data collected during previous field seasons were used in the
development of the sampling plan described in this document.
-------
Section 2
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 1 of 5
SECTION 2
OVERVIEW OF FIELD SAMPLING ACTIVITIES
2.1 Sampling Period -
The Index Period for Virginian Province sampling activities will be begin on July
26, 1993. An attempt will be made to complete all sampling prior to September 18.
The Index Period was determined following an evaluation of the Demonstration Project
data. These data show the benthic organisms in Long Island Sound typically do not
respond to low dissolved oxygen conditions until late in July.
2.2 Sampling Design
The EMAP-Estuaries sampling design combines the strengths of systematic and
random sampling with our understanding of estuarine systems. It provides a design
that will allow probability-based estimates of the status of the Nation's estuarine
systems, the variability associated with that status, its spatial and temporal
components, and the temporal trends associated with changes in these systems.
The objective of the sampling design is to provide a statistically defensible
strategy for collecting information about selected indicators of ecological condition and
their variability. The design will remain flexible to alternative future uses and yet is
logistically reasonable and implementable.
In developing the sampling design/a list frame was used to represent the
population of estuaries in the United States. This list frame was subdivided to
represent all estuarine systems within the Virginian Province with a surface area
greater than 2.6 km2. The Virginian Province list frame was subdivided into three
sampling sub-populations (classes) representing small estuaries and tidal rivers, large
tidal rivers, and large estuaries. The EMAP-Estuaries sampling design is based on a
single, annual sampling season of each of these classes during the Index Period.
Addition information on the sampling design can be found in the Near Coastal Program
Plan (Holland, 1990).
2.2.1 Regionalization •
The EMAP-E sampling frame represents bays, sounds, and estuaries spanning
the entire coastal extent of the United States. The large number and often broad
expanse of the sampling units makes straightforward sampling of the entire frame
-------
Section 2
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 2 of 5
annually or in multi-year cycles impractical. The large number of potential sampling
sites across the Nation requires that a regionalization scheme be developed in order to
subdivide these sites into manageable sampling units.
The objective of the EMAP-E regionalization scheme is to formulate a
hierarchical structure for partitioning the estuarine ecosystems of the United States
based on the physical characteristics of those areas (primarily climatic and
oceanographic). The regionalization is based on physical criteria rather than biotic
criteria because the objective is to define whole ecosystems, which are constrained by
their physical components and boundaries, rather than to define the distributional
aspects of one or a few species.
This regionalization serves two purposes. It provides a data collection structure
for organizing the storage of data and for demonstrating areas where data indicate
wide-spread ecological problems. Second, it delineates geographical zones about
which predictions on the status and trends of environmental conditions may be made
at various levels of resolution. The regionalization scheme proposed for EMAP-E is
analogous to that adopted by NOAA and the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service. (See
Figure 2.1, taken from Holland [19901).
The EMAP-E regionalization is based on two primary factors: major climatic
zones and prevailing oceanic currents. Both of these physical characteristics have
numerous underlying physical and geological components that could be specifically
enumerated. However, the composite of these characteristics results in the climatic
zones and ocean current locations. The climatic zones are based on Beasfey and Biggs
(1987) conceptualization, and the ocean current delineation is based on Terrell (1979).
The regionalization consists of seven coastal regions within the continental
United States, plus six additional regions encompassing Alaska, Hawaii, the Pacific
territories; and the Great Lakes (Figure 2.1). The first to be monitored was the
Virginian Province which includes the wide expanse of irregular coastline from Cape
Cod, MA to Cape Henry, VA, and includes a number of large estuarine systems (e.g..
Long Island Sound, Hudson River/ Raritan Bay, Delaware Bay, Chesapeake Bay).
2.2.2 Classification Scheme
Virginian Province estuarine waters were classified into three size categories:
large estuaries, large tidal rivers, and small estuarine systems. (See the NCPP [Holland,
1990] for further details). These three classes represent estuarine systems with
different behavior in .relation to potential stressors. Moderate and small systems
would be more similar within class than across classes once they are adjusted for
major physicochemical variability (e.g., salinity, sediments). In addition, it makes
sense to monitor the estuarine status of a particular size range in terms of potential
-------
Section 2
Revision 0
Data: 6/9/93
Page 3 of 5
3
CO
0
O
a
2
o
o
IT
-------
Section 2
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Pag* 4 of 5
management consequences. The size classification uses the following associative
criteria:
Large Estuaries: Surface area > 260 km2 and aspect (Length/Average Width)
< 20; 12 systems included. Examples: Chesapeake Bay, Long Island
Sound, Buzzards Bay.
Large Tidal Rivers: Surface area > 260 km2 and aspect > 20; 5 systems
included. This class includes the Hudson River, Potomac River, James
River, Delaware River, and the Rappahannock River.
Small Estuarine Systems: All remaining estuarine systems within the Virginian
Province with surface areas > 2.6 km2 and < 260 km2; 132 systems
included. Examples: Barnegat Bay, Mystic River, Maurice River,
Baltimore Harbor.
2.3 Indicators of Ecosystem Health
The primary goal of EMAP is to provide an assessment of overall ecosystem
condition. To accomplish this goal, a number of "indicators" of ecosystem health have
been proposed. These indicators have been classified as core, developmental, or
research indicators.
Core indicators are those for which there presently exists sufficient data to
define the sensitivity and reliability of responses to stress with a high degree of
confidence. The variability of core indicators over the Index Period is expected to be
smail. Core indicators for the EMAP-E 1993 Virginian Project effort are:
• sediment contaminant concentrations,
• sediment toxicity,
• benthic species composition and biomass,
• salinity, "••
* sediment characteristics (grain size, organic carbon content, percent
water), and
• water depth.
-------
Section 2
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 5 of 5
Developmental indicators are those indicators for which the sampling methods
are not well refined, or for which only limited data are available on their reliability or
sensitivity. In addition, the variability of these indicators over the Index Period is
unknown. One important goal of the Project is to provide the information needed to
assess the reliability, sensitivity, and variability of these indicators, and to develop
appropriate sampling methods. Developmental indicators are:
• dissolved oxygen concentration,
• gross pathology of fish, and
• fish community composition.
Research indicators have the potential to eventually become incorporated into
the program as core indicators after much additional investigation. Sampling methods
are only partially developed and the reliability, sensitivity, and variability of these
indicators are unknown.
2.4 Site Reconnaissance
Prior to the start of field activities, a thorough reconnaissance of the
Virginian Province will be performed. This includes determining the locations of
boat ramps, hotels, and dry ice suppliers; visiting any stations that may fall in
water too shallow for boats; and attempting to identify any potential problems that
the field crews may face during the Index Period. Although 1993 represents the
fourth year of sampling in the Virginian Province, new systems are scheduled for
sampling, therefore, reconnaissance is still an important component of the field
effort.
-------
-------
Section 3
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 3
DESCRIPTION OF FIELD TEAMS
3.1 Personnel
Three teams of field personnel are required to accomplish all sampling
activities. Each of these teams is comprised of two 4-person crews. Each crew is
made up of a Crew Chief (or a Pilot and Chief Scientist), and crew members. One
Crew Chief from each team also serves as the Team Leader, who is ultimately
responsible for all equipment and activities assigned to his/her team. This design is
outlined in Figure 3.1.
All field personnel are employed by universities under the Cooperative
Agreement. The two crews comprising a team work alternating schedules, six
consecutive days on and six days off.
Team Leaders are responsible for the overall operation of their teams, including
tracking equipment and supplies, maintenance, and progress made in sampling
activities. Crew Chiefs and Chief scientists are responsible for assuring the quality of
the data collected and for the daily communications with the EMAP-VP Command
Center (including the transfer of electronic data - see Section 12). Crew Chiefs and
Pilots are responsible for the day-to-day operation of all field gear and for safety.
When the Crew Chief and Chief Scientist are the same person, the Crew Chief will
generally delegate many of the day-to-day activities to a Science Officer.
During the transfer of crews, it is the responsibility of the Team Leader to
assure that all pertinent information be transferred from the crew leaving for home to
the crew coming on duty. This includes the stations sampled by the crew going off
duty, any problems or suggestions, the status of any samples in the mobile lab that
may need to be shipped by the crew starting their shift, a list of supplies that are
running low, and any other information that might be needed or helpful to the crew
coming on duty.
-------
Sections
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 2 of 6
EMAP
Near •
Coastal
.Team 1
Crew 1A
Crew IB
Team 2
Crew 2A
Crew 2B
Team 3
Crew 3A
Crew 3B
TEAM LEADER
Science Off
Crew member
Crew member
Pilot
Chief Scien
Crew member
Crew member
TEAM LEADER
Science Off
Crew member
Crew member
Pilot
Chief Scien
Crew member
Crew member
TEAM LEADER
Science Off
Crew member
Crew member
Pilot
Chief Scien
Crew member
Crew member
Figure 3.1. Personnel distribution of Field Crew for the Virginian Province Project.
-------
Section 3
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 3 of 6
3.2 Station Assignments
As stated above, three teams are needed to sample all stations during the
Project. Team 1 is responsible for all stations from Cape Cod west to the Hudson
River, including those stations in New York Harbor. Team 2 has been assigned those
stations in New Jersey, Pennsylvania, all stations in Delaware, those stations along the
Delaware/Maryland coast, and stations in the Maryland portion of the Chesapeake Bay
north of the Potomac River. Stations in the remainder of the Chesapeake Bay and all
tributaries south of the Potomac River (inclusive), and along the Delmarva Peninsula
have been assigned to Team 3. A listing of stations, by team, can be found in Section
13.
3.3 Equipment
Each team is provided with all the" equipment and supplies required to perform
all sampling activities. This includes a 24-foot boat on a trailer, a four-wheel drive
(4WD) pick-up truck to tow the boat, a 15-foot parcel van to serve as a mobile
laboratory, a mini-van, two field computers, marine-band VHP radios, a cellular
telephone, one Sea-Bird CTD profiling instrument, one benthic grab sampler, two Go-
Flo water sampling bottles, two trawl nets, and ail additional supplies necessary to
successfully complete sampling for all indicators. A complete list of equipment is
provided in Appendix A.
Whereas all equipment required for obtaining samples is carried by the teams
at all times, supplies (e.g., sampling bottles, floppy disks, etc.) are stored at one of
two Base Facilities (see Section 6) and brought to the team by returning off-duty
crews as required. Supplies can also be restocked on days when it is convenient for
the on-duty crew to stop at their Base.
3.3.1 Boats
Each team is supplied with a 24-foot Romarine "Chesapeake"-style work boat
equipped with two 155 Hp commercial Johnson outboard engines, a mast and boom
assembly, a hydraulic winch, and a self-contained power supply to run the hydraulics.
The on-board navigation system consists of a Loran C unit and a Global Positioning
System (GPS) unit interfaced with computerized navigation software contained on a
GRiD laptop computer. In addition, each boat is equipped with radar, two marine VHP
radios, a compass, a depth finder, a video echo sounder, a tool kit, and ail required
and suggested safety equipment. Although replacements are available on most gear,
no spare vessels will be available in 1993.
U.S. EPA Headquarters Library
Mail code 3201
1200 Pennsylvania Avenue NW
Washington DC 20460
-------
Section 3
Revision 0
Data: 6/9/93
Page 4 of 6
3.3.2 Boar Trailers
Each boat is transported on a heavy-duty, dual-axle trailer (each axle equipped
with inertial brakes), and equipped with a power winch, a spare tire, and spare rollers.
3.3.3 Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) Pickup Trucks
A one-ton 4WD pickup truck is used to tow the boat. One spare is located at
ERL-N as a backup, and to tow the spare boat. Trucks are equipped with a CB radio,
camper shell (to allow for stowage of field gear), bed liner, front bumper winch, and a
heavy-duty towing package. Four-wheel drive vehicles were chosen to assure that the
boat can be pulled up steep, wet ramps.
3.3.4 Mobile Laboratory
Each team is equipped with a "mobile laboratory" (a 15-foot "parcel van")
equipped with a CB radio, a marine band VHP radio (to communicate with the boat), a
portable telephone, a GRiD laptop computer, shelves, and a work bench. This vehicle
serves as a communications center as well as a staging area for calibrating
instruments and processing and packaging samples for shipment.
3.3.5 CTD
Each team is equipped with one Sea-Bird, model SBE 25 "Sealogger" CTD unit.
This unit is equipped to measure temperature, salinity, depth, dissolved oxygen, pH,
transmissivity, fluorescence (chlorophyll a) and photosynthetically active radiation
(PAR). Spare probes and an entire spare unit are stored at ERL-N. Data from this
unit are uploaded directly to the on-board GRiD computer.
3.3.6 Trawl Nets
Each team is provided with three 16-meter, high-rise trawl nets.
3.3.7 Wafer Sampling Bottles
Each team is supplied with two General Oceanics 5 liter, Teflon-lined "Go-Flo"
water sampling bottles. An additional two bottles are stored at ERL-N. Each team
also has a supply of spare parts for these units.
-------
Section 3
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 5 of 6
3.3.8 Grab Sampler
Each team is equipped with two stainless steel, Young-modified Van Veen grab
samplers. This gear has a hinged top to allow for the removal of surficial sediments
from the grab.
3.3.9 Laptop Computers
Each team is supplied with two GRiD model 1530 laptop computers. These
computers contain an 80386 processor and are equipped with 2 MB RAM, a 40 MB
hard drive, a 1.4 MB disk drive, a rechargeable battery, an external power cable for
running off of the boat's battery, three serial ports, a VGA-LCD screen (no glare
screen), a external modem with adjustable baud rate, an 80387 math coprocessor, a
battery-operated printer, a bar code reader and a carrying case. Each computer
contains navigation, communications, data management and word processing
software. Three backup computers are stored at ERL-N.
3.4 Chain-of-Command
To avoid confusion and to establish a proper flow of instructions, it is important
that a proper chain-of-command be in place. This order is outlined in Figure 3.2 and
below. The names and phone numbers of appropriate personnel are listed in Section
23.
1. The Crew Chief is directly responsible for all field activities conducted by
his/her crew. If the Crew Chief and Chief Scientist are different people,
the Crew Chief or Pilot is solely responsible for safety, maintenance, and
boat operations; and the Chief Scientist for the collection of data.
2. ALL CHANGES IN THE SAMPLING PLAN THAT ARE OUTSIDE THE
JURISDICTION OF THE CHIEF SCIENTIST ARE COMMUNICATED TO
THE TEAM BY THE FIELD COORDINATOR (FC) OR THE PROJECT
MANAGER. (See Section 18 for a description of allowable changes.)
The teams accept technical direction from no other persons.
3. All technical matters, i.e., equipment problems, questions regarding
station locations, sampling schedules, etc. should be addressed to the
FC by the Chief Scientist AS SOON AS POSSIBLE.
4. If the FC cannot resolve the problem (e.g., determine how a station may
be relocated), he then takes the matter to the Project Manager, the
Technical Director, or other appropriate personnel.
-------
Section 3
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 6 of 6
Contract Mgmt.
Support
L
EMAP-NC
Associate Director
Contingency
Committee
EMAP QA
Coordinator
EMAP-NC
Technical
Director
Data Management
Support Group
EMAP-NC QA
Officer
Synthesis and
Integration Group
EMAP-VP ; ,-
Proj ect Manager'
Field Operations
Center Support Staff
Processing
Laboratories
Field Coordinator
EMAP-VP QA
Coordinator
Figure 3.2; EMAP-NC Virginian Province Project management scheme for field
activities.
-------
Section 4
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 4
SAFETY
Field sampling endeavors are inherently dangerous. Operation of boats and
sampling equipment even under ideal conditions carry a high degree of risk. This
danger is greatly compounded in bad weather. Safety of the crews and equipment is
of paramount importance throughout the Project.
4.1 Training
All field personnel are required to participate in an extensive training program
(see Section 5). An important component of this training is related to safety
procedures and precautions. All field personnel must demonstrate to the instructors
that they are aware of all safety protocols and are capable of operating all gear in a
safe manner. Training includes rules of the road for marine vessels, first aid,
hazardous material handling techniques, and basic marine fire fighting.
Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) certification is required as part of training.
4.2 Swimming Proficiency Requirement
Since a large portion of each crew, member's time is spent in a small boat, all
field personnel are required to demonstrate swimming proficiency. Although flotation
gear is worn whenever sampling gear is being operated, there is always the potential
for someone to fall overboard without a flotation vest.
4.3 Priorities
The safety of personnel is, at all times, the Crew Chief's number one priority. At
no time should the crew take unreasonable risks to obtain a sample.
The safety of the general public is included in this top priority. At no time
should the crew operate any vehicle or equipment in any way that might endanger the
public. In addition, sampling activities must cease immediately if the crew is in a
position to render assistance in life or limb threatening situations.
The second priority is the safety of major equipment. Loss of a boat, pickup
truck, or CTD could jeopardize the program. Activities that represent an unreasonable
risk to this equipment must not be attempted. It is up to the discretion of the Crew
Chief to determine what risks are unreasonable.
-------
Section 4
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 2 of 6
4.4 Accidents
Exact procedures to follow in the event of an accident are described along with
the operation of the vehicles and boats (sections 8 and; 9). As described in Section
4.3, the number one priority in the event of an accident'is to assure the safety and
well-being of crew members and the general public. This is followed by the safety of
major pieces of equipment, the samples, and then minbr, replaceable equipment.
4.5 Personnel Emergency Information
All field personnel are issued identification cards that carry their name and
emergency information. This information includes medical problems, allergies, and the
names and phone numbers of persons to be contacted in the event of an emergency.
The EMAP telephone number is included on this card. !
In addition, emergency information for all crew members is stored in each field
computer, and at the Field Operations Center. Emergency Information on the field
computers can be accessed from the main menu.
Each Crew Chief must be aware of any medical problems his/her crew
members may have. He/she must also be aware of any medication (including
seasickness medication) taken be any crew member, as this could impair the
reactions of that person.
4.6 Operation of Equipment
All EMAP equipment must be operated in a safe manner. Safety procedures
for each piece of equipment are described in the sections describing the operation of
that gear.
At no time should anyone operate heavy gear (such as the hydraulic winch or
boat) while under the influence of any prescription drugs that could impair reactions.
Likewise, CONSUMPTION OF ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES DURING, OR IMMEDIATELY
PRIOR TO, FIELD ACTIVITIES IS ABSOLUTELY PROHIBITED.
4.7 Safety Equipment
Each boat is equipped with required and recommended safety equipment.
Each boat contains hard hats for all personnel, appropriate personal flotation devices
(PFDs) and survival suits, a Type IV life ring, a "life sling" man overboard rescue
-------
Section 4
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 3 of 6
device, fire extinguishers, flares, a portable spotlight (works off of cigarette lighter), a
heavy-duty flashlight, a Class A Emergency Position Indicator Radio Beacon (EPIRB),
an eyewash kit, and an extensive first aid kit. In addition, each boat is equipped with
a main and backup radio, and radar.
Each mobile lab is equipped with a fire extinguisher, heavy-duty flashlight,
eyewash kit, and first aid kit, in addition to a mobile telephone that can be used to call
for assistance.
4.9 Weather Conditions
Since all sampling operations are conducted from small boats, weather
conditions and sea state are important safety considerations. In no case should
sampling be attempted in large, open systems when the Coast Guard has issued
small craft warnings. Likewise, seas in excess of two feet may also require a delay of
field activities. The crews should monitor one of the marine-band weather channels
prior to departing from the dock each morning. It is the responsibility of the Crew
Chief to assess weather conditions and the locations of the stations to be sampled,
and make a decision as to whether or not sampling activities can be safely
accomplished.
Even if weather conditions are not severe enough to force the cancellation of
sampling activities, the Crew Chief may elect to return to shore if crew members
become severely seasick and are unable to function in a safe manner, or if the quality
of data collection becomes questionable.
4.10 Responsibility for Safety
Although each crew member is responsible for his/her safety and for operating
all gear in a safe and responsible manner, it is the responsibility of the Crew Chief to
assure the safety of his/her crew.
4.11 Boat Itinerary
Each time the boat crew departs from the dock, the boat Crew Chief or Pilot
provides the crew member remaining on shore with an itinerary. This includes the
areas in which the boat will be operating and the time they expect to return to the
dock. Any changes in this schedule must be transmitted by radio to the lab. If the"
boat is overdue by more than one hour, the land-based crew member should attempt
to contact the boat by radio. Attempts should continue until the boat is contacted.
If the crew has not returned within four hours of the expected arrival time, and
-------
Section 4
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 4 of 6
no contact has been made, the lab crew member should notify the Coast Guard by
phone that a boat is overdue. He/she should inform them of the area in which the
boat was working, a description and name of the boat, the number of people on
board, and that the boat is a U.S. government vessel on official business. The Coast
Guard should also be informed that the caller (the lab) will be monitoring Channel 16,
and can be contacted by a Coast Guard vessel on that channel.
It is the responsibility of the Crew Chief or Pilot to inform the lab crew member
of any changes in the boat's itinerary. If the boat crew cannot reach the lab by radio
directly, and the boat will be more than four hours late returning to dock, they should
attempt to contact the lab via the marine operator, trying to reach it both on the lab's
radio and cellular telephone.
If the boat crew has been unable to contact the lab and their estimated time of
arrival at the dock is greater than four hours past their original projection, the boat
crew should notify the Coast Guard, who, in turn, can pass this information to the lab
crew member when he/she attempts to notify the Coast Guard of the overdue boat.
4.12 Handling of Hazardous Materials
Some hazardous materials are carried on board each boat. In addition to
gasoline, boats are carrying small quantities of formalin and Dietrich's fixative (formalin,
acetic acid, and alcohol). All of these compounds present some form of health
hazard. In no case should containers be opened in the cabin; use of any of these
materials requires adequate ventilation. Gasoline is very volatile, therefore, SMOKING
ON BOARD THE BOATS IS ABSOLUTELY PROHIBITED. Solvents should always
be stored on deck in the shade away from any equipment that could generate a
spark.
Care should be taken when using any hazardous material. Protective clothing
(gloves, boots, safety glasses) must be worn when using these materials.
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) for the hazardous materials to be carried
on board are included in Appendix B. First aid information is listed on these sheets.
The appropriate MSDS should be read before handling any hazardous material.
Dry ice is carried in the bed of the pickup truck. Care must be exercised when
handling dry ice or samples frozen on dry ice. Under no circumstances should dry
ice, or samples frozen on dry ice, be handled without insulated gloves. Doing so
could result in severe damage to the skin and tissue that comes in contact with it. In
addition, as dry ice warms and sublimes it releases carbon dioxide gas. Although the
danger of suffocation is small, it still exists. Therefore, large quantities of dry ice
-------
Section 4
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 5 of 6
should not be stored in the mobile lab. Dry ice should only be stored outside, or in
the back of the pickup truck. A greater danger from suffocation exists during the
process of loading or unloading samples from the dry ice chest. As a result of
sublimation, most of the oxygen in the chest is displaced by heavier carbon dioxide.
Crew members must avoid breathing in this gas.
4.13 Proper Handling of Potentially Hazardous Samples
Several of the stations to be sampled during the Project are located in
contaminated systems. Sediments, organisms, and water collected at these stations
may present a health hazard to field personnel if proper precautions are not followed.
Many compounds can be absorbed through the skin; therefore, protective clothing is
required when sampling at these sites. Any station in or around an urban
environment should be treated as a potentially contaminated site.
The following precautions should be taken when sampling at potentially
contaminated stations:
1. Always wear protective rubber or Viton gloves along with rubber boots. Eye
protection or face shields may also be appropriate, as are boots and protective
coveralls or foul weather gear.
2. Avoid touching "clean" surfaces such as the steering wheel while wearing
gloves that have been in contact with contaminated materials.
3. During trawling and benthic sampling, wear foul weather gear and boots to
minimize the possibility of contaminated material contacting the skin.
4. As sample containers are handled on-site and are therefore contaminated on
the outside, place these containers in clean plastic bags and seal them. Do not
handle the bags with contaminated gloves.
5. When removing sediment from grabs it is often necessary to have your face
close to the sample. In this case, surgical masks should be worn to reduce the
possibility of inhalation of particulates.
7. Following the completion of sampling, the boat and all gear should be
thoroughly rinsed to remove any contaminated sediment. As soon as possible
(back at the dock, enroute to an uncontaminated station, etc.), the boat and ail
gear should be scrubbed with detergent and rinsed with CLEAN seawater or
fresh water. Nets can be towed (mid-water) at a clean site with the cod end
-------
Section 4
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 6 of 6
open to rinse them.
8. All personnel should wash their hands with detergent and clean water following
removal of the gloves or contact with any contaminated surface.
9. In the event that bare skin comes into contact with contaminated sediments, the
sediment should be washed off of the skin with detergent and clean water as
soon as possible, if clean water is not available, ambient water can be used
since the level of contamination in the water is always significantly lower than
that of the sediment.
10. As a general rule at all stations, food should always be protected from coming
in contact with boat surfaces. When working at contaminates sites, the crew
should elect to refrain from eating lunch until they, can return to the dock and
wash their hands. :
-------
Section 5
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 1 of 2
SECTION 5
TRAINING
Proper training of all laboratory and field personnel in their respective duties is
an important aspect of the project. Training can be segregated into four sets of
activities: Crew Chief/Pilot training, Chief Scientist training, formal crew training
(classroom and structured demonstrations) and dry runs. All training for the project
falls under the general jurisdiction of the Project Manager; specific training in select
technical areas is delegated to those responsible for indicators and/or specific
activities.
5.1 Crew Chief/Pilot Training
Intensive training of Crew Chiefs and Pilots will be conducted from May 17 to
May 30, 1993. This will include navigation, computer operation, vessel operation,
operation and maintenance of the electronic instruments. One week of training will be
in Narragansett, Ri and one week will be field training and reconnaissance in the
respective sampling areas
5.2 Chief Scientist/Science Officer Training
Training of Chief Scientists and Science Officers will be conducted from June
14 to June 20, 1993. This training will include computer system operations, sampling
and shipping procedures, and an overview of the scientific principles behind the
sampling. Greater emphasis will be placed this year on CTD cast quality assurance.
This training will include classroom, laboratory, and field activities. Chief
Scientist/Science Officer training will be conducted by SAIC, ROW, URI, and external
consultants as needed.
5.3 Crew Training
Formal crew training will begin on June 21, 1993 and continue through July 22
at URI. CPR certification will be required during crew training. Formal training will
include all other aspects of safety (including first aid), sampling and shipping
procedures, boat operation, navigation, and maintenance. Training will be conducted
by EPA, SAIC, ROW, URI and external consultants as needed. Training will consist of
classroom, laboratory, and field activities.
-------
Section 5
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 2 of 2
Crews will participate in at least five days of "dry runs" following the completion
of formal training. The "A" crews will practice the week of July 12, and the "B" crews
the following week. Teams 1, 2 and 3 will work in the New England area and be
certified in Narragansett Bay. The purpose of the dry runs is to provide the crews the
opportunity to integrate activities and practice full sampling days, including boat,
mobile laboratory, and shipping activities. The Chief Scientists wilt serve as the
primary instructors during this phase.
The Field Coordinator, VP QA Coordinator, or the EMAP-NC QA Coordinator
will visit each crew during dry runs to conduct QA audits. This exercise will be used
to "certify" crews as being ready to conduct sampling activities according to sampling
procedures, safety standards and QA protocols.
Following the completion of dry runs, the crews will return to their respective
base location for a review and critique of that week's activities.
-------
Section 6
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 1 of 1
SECTION 6
LAND-BASED FACILITIES
All sampling activities are conducted on the water from small boats. It is
necessary to have a network of land-based support facilities to assure efficient
operation of the sampling effort. This network consists of three tiers.
6.1 Mobile Laboratories
The foundation of the network is the mobile laboratory. Each team is equipped
with a 15-foot parcel van to serve as this facility. This is used for storing supplies and
equipment, and as a staging area, communications center, and packaging and
shipping center. Boat personnel must maintain contact with the crew member
manning the mobile lab, and all contact from the Field Operations Center will be to
this lab via cellular telephone.
6.2 Base Facilities
Base Facilities can also be categorized as resupply depots. All extra supplies,
such as sample bottles, are stored at these facilities for transport to the teams as
needed. The EPA's Environmental Research Laboratory in Narragansett, Rhode
Island (ERL-N) serves as the Base for Team 1. The Base for Team 3 is Horn Point
Lab of the University of Maryland. Team 2 is serviced by both these facilities. These
sites also serve as a place for crew members to park their personal vehicles, and
therefore, as a rendezvous point for crews returning to duty.
6.3 Field Operations Center
All field operations are coordinated from the Field Operations Center (FOC)
located at ERL-N. The Data Base Management Team, VAX computer, Reid
Coordinator, and Project Manager are all located at this facility. ERL-N also serves as
the main base for storing back-up equipment such as boats, trucks, CTDs, etc.
During non-sampling periods, all equipment is stored at ERL-N.
-------
-------
Section 7
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 7
PROFESSIONALISM
During field operations, crews will be driving vehicles and operating vessels
identified as property of the U.S. government. The field crews should understand that
they will be perceived as representatives of the federal government. This puts the field
crews in the public eye, and makes it imperative that they act professionally at all
times.
7.1 General Contact with the Public
As representatives of the U.S. EPA, field crews should deal with the general
public in a courteous manner at all times. Field personnel should take the time to
answer questions regarding EMAP, and provide a copy of the Information Pamphlet,
pointing out the Toil-Free number they can call for additional information.
The field crews must also remember that what they say about the program
directly impacts public perception of EMAP and the EPA. Negative statements about
the program, methods employed, or the gear used will not be tolerated. It is the
responsibility of the Crew Chiefs and Team Leaders to assure that all contact with the
general public results in a positive portrayal of the program.
It is especially important to take the time to properly describe the goals of the
program to any fisherman that expresses an interest A fisherman's livelihood is totally
dependent on his/her ability to operate successfully in local waters. The sight of a
U.S. government research vessel sampling in those waters may instill a fear that the
researchers will determine that the water is polluted, thereby closing them to fishing.
The result would be putting the fisherman out of business. Field crews are the "front
line" in terms of correctly communicating the goals of EMAP. The manner in which the
crews interact with the fishermen is critical in allaying their fears and gaining their trust
and assistance. Along the same line, whenever a fisherman's gear (lobster or crab
pots) are caught in a trawl, every attempt should be made to return it to the same
area from which it was snagged.
When possible, the field crew should render assistance to other boaters in need
of help. ALL FIELD OPERATIONS MUST CEASE IMMEDIATELY WHEN THE CREW IS
IN A POSITION TO RENDER ASSISTANCE IN LIFE OR UMB THREATENING
EMERGENCIES. The crew should use their resources, such as the portable
telephone, to assist in any emergency, whether EMAP personnel are directly involved
or not.
-------
Section 7
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 2 of 3
7.2 Operation of Motor Vehicles
Any time a person is operating a U.S. government vehicle, he/she must realize
that "the public is watching them." Many people would not hesitate to complain to the
Agency if they felt that a government vehicle was being operated improperly.
Therefore, all traffic laws, especially speed limits, must be carefully observed. The
driver must operate the vehicle in a responsible manner, acting courteously to other
drivers and pedestrians.
7.3 Operation of Boats
As with motor vehicles, field crews must operate the EMAP boats in a
professional manner at all times. At no time should the boats be operated in a
discourteous, reckless, or unsafe manner. These are work boats; therefore, water
skiing (between stations), fishing, or any other activity that could be perceived by the
general public as a "waste of their tax dollars" is prohibited. It is the responsibility of
the Crew Chief to assure this.
7.4 Radio Operation
Radio operations are an important part of daily activities. Radio
communications are frequently monitored by the Coast Guard and the general public,
therefore, it is imperative that proper procedures be followed in a professional manner.
Call signs and the name of the boat must always be used, profanity is prohibited, and
all communications must be restricted to the proper channels. Details on the
operation of radios are included in Section 9. The working channel assigned to EMAP
by the FCC (Channel 82A) is shared by other U.S. government operations, therefore
all communications should be as concise as possible and communications should be
restricted to official business. It is the responsibility of the Crew Chief to assure that
proper procedures are followed.
7.5 Waste Disposal .
. Garbage generated by the field crews must be disposed of property. At no
time should anything that did not come out of the trawl or dredge be thrown into the
water. Boats and mobile labs are equipped with garbage pails which is where all
trash generated should be placed for proper disposal on shore (in a public trash
receptacle). At no time may trash be disposed of in private receptacles.
-------
Section/
Revision 0
Data: 6/9/93
Page 3 of 3
Hazardous wastes generated, such as waste formalin, must be disposed of
properly as described in Section 22.
Following trawling operations, a potentially large quantity of dead fish or fish
parts will need to be disposed of. The contents of a trawl should be returned to the
water, however, and the Crew Chief should be considerate of other boaters and
choose a location away from pleasure boats, public beaches, or docks to perform this
processing. Dead carcasses should be disposed of at sea in open areas. Disposal
on land should be avoided.
-------
-------
Section 8
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 1 of 7
SECTION 8
VEHICLE OPERATIONS
During field operations, crews must drive considerable distances over roads of
varying quality. It is important that all crew members be capable of operating all
vehicles in a safe manner.
8.1 General Guidelines
There are a number of general "common sense" guidelines that field personnel
should follow regardless of which vehicle they are operating:
1. Observe all posted speed limits.
2. Reduce speed during rain or reduced visibility.
3. Never follow too closely, even if following another EMAP vehicle. The old
rule of one car length per 10 mph should be observed, and this should
be doubled on slippery pavement or when trailering the boat.
4. Avoid driving .on or near the center yellow line. The width of the boat
significantly exceeds that of the towing vehicle, therefore, although the
truck is on the right side of the road, the frailer may be straddling the
center line.
5. Be aware of road regulations. The mobile lab and boat trailer are not
permitted on Parkways and other roads on which commercial vehicles
are excluded.
6. Be aware of the minimum overhead clearance for the vehicle being
driven. When towing the boat the clearance is 11 feet
7. Always act courteously towards other drivers.
8. Never drive in a reckless manner.
9. NEVER DRIVE AFTER DRINKING ANY ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES.
10. Never drive when overly tired. Following a long day on the water it is
-------
Section 8
Revision 0
Oato: 6/9/93
Page 2 of 7
more appropriate to stay in a motel and drive the following morning
rather than that evening.
11. Never drive when on prescription drugs that might impair your reactions.
12. If an accident is observed, and you are in a position to render assistance
{if it is needed), do so. Make sure that your vehicle is out of the way
and will not hamper emergency vehicles or traffic flow around the scene.
Use the portable telephone in the mobile laboratory to call for assistance.
REMEMBER YOUR FIRST AID!!! UNLESS THE VEHICLE IS IN DANGER
OF CATCHING FIRE, AN INJURED OCCUPANT SHOULD NEVER BE
MOVED FROM THE VEHICLE UNLESS HE/SHE HAS BEEN
PROPERLY ATTENDED TO BY QUALIFIED MEDICAL PERSONNEL!!!!
If you are qualified to treat a patient, and begin treatment, you are
OBLIGATED BY LAW to remain with that patient until he/she is turned
over to someone of equal or higher qualification.
13. Be careful where you park the vehicles. Try to avoid parking in high
crime areas and always make sure all valuable gear is stored in a secure
area. ;
t
14. Prior to moving any vehicle check around itito make sure everything is
clear. THIS IS ESPECIALLY IMPORTANT WITH THE MOBILE LAB.
MAKE SURE THE VHF ANTENNA IS DOWN PRIOR TO MOVING THE
MOBILE LAB!!!!!
8.2 Procedures Following an Accident
If one of the EMAP vehicles is involved in an accident, the following procedures
must be followed:
1. All vehicles in the convoy should stop. Vehicles other than the one
involved in the accident should pull off to the side of the road.
2. The portable telephone should be used to call for assistance. Inform the
emergency operator of the following information:
a. the exact location of the accident;
b. the approximate severity of the accident (fender bender, rollover,
etc.);
c. whether there are any obvious injuries (e.g., two serious injuries);
d. any other information needed.
-------
Section 8
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 3 of 7
3. The person making the call MUST stay on the line with the
emergency operator until the operator hangs up. THE FIELD
PERSON SHOULD NEVER HANG UP THE PHONE UNTIL THE
EMERGENCY OPERATOR TELLS HIM/HER TO. The person making
the call should provide the operator with the telephone number
(including access code) so the operator can call back if necessary.
4. THE FIRST PRIORITY IS ALWAYS THE SAFETY OF THE FIELD
CREW AND THE GENERAL PUBLIC. Injuries must be attended to
immediately.
5. REMEMBER YOUR FIRST AID!!! UNLESS THE VEHICLE IS IN DANGER
OF CATCHING FIRE, AN INJURED OCCUPANT SHOULD NEVER BE
MOVED FROM THE VEHICLE UNLESS HE/SHE HAS BEEN
PROPERLY ATTENDED TO BY QUALIFIED MEDICAL PERSONNEL!!!!
If you are qualified to treat a patient, and begin treatment, you are
OBLIGATED BY LAW to remain with that patient until he/she is turned
over to someone of equal or higher qualification.
6. When the police arrive, complete an accident report, providing any
documentation required. Insurance information should be provided, in
advance for each vehicle by the field coordinator.
NOTE: Vehicles carrying U.S. government license plates (pickup truck
and boat trailer) do not carry vehicle registration. The police
officer should be informed of this, and that the vehicle is officially
registered to:
United States Environmental Protection Agency
Environmental Monitoring and Assessment Program
27 Tarzwell Drive
Narragansett, Rl 02882
1-(800)-732-2305 or (401) 782-3000
7. Emergency information for each crew member will be on file in all field
computers, as well as at the FOC and with the Field Coordinator
8. Notify the Field Coordinator AS SOON AS POSSIBLE of any accidents.
Depending on the severity, operations may be postponed, or
replacement equipment and/or personnel sent to the team.
9. Field Crew members are not permitted to drive any vehicle carrying U.S.
-------
Section 8
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/03
Page 4 of 7
government license plates. Designated federal employees should be the
operators of these vehicles. Specific instructions and procedures are
outlined in an information packet which should be kept in the glove
compartment at all times. The EPA Program Manager should be
contacted immediately after any accident involving these vehicles.
8.3 Traileririg Guidelines
Although the boat itself is only 24-feet long, adding in the outboard engines and
brackets, and the trailer tongue brings the trailer package to over 30 feet Attached to
the pickup truck, the entire package is over 50-feet long. Operators must keep this in
mind, both when changing lanes on the highway and when maneuvering around
corners. The following guidelines should be noted:
3.
4.
5.
6.
Whenever changing lanes or turning comers, observe the side view
mirrors to assure that the back of the trailer has clearance.
Each day, and each time the trailer is disconnected and then
reconnected to the truck, a check of the trailer lighting system must be
performed. This includes checking taillights, directional signals, and
brake lights. Each time the crew departs for a new location, the security
of the hitch and weight distributing bars must be checked. This involves
checking the hitch locking mechanism, the padlock, safety chains, boat
tie down, and that all gear in the boat (especially the mast and boom
assembly) is property secured. Appropriate checklists are included in
Appendix A.
Observe posted speed limits at ail times.
Remember that the frailer is wider than the truck. Make sure there is
sufficient lateral clearance in parking lots.
Note the required overhead clearance for the boat (11 feet - posted in
the truck over the driver's sun visor). Care must be exercised when
driving down back roads with overhanging trees.
Whenever the trailer is being backed up, one of the crew members must
act as a spotter to direct the driver. The spotter must stand in a position
to see the back of the trailer and must be visible to the driver.
_
-------
Section 8
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 5 of 7
7. When backing up the trailer, remember that it turns in the OPPOSITE
direction from the truck. A simple rule for backing up is to turn the
steering wheel in the direction opposite to the direction you wish the
trailer to go.
8. To assure proper functioning of the trailer, it should be washed down
with fresh water (particularly the brakes) as frequently as possible. This
could be done at a self-service car wash, AS LONG AS THE OVERHEAD
CLEARANCE IS SUFFICIENT TO ACCOMMODATE THE BOAT. As of
1992 the trailers will be supplied with a "Brake Bath" system, which
provides a hose-hookup and will automatically rinse the brakes when
properly connected to a fresh water source. Maintenance, as described
in Section 19, must also be followed.
8.4 Operation of Winch :
Each EPA pickup truck Is equipped with a front bumper-mounted winch. This
winch is used to pull the truck and boat up ramps that are too steep and slippery for
four- wheel drive alone. If the winch is needed, the following procedures should be
followed (more detailed instructions can be found in the owners manual located in the
truck's glove compartment):
1. Connect the remote control unit to the winch.
2. Release the winch .brake and pull out the needed amount of cable.
3. Attach the end of the winch cable to an appropriate object as close to
ground level as possible. This should be something strong enough to
remain fixed in place. A large tree or cement post would be appropriate.
The cable should not be wrapped around the object. Use a chain (e.g.
anchor chain), and then connect the cable to the chain.
4. If an appropriate object is not available for connecting the winch cable
to, the mobile lab can be used. Back the lab to just above .the top of the
ramp. Place the .transmission in Park, engage the parking brake, and
place chocks behind all four wheels. Attach the winch cable to the
trailer hitch or frame on the mobile lab.
5. Take up slack in the. cable (maintaining tension whenever the winch is
pulling cable in).
-------
Section 8
Revision 0
Data: 6/9/93
Page 6 of 7
6. With the winch operator standing dear of the cable, start taking up on
the winch. At the same time, place the pickup truck in Low gear.
Between 4WD/low range and the winch, the boat should be pulled up
the ramp.
7. When the winch is no longer needed, take up the remaining cable.
Maintain tension on the cable during this process and make sure that it
spools properly.
8. Disconnect the remote control from the winch and place it in the glove
compartment. -
8.5 Operation of the Citizens Band (CB) Radios
Each truck and mobile laboratory are equipped with CB radios to provide for
communications between the crew members in those vehicles. As with vessel radio
operations, crews are expected to conduct themselves in a professional manner when
using the CB radios. Operators not familiar with the operation of these units or the
proper protocols for using them should consult the owners manual. CB radios
operate on channels 1-40. Channel 9 is reserved for emergencies and should be
used only for that purpose. As all channels are shared, communications should be
kept as concise as possible. Channel 19 is generally reserved for traffic information.
Only information regarding traffic (accidents, backups, etc.) should be transmitted on
this channel. EMAP vehicles should routinely monitor 19 to determine the best travel
routes. CB radio operators have adopted the "10-code1 for standard communications
(Table 8.1). To initiate communications, wait for a pause in transmissions and request
a break. Transmit messages in a professional manner and always act courteously to
other users. Priority must always be given to emergency transmissions. These radios
should aide crews during land travel between staging locations.
-------
I
Section 8
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 7 of 7
Table 8.1. Commonly used 10-codes
Code
10-1
10-2
10-3
10-4
10-7
10-8
10-9
10-10
Meaning
Receiving poorly
Receiving well
Stop transmitting
OK
Out of service
In service
Repeat
Standing by
Code
10-13
10-20
10-21
10-33
10-36
10-41
10-62
Meaning
Advise on road/weather
conditions
What is your location?
Call by telephone
Emergency traffic
Correct time
Switch to channel
Cannot understand
-------
-------
Section 9
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 1 of 17
SECTION 9
OPERATION OF BOATS
9.1 Weather Conditions
Local weather conditions will be a factor influencing whether or not to sample
on a given day, at a particular site. If a small craft advisory has been issued by the
Coast Guard, sampling may be canceled until the advisory has been lifted. However,
there are some stations located in sheltered areas which may be sampled during high
wind conditions. If conditions are deemed unsuitable by the Crew Chief, sampling will
be postponed until conditions improve. The primary concern at all times is the safety
of the crew and equipment In the event that distant sites within a sampling region are
inaccessible due to local weather conditions, a more sheltered site may be chosen for
sampling providing the safety of the crew and equipment is assured, and the site is
within the scheduled sampling region. The following information is provided as a
general guideline for determining the safely of sampling on a given day.
Before launching:
1. Obtain the latest weather forecast from local and NOAA Weather
broadcasts (see below for more information regarding NOAA
broadcasts).
2. Note any warning signals at local Coast Guard stations.
3. Remain on shore unless the boat can be safely navigated under the
expected weather conditions.
4. If conditions are acceptable for safe boat operation, leave instructions
with the mobile unit on shore to contact the boat with the marine radio or
cellular phone in the event of an oncoming storm.
5. Notify the Field Coordinator (FC) of any changes in schedule during the
morning call-in (see Section 12).
While underway:
1. Keep an eye out for changing conditions. These would include:
darkness, fog, threatening clouds (thunderstorm or squall), steady
increases in wind velocity or wave height, or sudden changes in wind
direction.
-------
2.
3.
4.
Section 9
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 2 of 17
Continue to monitor NOAA weather broadcasts.
If caught in a thunderstorm, retreat to cabin, avoid touching ungrounded
metal objects or more than one grounded object at the same time, and
be sure ail crew members have PFDs securely fastened.
If severe weather is approaching or conditions begin to deteriorate,
discontinue sampling and head for port, if there is time to safely reach
the launch site, do so, otherwise proceed to the nearest safe harbor.
5. Notify the Field Coordinator of any changes to the sampling schedule.
NOAA Weather Radio broadcasts continuously on VHF-FM stations. Forecasts
are normally updated every three to six hours. During situations when weather
conditions are changing rapidly, forecasts are updated more frequently. Broadcasts
include the weather patterns for the region, marine forecasts and warnings for coastal
waters, special bulletins in the event of severe weather, and reports on tidal
conditions.
9.2 Launching and Recovering Procedures
Launching and recovering the boat are procedures with which all crew
members must be familiar. It is important to follow a set routine to avoid lost sampling
time which may result from injuries or damaged equipment. The following
procedures outline the basic steps for launching and recovering the boat. Checklists
are included in Appendix A.
9.2.1 Launching:
1. Check the boat ramp to be sure there are no obstacles, such as other
boaters, people, or debris.
2. Check all drainage plugs and tighten as necessary. Drainage plugs are
located at the bottom apex of the transom and on the bottom of the
outboard bracket.
3. Check the scupper plugs, and screw to close as necessary. Scupper
plugs should not be tightened!
4. Raise the motors if they are not already in the full-tilt position. Release
the safety latch so the motor is supported in the tiit position by the
-------
Section 9
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 3 of17
hydraulic trim unit.
5. Remove the tie-down strap.
6. Assemble the mast and boom as described in Section 9.3.
7. Disconnect the trailer lights to minimize the chance of an electrical short
in case saltwater leaks into one of the lights, or in case there is a cut in a
wire.
8. Engage 4WD if the ramp is steep or slippery, or if traction is in any way
uncertain.
9. Locate the end of the ramp to avoid backing the trailer over the edge.
10. Slowly back down the ramp until the boat can safely be launched. One
crew member must act as a spotter for the driver. He/she must be in a
position to watch the back of the trailer, and must be visible to the driver.
11. Remove the safety chain connecting the boat to the trailer.
12. Have two crew members hold the bow and stern lines to guide the boat
when it is lowered into the water. ' •
13. * Carefully lower the boat into the water by slowly releasing the winch
brake. No power supply is needed; the weight of the boat should be
enough to slide the boat into the water.
14. Secure the boat to the dock in a place which will not interfere with other
boat traffic.
15. Park the vehicle with the trailer in an appropn'ate parking space.
16. Check the gas level in the boat.
-------
Section 9
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 4 o!17
9.2.2 Recovering:
1. Secure the boat to the dock and unload sampling equipment.
2. If there are any overhead obstacles (e.g., low power lines), lower the
mast and boom assembly prior to recovering the boat If the area over
the ramp is clear, the mast assembly can be left up during the recovery
process. Also determine where the rig can be parked during the
process of lowering the mast. Make sure there is adequate overhead
clearance between the ramp and the "de-rigging" area.
3. Empty the bilge of any accumulated water.
4. Engage 4WD low range on the truck.
5. Locate the end of the ramp to avoid backing the trailer over the edge.
When clear, back the trailer down the ramp and connect power supply to
winch.
6. Have one or two crew members guide the boat with bow and stern lines.
7. Have the third crew member drive the boat into position at the rear of the
trailer. The driver should keep the boat in gear at low speed (one motor
in gear, one idling in neutral) to maintain position until the winch cable
can be attached. It is important to keep the boat running to maintain
position, particularly when there are strong or gusty winds, or strong
currents. Once the cable js attached and the winch engaged, stop the
motors and raise them to full tilt position.
8. Pull the boat onto the trailer with the winch. Keep clear of the cable to
prevent injury in the event of cable or hardware failure. NOTE: The
electric winch, if used should always be used in the double pull
mode. An emergency hand winch is provided in case of failure of the
electric winch. This winch provides for two gear settings, as well as a
free-spool setting.
NOTE:
To eliminate unnecessary winch operation the
vessels may be powered up the trailer with the
outboard engines tilted up. This operation should
only be attempted with the discretion of the crew
-------
Section 9
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 5 of 17
chief. Care should be taken to assure personal
safety during this maneuver.
9. Continue to guide the rear of the boat with the stern line.
10. Once the boat is in position on the trailer, secure it with the safety chain.
11. Drive slowly up the ramp to remove boat and trailer from the water. On
very steep or slippery ramps, even four-wheel drive may not be sufficient
to pull the boat up the ramp. In such a case, use the winch mounted on
the front bumper of the truck to help. See Section 8.4 for details.
12. Use the winch to snug the boat into final position for traileringi
13. Lower and secure the mast assembly and antennae if this procedure has
not yet been done. Refer to Section 9.3 for details on lowering the mast
assembly.
14. Secure the tie-down strap.
15. Reconnect and check the trailer lighting system.
16. Check the trailer safety and brake chains.
17. Inspect the boat. Check for any hull damage. Remove or secure any
loose objects on the deck or in the cabin. Be sure the mast assembly is
securely lashed to the boat and that all antennae are either tied down or
locked in the lowered position. Make sure all electronics are secured.
18. Engage the engine safety latch and lower the engines until they are
resting on the latch and not on the power trim cylinder.
19. Store any remaining gear in the vehicles.
20. Disengage 4VVD. First shift out of 4WD then disengage the front hubs.
21. The boat should now be ready for transport to the next site. •
22. CHECK TO MAKE SURE THE MOBILE LAB VHP ANTENNA IS
DOWN.
23. Check oil and gas levels to plan for the next fuel stop. (When possible,
-------
Section 9
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 6 of 17
defer filling the tank until near the next site to avoid trailering a full tank of
gas!)
9.3 Mast Assembly and Antenna Set-Up
The mast assembly consists of a mast with a boom, five stays, three lines
leading off the boom and a radar antenna dome. Set-up and take-down of the mast
assembly are most easily accomplished while the boat is on land; however, at some
ramps limited overhead clearance (trees or power lines) may make it necessary to
raise the mast after the boat has been launched. The mast should always be raised
and securely fastened with stays during the launching and hauling of the vessel to
minimize stress on the aluminum mast The set-up and take-down procedures for the
mast assembly are described below.
9.3.1 Mast assembly set-up: \ •,
; •
1. Remove all tie-down straps. ; .
2. Remove the retaining bolt from the mast support bracket on the cabin
, roof.
3. Pull slack from the center line which runs from the mast to the boom.
4. Slowly raise the mast and boom into an upright position. Be particularly
mindful that the hydraulic lines are not pinched, and that the tumbuckles
(attached to the stays) are not damaged as the mast is raised into
position.
5. Once the mast is upright, bolt it into position in the support bracket on
the cabin roof.
6. Secure the three forward mast stays to the bow and forward corners of
the cabin using shackles and turnbuckles. Secure the side support
stays using shackles and tighten turnbuckles until all cables are taut.
Forward turnbuckles should be tightened before those for the side
support stays. THE BOAT SHOULD NEVER BE USED WITHOUT ALL
OF THE MAST STAYS BEING SECURED. The mast flexes very easily
and can create metal fatigue.
7. Lower the boom with the center line to approximately 45 degrees from
vertical, and secure in this position by lashing to the mast cleat.
-------
Section 9
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 7 of 17
8. Tighten port and starboard boom lines and secure to cleats,
9.3.2 Mast assembly take-down:
1. Loosen port and starboard boom lines.
2. Raise boom with the center line, then pivot to one side and secure.
3. Loosen turnbuckles and detach all stays (side stays first) and remove the
bolt from the center mast bracket, while supporting the mast in the
upright position..
4. Lower the mast assembly onto a supporting cross board and securely
lash in place. Great care should be observed while lowering the mast
because the radar dome resides on the top of the mast assembly
- There are three antennae on each boat for the various electronic gear. These
need to be raised when the boat is launched and lowered for transport between sites.
All three are tightened and loosened with a lever. While afloat, the antennae should
be locked in the upright position. During transport, the antennae should be locked
and lashed (if possible) in the lowered position. The mobile lab VHF antenna must
also be lowered and stored inside the lab.
9.4 Gear Check-Out and Loading
Since much of the sampling gear is loaded onto and removed from the boat on
a daily basis, it is important to maintain a careful record of available gear. When
loading the boat, carefully follow the gear checklist (Appendix A) to avoid leaving
essential items behind. Once the necessary gear has been assembled, inspect for
damage and replace as needed. When loading the boat, securely lash heavy and
bulky gear (e.g., grab sampler, trawl net) in a manner which minimizes obstruction on
the deck. Fragile and valuable equipment (e.g., Sea-Bird CTD, Hydrolab DataSonde 3
dataloggers, GRiD computers, cameras) should be securely lashed or stowed to
prevent damage in route to the sampling stations. All other gear should be loaded
and stowed where appropriate.
While sampling and loading or unloading equipment, make note of any supplies
which need to be replenished or damaged gear which needs to be replaced. Contact
the Field Operations Center when supplies are needed and make arrangements to
pick them up or have them delivered.
-------
Section 9
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 8 of 17
9.5 General Policies Underway
All personnel should be aware of general boating and navigational rules. Some
of the more important rules are:
1. Anchored vehicles have the right of way over moving vessels.
2. Sailboats have the right of way over power boats (except when under
power).
3. If overtaking another boat, it is your responsibility to remain out of their
way.
4. When approaching another boat head-on, stay to the right and pass
port to port, unless you are far enough apart to safely pass starboard to
starboard. r
5. When crossing paths, the boat to the right has the right of way.
The following is a simplified list of vessels which have the right of way over
vessels listed below it.
1. Overtaken vessel.
2. Vessel not under command.
3. Vessel restricted by its ability to maneuver.
4. Vessel constrained by draft.
5. Fishing vessel (fishing or trawling, not trolling).
6. Sailboat.
7. Powerboat.
9.5.1 Required Personnel
At least two crew members must be on board the vessel at all times. The only
exception is for moving the boat short distances, PROVIDING NO SAMPLING
ACTIVITIES ARE TO BE PERFORMED.
9.5.2 Speed Regulations
Always travel at a safe speed. EMAP boats are capable of high speed,
therefore, restraint must be exercised. The boats were equipped with twin engines to
-------
Section 9
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 9 of 17
allow for the completion of sampling activities in the event that one engine fails, NOT
so the crews could travel between stations at 40 mph. This speed will be dependent
on a number of conditions, including weather conditions, visibility, and amount of boat
traffic. Reduce speed when passing marinas, anchored boats, and swimming areas.
It is very important to observe 'reduce speed' and 'no wake' signs.
9.5.3 Anchoring • • •
Avoid anchoring the boat in a busy, narrow channel or anywhere it could
obstruct normal boat traffic. Don't block launching ramp areas. Also, consult
appropriate charts of the local area for anchoring restrictions and look for signs
denoting an underwater cable. Do not anchor in the vicinity of such a cable.
Additional information on navigational skills and boat operation can be found in
a number of references, including:
1. Nynex Boater's Directory, 1990, Volumes 1-4, Published by Nynex
information Resources, (provides only general information)
2. Boating Skills and Seamanship, 1988. U.S. Coast Guard Auxiliary, U.S.A. '
9.6 Radio Operations
The operation of marine radios is governed by regulations of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC). There are specific procedures for placing calls to
other vessels, and for answering calls to. your vessel. Monitor Channel 16 when the
marine radio is on. All calls originate on Channel 16; however, only emergency
transmissions are permitted on that channel. To call another ship or the mobile lab,
follow these procedures:
1. Switch the radio to channel 16. Listen to make sure you are not
interrupting another conversation, then transmit:
NAME OF BOAT YOU ARE CALLING
THIS IS NAME AND CALL SIGN OF YOUR BOAT
OVER
-------
Section 9
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 10 of 17
If you get no response, repeat two or three times.
When the boat you are calling responds, state:
SWITCHING TO 82A (working channel)
3.
4.
5.
Switch to channel 82A and listen to make sure you are not interrupting
another conversation.
Conduct routine conversation, trying to limit it to three minutes or less.
At the end of your conversation state:
NAME AND CALL SIGN OF YOUR BOAT
Switch back to channel 16.
OUT
A request for a radio check should be initiated on Channel 16 and then
switched to Channel 82A if additional conversation is desired. Routine radio checks
made by the boat should be to the mobile lab. The Coast Guard shouid never be
contacted for a routine radio check.
As U.S. government vessels, al! EMAP boats are subject to regulations that
differ from those specified for recreational and commercial boaters. A permit to
operate the boat radios has been obtained and must be carried on board at al! times.
A copy of this permit is included in Appendix D. Call signs for all EMAP vessels and a
list of the channels authorized for our use can be found in Figure 9.1. Transmissions
from the mobile laboratory are only permitted when the lab is stationary. The need to
remove the antenna during transit should make transmissions while the vehicle is in
motion impossible.
-------
Section 9
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Pago 11 of 17
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND ASSESSMENT PROGRAM
BOAT RADIO FREQUENCY ASSIGNMENTS
CALL SIGNS
R/V CYPRINODON
R/VARBACIA
R/V MYS1DOPSIS
R/V CHAMPIA
MOBILE LABS
WRH 4387
WRW 8803
WRM 8373
WRG 3330
KB 2053
FREQUENCY ASSIGNMENTS
CHANNEL
TRANSMIT FREQ.
(MHz)
TYPE OF OPERATION
6
9
12
13
14
16
20
22A
67
82A
156.300
156.450
156.600
156.650
156,700
156.800
157.000
157.100
156.375
157.125
Intership safety
Radio check, calling
Port operations
Bridge to bridge communications
Port operations
Safety and DISTRESS
Port operations
Communications with Coast Guard
Bridge to bridge - Louisiana
Working channel US govt. only
In addition, all public correspondence channels (marine operator) can be used: 24,
25, 26. 27, 28, 84, 85, 86, and 87
Figure 9.1. Listing of radio call signs and authorized frequencies.
-------
Section 9
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 12 of 17
OPERATING PROCEDURES FOR DISTRESS CALLS
There are three spoken radio emergency signals:
1. Distress signal: MAYDAY. Mayday is used to indicate that a mobile
station is threatened by GRAVE and IMMINENT danger and requests
immediate assistance.
2. Urgency signal: PAN PAN (correct pronunciation is PAHN-PAHN). Used
when the safety of the vessel or person is in jeopardy, such as "man
overboard."
3. Safety Signal: SECURITY. Security is used for messages concerning the
safety of navigation or giving important meteorological warnings.
If you hear any of these messages while monitoring Ch 16, listen, don't
transmit, and be prepared to help if you can.
To issue a distress call, use Ch 16:
1. Say MAYDAY (3 times).
2. This is the R/V (3 Times).
3. Give VHP call numbers .(1 time).
4. Give location (Latitude-Longitude, LORAN, bearings off marker, etc,).
5. Briefly describe nature of distress (i.e., what is wrong, and what kind of
help is needed.
6. Describe your boat - length, type, hull color.
7. Keep repeating until someone acknowledges your call.
REMEMBER: ONLY ISSUE A DISTRESS CALL IN A GRAVE EMERGENCY!
9.7 Radar Operation
Each boat is equipped with a radar unit to aid in navigation under reduced
visibility. Radar consists of a display unit (mounted in the cabin) and a Radome
antenna (mounted on the top of the mast). When operating, the antenna emits
microwaves in a 360° sweep. These microwaves bounce off of dense objects, are
then received by the antenna, and transmitted to the display unit. Consult the owner's
-------
Section 9
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Pago 13o< 17
manual for proper operation of this unit. Radar can also be used to determine ranges
needed during dead reckoning.
9.8 Winch Operation
Operations involving the hydraulic winch and capstan are the most dangerous.
All personnel must be equipped with a hard hat when working on deck during
hydraulic operation. Life jackets are always required. Each boat is equipped with a
hydraulic winch and capstan which is run by an air-cooled gas-powered motor located
just behind the cabin on the port side. The winch operator must be aware of the
power generated by the hydraulics and the dangers involved in the operation of the
gear. The operator of the winch must be aware of all activities being conducted on-
board the deck when the winch is being used. All personnel on the deck must be
careful to stay out of the bite of the cable, and personnel in the cabin must be careful
to not accidentally engage one of the winch control levers.
To start the Briggs and Stratton engine supplying power for the hydraulics:
1. MAKE SURE THE CONTROL LEVERS ARE IN THEIR NEUTRAL
POSITION.
2. Pull out the kill switch located on the aft shelf in the cabin.
3. Set the engine's throttle lever for greater than half throttle.
4. Engage the choke if the engine is cold.
5. Depress the starter button (an emergency pull cord is also available).
6. As soon as the engine starts, push in the choke lever.
Once the engine is running, power can be supplied to the winch. Great care
must be taken to assure that hands, clothing, or gear do not get caught in the winch
or any of the blocks the wire is traveling through.
The levers controlling hydraulic power are located inside the cabin on the rear
bulkhead. The starboard lever controls the winch and the port lever controls the
capstan. The winch will not free-spool, so power must be supplied to lower, as well
as raise, gear. The speed at which the winch or capstan operate is controlled by how
far the lever is moved.
-------
Sections
Revision 0
Data: 3/3/93
Page 14 of 17
During winch operation, the operator must not only observe the activities of the
crew on the deck, but must also watch the winch to assure that it is spooling properly.
If necessary, a wood 2x4 can be used to guide the spooling wire back on track.
ALL STAYS MUST BE PROPERLY FASTENED AND TIGHTENED ANY TIME
THE MAST AND BOOM ASSEMBLY IS USED.
The noise created by the Briggs and Stratton engine makes verbal
communication between the winch operator and the deck crew difficult and unreliable.
To assure the safety of the crew members on the deck, hand signals should be used.
These signals are shown in Figure 9.2.
-------
Section 9
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 15 of 17
HAND SIGNALS FOR USE IN DIRECTING WINCH OR CRANE OPERATORS
LOWER
RAISE BOOM
LOWER BOOM
MOVESlOWLT
SWING
RAISE THE BOOM AND LOWER THE LOAD LOWER THE BOOM AND RASE THE LOAD
Hand Slgnais-Where ver- interfered with by other
bal communications are im- noses, the crew should
possible or are likely to be utilize a standard set of
hand signals. Where the
winch operator doesn't have
a clear view of the load.
STOP DOG EVERYTHING
one competent crewman
should give signals, not the
whole crew.
Figure 9.2. Hand signals used during winch operation.
-------
Section 9
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 16 of 17
9.9 Emergencies/Accidents
Emergencies or accidents may occur in the course of sampling which may or
may not involve EMAP boats or personnel. In the case where non-EMAP personnel
are in an emergency situation, EMAP crews are required to render assistance if there
is danger of loss of life or limb of those involved. In such an instance, crews should
take the appropriate action (e.g., administer first aid and/or CPR, tow the boat to
safety, radio for help) necessary to protect those involved. Under circumstances
where there is no immediate danger of loss of life or limb (e.g., boaters with
mechanical problems) EMAP crews should inform the Coast Guard or a local towing
service of the problem and give the location and a description of the disabled vessel.
If the disabled vessel is near a marina and if it will not result in a major loss of
sampling time, in the interest of public relations crews should render assistance.
Towing another vessel is discouraged but assistance can be provided using extreme
caution. In the case of an EMAP vessel requiring a tow, a towing service should be
contacted. For liability reasons a passerby should not be used.
If EMAP personnel are in an emergency/accident situation, take appropriate
action to reduce the immediate danger to those involved. In the case of a physical
problems (e.g., man overboard, hypothermia, seasickness, sunburn, heatstroke, fish
bites or stings, etc.) take the appropriate I'rfesaving, first aid, or CPR measures and call
for help (911 with cell phone) if necessary. In an accident situation where there is no
immediate danger of loss of life or limb, notify the FC and the mobile unit of the
problem and take measures necessary to rectify the situation (e.g., call for help, head
for port). If an emergency or accident is serious enough to return to port, notify the
mobile unit on shore and arrange to have an ambulance or other necessary
emergency equipment in port upon arrival.
9.10 Equipment Failure/Repair
The best way to assure proper functioning of the equipment is to adhere to the
routine maintenance schedule (Section 19). When equipment fails to operate, check
the most obvious solutions first before attempting a major overhaul. The most
obvious reasons for equipment failure are loss of electrical power or fuel.
9.10.1 Outboard Motors
If the outboard motor will not start or if it suddenly stops, check the fuel and oil
levels. If fuel and oil levels are adequate, inspect the electrical system for poor
connections and the condition of the spark plugs. Tighten any loose connections and
clean any contact points that appear to be excessively corroded. If attempts to restart
-------
Section 9
Revision 0
Dato: 6/9/93
Pago 17 of 17
fail after inspecting the fuel and power supply, refer to the owner's manual. If a motor
fails and cannot be easily repaired notify the FC to arrange to have the boat repaired
or replaced.
9.70.2 Hydraulic Winch
If the Briggs and Stratton that powers the hydraulic winch fails to operate,
check the fuel, spark plugs, and power supply. If needed, use the pull cord to start
the motor. If proper functioning is not restored, consult the owner's manual. In the
case where the trawl net is in the water and the winch fails, attempt to retrieve the net
manually and proceed as described above. Notify the FC immediately if a winch fails.
9.10.3 Navigational/Electronic Equipment
in the event of navigational/electronic equipment failure, check fuses and
inspect power supply for loose connections. Also check to be sure antennae are not
damaged or lost. Consult the owner's manual if the above steps fail to correct the
problem and notify the FC. Use backup methods (Loran or dead reckoning) to locate
the station where appropriate.
In general, crews should be capable of trouble shooting many problems. In
many cases the problem could be as simple as a loose or broken wire. Each boat is
equipped with a multi-meter that can be used to check the continuity of wires.
Attempts to use gear should be abandoned only after every attempt has been made
to correct the problem on-board.
U.S. EPA Headquarters Library
Mail code 3201
1200 Pennsylvania Avenue NW
Washington DC 20460
-------
-------
Section 11
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/33
Page 1 of IS
SECTION 11
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
11.1 Introduction
The EMAP navigation system assists the boat operator in navigating to a station,
and provides for automatic storage of position data once the station is reached. The
system is entirely menu driven for ease of operation. Specific details on the operation of
the navigation component of the computer system can be found in SAIC (1990) and other
electronic navigation manuals. This chapter provides an introduction to, and operation
procedures for, the navigation system.
11.2 Navigation System Components
The navigation system consists of three components: Northstar Loran receiver,
Raytheon Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver, and a GRiD laptop computer. The
Loran uses shore-based radio transmitters (referred to as Master and Slave stations)
combined with a shipboard receiver to track low-frequency signals. The Loran displays
the time delay (TD) between signals from the Master and Slave stations, allowing several
lines of position to be plotted. Using navigational charts and the TDs obtained on the
shipboard receiver, the boat's position can be determined from where these TD lines
intersect. The Loran transmits the TD data to the computer. The Loran also calculates
and displays the latitude and longitude from the TDs.
The GPS receiver employs the use of the Navstar/GPS system. This is a satellite-
based radio navigation system designed to provide global, 24 hour-per-day, all weather,
accurate position data for navigators worldwide. GPS system satellites, which operate
in fixed circular orbits around the Earth, broadcasts signals which contain two types of
data: ephemeris and almanac. Ephemeris data represents the precise orbital parameters
of a specific satellite. Almanac data contains the health and approximate location of each
satellite. The GPS receiver collects this data from any satellite that does not have an
obstructed view, then uses it to locate other satellites that should be visible at the
receiver's location. Simultaneous access to a minimum of three satellites is required for
precise determination of a GPS position fix (latitude-longitude), velocity, and other satellite
data. A precise position is obtained by accurately measuring the distance between the
user and system satellites whose positions at the instant of measurement are known.
Spheres of position are then mathematically generated, and their common intersection
accurately represents the system user's position. Continuous tracking of each satellite
-------
Section 11
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 2 of 15
signal allows the GPS receiver to perform timing adjustments and corrections to the
position.
The GPS system is currently in an intermediate stage of development with only 18
of 21 satellites in service. Full coverage (24 satellites) will not be available for several
more years. The accuracy of the system can be up to 15 meters, however, the U.S.
Department of Defense has implemented a policy called "Selective Availability" (SA).
When SA is randomly turned on, the accuracy is degraded as much as 100 meters by
introducing small errors in the transmitted signals without the user knowing it.
The GPS unit transmits Lat/Long data to the computer navigation system. This
data could be used to calibrate the navigation system in the computer to correct for
positional biases, and offsets between the present and charted positions, provided SA
was not active.
The Grid laptop computer contains an integrated navigation system which interacts
with the Loran and the GPS. It averages biases to calculate accurate calibration factors,
and stores parameter files for each station sampled. Sampling protocol dictates that
sampling be performed within 50 meters of the assigned station location, and therefore,
the computer navigation system should be used at every station. The only exception
should be when one of the components fails. In this case, either the Loran, GPS, dead
reckoning (in river systems), or LOPs (lines of position) should be used to locate the
station.
The Crew Chief is required to maintain a navigation log for all stations. The
navigation log will contain Loran and GPS lat/Iongs, Loran TDs, SNRs, slave stations,
calibration factors, compass bearings and ranges from the anchored station position, and
any other observations or deviations from the navigation protocol. Ranges and bearings
of recognizable objects (bridges, lighthouses, water tanks, etc.) that are also on the chart
should be recorded. Use the hand-held compass for the bearings and the radar for the
ranges. This information would be used to validate the coordinates produced by the
navigation system.
11.3 Global Positioning Systems
The following steps outline the initialization and use of the Raytheon GPS receiver.
Initialization normally needs to be done only once, but it is a good idea to check the
these parameters at the beginning of the season or if there is a suspected problem.
-------
Section 11
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 3 of IS
11.3.1 GPS Initialization
A. Turn the GPS on and set the position switch to the INIT mode. Scroll
through the following parameters without resetting them, by pressing the
key. The parameters include current position, time, date, and
antenna height. A flashing parameter can be changed, if required, by
entering the appropriate numeric keys as described below.
B. Set your approximate current position (within about 1 nm). Enter the values
as DD MM.mm (degrees and decimal minutes). Make sure the Lat/Long
values scroll all the way across the screen, and enter any terminating zeros
in the values. While entering the Lat/Long, confirm that the correct
hemisphere is displayed next to the number (should be N and W). If not,
change the hemisphere with the < + > and <-> keys. Press when
finished with each value.
C. Set the time. This is in GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) which is 4 hours
ahead of local time during the summer (therefore if your current local time
is 13:00 hours, GMT will be 17:00 hours). Set the date, using the format
YYMMDO, and enter any zeros as needed. (Note the unusual format of the
date value, and be careful to enter it correctly. Also be aware that if you
initialize the unit after 20:00 hours local time, the date will be the NEXT day
in GMT.) Enter the local time offset from GMT, which in our case is -4.00
hours. Press when finished with each value.
D. Set the antenna height at the distance of the antenna above sea level, using
an approximate value of 4 meters. Press when finished.
E. Once the initialization parameters are set to your satisfaction, turn the
position switch to the SAT mode. The GPS should remain in this mode
throughout the day unless a position is required.
11.3.2 GPS Use and Status
A. Following initialization, the GPS receiver will acquire and download tracking
information from all currently available satellites. The time it takes for this
process to happen will vary, but should be no longer than 15 minutes.
8. The status display of the GPS will provide you with a variety of information.
See the GPS manual for the display format. Individual satellite information
can be cycled through by pressing the <#> key while in SAT mode.
-------
Section 11
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 4 of 15
The GPS display parameters are as follows:
C.
- Satellite number: the number of the satellite for which information
is displayed.
- Status: status of the satellite. 0 = searching, 1 = tracking, 2 = data
download from satellite complete.
- Received Signal Level: the strength of the satellite signal. The
higher the better. The range is from 0 to 99.
- Azimuth Angle: angle of the satellite from true North.
- Elevation Angle: elevation above the horizon of the satellite. A
satellite below 5 degrees will be tracked (but not accepted) by the
GPS until its height is adequate.
- Normal Satellites: the number of normal satellites currently in
operation.
- Dilution of Precision (OOP): this is a statistic representing the
quality of the position information being output to the .computer, ft
is most important to observe the OOP, since the higher the value the
more degraded the position solution. For system calibration, OOP
should be LESS THAN 5, for navigation with the LORAN and GPS
on-line, OOP should be LESS THAN 10. If OOP is greater than 10,
the GPS should be taken off-line from the navigation system.
- Visible Number of Satellites: the total number of satellites currently
visible to the receiver.
- Satellite Numbers used for Position Fix: these start as two lines of
4 dashes. As the satellites are acquired, they are replaced by the
satellite numbers being tracked. Note that these numbers will only
be displayed if 3 or more satellites are being tracked.
If the satellite coverage is currently not sufficient to provide position
information, the time window when coverage will be adequate can be
checked. To do this press the key twice. The bottom of the
display will show the time window when coverage will be available for a 2-
dimensional solution. These times will be in your LOCAL time.
-------
Section 11
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 5 of 15
D. The EDAS (Environmental Data Acquisition System) is configured to
OUTPUT position information in the North American 1983 (NAD-83) datum.
However, it expects that the INPUT from the GPS will be in the WGS-72
datum. Therefore, set the GPS datum to WGS-72 by turning the position
switch to LAT/LONG. Press the key twice. Press the <#> then
<5> to change the GPS datum to WGS-72. The datum need only be set
once - it will be saved in memory, even after the GPS has been turned off.
11.4 LORAN
This section describes the use of the Northstar 800 Loran and its important
features relative to the use of the EDAS. It is recommended, however, to review and
consult the manufacturer's manual. The Loran is controlled by the keypad functions on
the front panel and by command numbers.
11.4.1 Loran Keypad Functions
The following is a list of the most commonly used command numbers and their
functions:
3 Speed Averaging
20 Step Loran Track Point -MOrns
68 Monitor Loran TDs and Signal-to-Noise Ratios (SNRs)
73 Serial number of Loran processor
80 Step Loran Track Point -10ms
Show TDs in hundredths
85
86
88
89
90
99
Show TDs in tenths
Lat/Long in hundredths of minutes
Lat/Long in seconds
Loudness of Alarms
Display SNR
-------
Section 1t
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Pago 6 of 15
11.4.2 Loran Set Up and Operation
The Loran should be turned on for several minutes to allow the unit to lock on to
suitable Loran C signals. Each time the unit is powered, it displays a self-test sequence.
Any error messages should be attended as soon as possible. The LOCK indicator
should appear after the unit has tracked a signal.
Several parameters should be checked and/or corrected prior to using information
from the Loran. These parameters should not change after initialization. Consult the
Northstar manual for reference.
1. Check for the proper chain by pressing the GRI function. The 9960 chain
is for the Northeast.
2. Check the alarm volume and adjust so that it is audible and can be
distinguished from other component signals. Press COMMAND and key
90. Each of the 5 alarms can be adjusted from 0 (off) to 8 (loud).
3. The Signal-to-Noise Ratios (SNRs) should be checked periodically
especially after the unit is turned on. Press COMMAND and key 99 on the
keypad. The Loran will display the TD on the upper readout, and the SNR
of that signal on the bottom readout. To check other TD lines, press the
upper SELECT. Press the lower SELECT to change the SNR format. The
numerical format (0-999) is the preferred display. The use of SNRs for
determining TD lines Is described in the section 11.6 EDAS Calibration.
4. The Speed Averaging Period calculates the averaging time in minutes for
the COG and SOG displays. Note that this value does not affect the
positional speed of the vessel indicator on the computer screen. Press
COMMAND and key 3. The number of minutes will appear and should be
4. If it is not, enter this number and press ENT to establish the course and
speed averaging period.
Once the Loran is set up with the accepted parameters, it is ready to transmit
correct navigation information to the computer. The following paragraphs describe the
basic commands and use of the Northstar Loran.
Press POSITION to display the current position in one of two formats: TDs or
lat/long. Press POSITION again to display the other format. Press SELECT when in the
TD format to display other lines. It is recommended to check the SNRs of these TDs as
they are displayed.
-------
Section 11
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 7 o<15
Course and speed is displayed by pressing COURSE. COG is on the top display
and SOG is on the bottom display. This function is generally used during the trawling
operations.
Several warning indicators advise you when you should exercise caution due to
Loran signal condition. The Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) indicator appears whenever the
numeric SNR is less than 64 (i.e., a very poor signal). It also appears when the receiver
is searching for a signal.
The cycle indicator (CYC) appears whenever the Northstar is not sufficiently
confident it is tracking the correct 10-ms cycle of a Loran pulse, and may read high or
low by 10, 20, or 3& ms. This generally appears after the unit is turned on, and
disappears several minutes after the a signal is acquired. Although the CYC indicator
does not necessarily mean it is tracking the wrong cycle, a degree of uncertainty is
implied, and therefore, you should exercise caution. To increase or decrease the cycle
of a Loran pulse by 10 ms, press COMMAND and key either 20 (step up) or 80 (step
down). Then press the upper SELECT to display the TD you want to step.
The Blink (BLNK) indicator is displayed whenever Loran transmitters detect errors
in the signal. The TD with the BLNK indicator should never be used.
The LOCK status indicator, although not a warning indicator, indicates that the
receiver will not jump to another 10-ms track point. If it is off, you should periodically
check the TD for cycle jumps".
11.4.3 Loran Errors
1. LORAN-Sn (serial number) Correction
If the LORAN display reads "Error NEED Sn" when the unit is turned on or during
normal operation, enter CLR and wart for the diagnostics test to complete its cycle.
The unit will display "SN —-".
Enter the five digit serial number which can be found on the Loran processor.
Then press ENT twice.
The unit should return to the position or course display.
Turn off and on to ensure the commands worked.
Enter command 73 to check for the proper S/N. The "bd no." should be "0".
Possible sources of the problem:
A) Lightning storm,
-------
Section 11
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 8 of 15
B) Newly charged battery,
C) Spike through Newmar NavPac when starting the outboards or the Briggs,
2. Frozen Display Head
If the display characters are scrambled and/or the keys are inoperable, check the
computer IDs for changes in the Loran input. It may be possible to use the system if the
display locks, but not recommended. Turn the Loran unit off and then on to correct this
problem. If there are any further problems or questions call the FOG or Digital Marine at
(617) 897-6600 and ask for George.
11.5 Computer Navigation System
The computer should be configured with the LORAN data able in COM4 and the
GPS data cable in COM3 before starting the navigation system. The LORAN and GPS
receivers should also be powered up and operating correctly.
11.5.1 System Parameters
The computer requires the input of a position (lat/long) and a station number in
order to navigate to any specific location. It will load a default set of navigation
parameters, which you can modify and save to a new file. Note that setting up the
system parameters can be done at any time, and does not require the Loran or GPS to
be connected to the computer.
1. Select "System Parameters" from the EDAS menu. The station will be either
"DefaultPMS" or "XXX.PMS". If you want to enter a new station, or change either
the station number or its corresponding lat/long, see below.
2. Select "Load Parameters", answer es then type only the number of the
desired station without the ".PMS". The convention for the filenames is as follows:
XXX.PMS, where XXX is the station number. Leading zeros are not required.
-If you are entering the station data for the first time, then the computer will
indicate that the file does not exist "Unable to load XXX.PMS". Press any
key, and the computer will ask if you want to make a new file from the
default parameters. Answer es. The "Define Station" menu will
appear.
-If you have previously created the file, then the computer will load the
appropriate navigation parameters.
-------
Section 1!
Revision 0
Data: 6/9/33
Page 9 of 15
3. Enter the appropriate latitude and longitude if you create a new file. Confirm that
the location is North for latitude and West for longitude. Press to exit.
Enter es to re-initialize if you want to save any revised coordinates.
4. When finished, press and select "Save Parameters" to save the new
station parameters. Then enter < Return > and .
11.5,2 EDAS Display and Function Keys
The computer navigation system will display up to four symbols, each representing
the following:
~ir ships position (cross hair)
© station (ellipse with cross)
A waypoint (triangle)
D destination (rectangle).
The function keys are used for the navigation graphics as well as other functions.
The following list explains the function key options:
F1 Help - Explanation of Function Keys, press Space Bar to see second page,
press again to exit the help menu.
F2 Displays the GPS, LORAN, and Kalman Filter status. Note these only
display the status, you cannot change any item using F2. The GPS display
consists of the Error, Lat/Long, Satellites, and the HDOP. The Loran display
consists of the Bias and TD for each Loran line. This Loran display should
be monitored during calibration. The Kalman Filter displays the
online/offline status of the Loran and GPS.
F3 Advance waypoint destination to the next waypoint.
F4 Append ship's position as a waypoint, and allows you to enter,a description
of the waypoint.
F5 Not used
F6 Redraw graphics display with ship at center.
F7 Redraw graphics display at half present scale.
-------
Section 11
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 10 of 15
F8 Redraw graphics display at double present scale.
F9 Not used
F10 Not used
Shift F1 Displays Present Position to Station, and includes Lat/Long, Average
Speed, Range, and Bearing.
Shift F5 System reset Resets parameters to those saved in the Parameters
file for the current station.
Ctrl F10 Monitor Telegram views GPS or Loran data by typing DTCGDP or
DTCLDP, respectively.
11.6 EDAS Calibration
The navigation system must be calibrated for every station in order to meet the
sampling accuracy protocol of 50 meters. One of two types of calibration, SYSTEM and
POINT, is required to meet this goal. SYSTEM calibration uses the vessel's present
position, according to the GPS, to generate calibration factors for LORAN generated TDs.
This is generally performed prior to leaving the dock or when arriving at station. POINT
calibration creates calibration factors, which are the differences between the measured
and theoretical LOPs from the LORAN. However, this requires the boat to be positioned
at a fixed point with known coordinates (e.g., range marker or lighthouse).
POINT calibration is the preferred method due to the variability and lack of good
GPS coverage. SYSTEM calibration should pnly be used when the GPS OOP level is z
5, and for navigating when the OOP is < 10, and when you suspect is the Loran is not
displaying quality data. The GPS should be OFFLINE when the OOP is >10 (see section
11.3.2 GPS Use and Status). For both types of calibration, the boat should be stationary
and preferably tied to a dock.
The LORAN Cal Factors generated by either method are constant over a limited
area, up to 20nm, provided there is no strong interference with the LORAN signals. It is,
however, strongly recommended to calibrate at a location nearest to and most
representative of the station location. For example, if you are at a dock in a large bay
and plan to sample a station in the center of the bay, calibrate at a fixed ATON that may
also be in the bay, not at the dock.
For either calibration, the computer should be using the TDs with the optimum
-------
Section 11
Revision 0
Data: 6/9/93
Page 11 of 15
crossing angles and strongest SNRs. The method of determining the selection of Loran
lines will be described below.
11.6.1 System Calibration
This procedure (although not recommended) can be followed when the criteria for
System Calibration are met as described above.
1. Confirm that the navigation system is receiving data from the LORAN and
GPS units. Do. this by pressing , then typing "DTCLDP" to
display the LORAN telegram. Check the GPS telegram by pressing and typing "DTCGDP". If both the LORAN and GPS are transmitting
data, select ."Navigate to Station" from the main menu.
2. Select "Kalman Filter", and turn BOTH the GPS and the LORAN C
OFFLINE. This is done by moving to each item and pressing .
back to the EDAS menu. Select "Process Noise", and change
"Speed Variability" to 1.00 and "Speed Response Time" to 15.00. Press
twice to exit.
3. Select "Positioning Systems", then select "Loran C Navigation System".
The GRI should be 9960. Select "Calibrate", then select "Reset", and
answer to reset. and answer to save the cal factors
(this will save the zeroed out cal factors). < ESC> back to the EDAS menu.
4. Select "Kalman Filter" again, and turn the GPS ONLINE. Leave the
LORAN OFFLINE. back to the EDAS menu.
5. Select the "Positioning System", "Loran C Navigation System", and
"Calibrate". Press twice, to display the bias and TD for each LORAN
chain. These will update continuously. Wait until the bias becomes stable,
and then the system can be calibrated.
6. Select "System Calibration". Answer to calibrate. Record all the cal
factors for the LORAN chains being used. Press < ESC > and answer
to save the Cal Factors. At this point the Cal Factors will be applied to the
LORAN data, and the Loran bias should approach zero. Press to
return to the EDAS menu.
7. Select "Kalman Fitter", and turn the LORAN C ONLINE. Leave the GPS
ONLINE. back to the EDAS menu. The system is now ready to
navigate using both calibrated LORAN and GPS. (NOTE: see Section
-------
Section 11
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 12 oM 5
11.6.3 Important Calibration Notes.)
11.6.2 Point Calibration
The use of Point Calibration requires that 1) the boat is located at a known fixed
location (e.g., range marker, lighthouse, etc.), and 2) the datum of the coordinates is
NAD-83. To convert chart Lat/Longs from the NAD-27 datum to the NAD-83 datum
positions, see Section 11.6.4 Datum Conversion Using the Geodetic Utilities.
When calibrating, it is highly recommended to choose the "best" TD lines for the
computer. This is accomplished by selectively turning TD lines on or off in the computer
navigation system. The computer requires two lines at minimum be turned ON, however
three lines are preferable. It is most unlikely to acquire four lines due the distance of the
slave stations and the poor angles of the lines. The "best" lines are determined by high
SNRs and angles of the TD lines that approach right angles. A low SNR value (100-300)
is not necessarily bad - it just takes longer for the Loran to extract quality positional data
from weak signals. Although Loran lines are not present on all charts, the crossing
angles can be determined from smaller scale charts of nearby areas.
The process for turning TD lines on and off is as follows:
1. Select System Parameters, Positioning Systems, Loran C Navigation
System, Database, and then Edit Database. You should also display the
Loran Status by using the F2 key.
2. Enter E to edit or check the status of a TD line (Master, Whiskey, Xray,
Yankee, or Zulu).
3. Enter the first letter of the desired TD line to display the status. Use the
RETURN key to change the ON-LINE/OFF-LINE status.
4, To accept the current display, press ESC three times. The Loran lines will
change when you escape back to the Database menu.
5. Save these parameters by selecting System Parameters and Save
Parameters. The navigation system is now ready for Point Calibrating.
The process for Point Calibrating is as follows:
1. Confirm that the navigation system is receiving LORAN data from the
receiver. Do this by pressing , then typing "DTCLDP" to display
the LORAN telegram. If the LORAN is transmitting data, select "Navigate
to Station" from the EDAS menu.
-------
Section It
Revision 0
Data: 6/9/93
Page 13 of 15
2. Select "Kalman Filter", and turn BOTH the GPS and the LORAN C
OFFLINE, This is done by moving to each item and pressing .
back to the EDAS menu.
3. Select "Positioning Systems", then "LORAN C Navigation System". The
GRI should be 9960. Select "Calibrate", then select "Reset", and answer
to reset and answer to save the cal factors (this will
save the zeroed out cal factors). back to the EDAS menu.
4. Select "Kalman Filter" again, and turn the LORAN ONLINE. Leave the
GPS OFFLINE. back to the EDAS menu.
5. Select the "Positioning System". "LORAN C Navigation System", then
"Calibrate". Press the F2 key twice in order to monitor the TD bias of each
line. Enter the Latitude and Longitude of your known position. Select
"Point Calibration" and press < SPACE > to begin the averaging. When
the average Cal Factors stabilize, press .< SPACE > to stop the averaging.
Record the Average Values of the LORAN chains being used in to the
navigation log. Press and answer to save the Cal Factors.
At this point the Cal Factors will be applied to the LORAN data. Press
to return to the EDAS menu.
6. The system is now ready to navigate using only the calibrated LORAN. (See
section 77.6.3 Important Calibration Notes)
11.6.3 Important Calibration Notes
Be aware that the GPS will ALWAYS output navigation data to-the EDAS,
regardless of the quality of that data. Therefore if the OOP goes high, or satellites
are lost, the position information coming into the EDAS will not be good.
**
It is up to you, the operator, to determine the quality of the GPS reception. **
At the time of POINT calibration, raw GPS data should be manually recorded in the
event that the Loran signal is lost or disrupted during the day. In this case, the
GPS may be switched on and the Loran switched off in the Kalman filter. The
correction factor from the Loran could then be applied to the GPS to achieve a
more accurate position. However, when Loran is working properly we recommend
that you not use GPS.
If the GPS coverage window is small (i.e., the satellite coverage will not be
adequate the whole time you are on the water) or the OOP is high (greater than
-------
Section 11
; Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 14 of 15
10), then navigate with just the calibrated LORAN. (GPS OFFLINE and LORAN
. ONLINE in the Kalman Filter.)
If the GPS coverage is good but the LORAN reception is not, then navigate with
the GPS alone. (GPS ONLINE and LORAN OFFLINE in the Kalman Filter).
it is highly recommended to save your System Parameters anytime you make a
change to the calibration parameters.
It is also recommended to enter the correct magnetic variation within the
Parameters menu which is in the Navigation option.
11.6.4 Datum Conversion Using the Geodetic Utilities
When doing a POINT calibration with the LORAN, it is necessary to read your
position from a chart. If the chart coordinates are in WGS-72 or NAD-27 (North American
1927), they need to be converted to the NAD-83 (North American 1983) datum. To
convert Lat/Longs between datums, use the Geodetic Utilities as follows:
1. From the EDAS menu select "Geodetic Utilities", and then select "Datum
Conversion".
2. "Datum 1" is the datum you are converting FROM (Le. the chart datum).
Press to scroll through the available datums. Select "North
American 1983".
3. "Datum 2" is the datum you are converting TO. You should always select
"North American 1983" (NAD-83). Press to scroll through the
available datums.
4. "Latitude 1" is the latitude from which you are converting. Press
, enter the latitude, and press again. Repeat this
process with "Longitude 1". Each time a value is entered the screen will
update. (Disregard the Height value.)
5. The converted Lat/Longs are "Latitude 2" and "Longitude 2". Record
these values, and use them as the latitude and longitude entries for the
POINT calibration. Press to exit.
11.7 Navigating within EDAS
-------
Section 51
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 15 of 15
The navigation component of the system allows the pilot to accurately navigate the
vessel to a designated position. After the system is calibrated, it provides positional
updates every 2-3 seconds. Information is displayed within a series of menus with
options to change navigation parameters. The graphic display uses several symbols to
represent different operational units and parameters.
It is important to calibrate prior to using the navigation system. You must also
confirm that the parameters (Loran on-line, magnetic variation, etc.) are set, and that the
appropriate station is entered in the System Parameters menu under Load Parameters.
Routes and waypoints should be saved and recorded in either the Loran or the
GPS. This provides a means of navigation if the computer becomes disabled or if you
must navigate in foggy conditions.
When arriving at a station, all available position data, including ranges and
bearings, must be recorded. This will aid other crews to find the exact positions should
they return to that station. When taking a compass bearing, it is recommended to stand
on the aluminum deck hatch so that deviation caused by metal on the boat is
standardized on all boats. The following is a description of the commands, menus, and
displays necessary to navigate to a station.
Select Navigation from the EDAS menu. The options of this menu are described
as follows: "
CRT Display - This selection gives the option to choose a particular location
(waypoint, present position, station, or destination) to be displayed at the screen center.
Select Center to view these options. Use the arrow keys to select an option. A lat/long
position can also be entered as the center. Press ESC to accept the options and exit
The symbol of the selected location will appear at the screen center.
Destination - This option is used to designate a destination which may be either
a previously defined location (station, waypoint, or display center) or a Lat/Long position.
If you select a station, it will be the station as in the System Parameters. You can also
select a waypoint that was previously entered in the same database with that station.
Parameters - Under this menu, you can selectively turn the waypoint route
selection on or off using the Auto Update option; change the Direction of the route to
either Forward or Backward; change the Update Radius to specify the distance (in
meters) from your vessel to the intended waypoint at which the system will update to the
next waypoint number; and input the amount of Magnetic Variation for a particular area.
Waypoints - This option allows you to edit and create waypoints within a database
-------
Section 11
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 16 of IS
file. The database file number is the same as the station number. Select Edit Database
to enter or edit a waypoint Press E to edit. Both the Id number, which is the waypoint
number, and the Lat/Long can be changed. Press ESC to accept any changes.
Monitor - This option displays navigational information relative to the assigned
Destination. The Monitor display is very useful when underway.
-------
Section 12
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page t of 3
SECTION 12
COMMUNICATIONS
The Virginian Province Project is a complex effort involving activities in field and
laboratory sites separated by hundreds of miles. Good communications are critical to
the efficiency, and possibly the ultimate success, of the Project. Several
communication nets have been incorporated into the program. These include
electronic transfer of data, communications between the boat and mobile lab, and
communications between the field crews and the Field Operations Center.
12.1 Electronic Transfer of Data
Due to the complexity of the sampling program, it is important that data
collected in the field be transferred to the Field Operations Center on a daily basis.
This electronic data consists of any data and information entered into the on-board
computer, including data collected from DO monitoring instruments, sample numbers,
daily logs, sample shipments, etc.
This communication is directly linked between the GRiD computer and the
ERL-N VAX. Communications are established using the external Codex modem and
the PROCOMM Plus communications package. The Kermit subroutine is used to
upload and download data and information. Once a link has been established,
transfer is automatic, if data or notes are flagged by the field crew, the FC, the QA
Coordinator, the Project Manager, and the Data Base Manager are notified
automatically by the VAX the next time one of them logs onto the computer.
Any information that the Field Operations Center wishes to transfer to the crews
is automatically downloaded to their GRiD during this session.
The transfer of electronic information is performed daily by each team.
Because a phone line (not a portable phone) is required, these communications are
performed at night after sampling activities have been completed. All information
should be uploaded to the VAX on the day it is collected. Experience of past years
shows that in many cases this is not possible due to poor phone tines or motels with
"hard-wired" phones. In these cases, data should be uploaded as soon as possible
i.e. the next evening.
Details on the electronic transfer of data can be found in Section 8 of Part 2 of
the Field Computer System (1992).
-------
Section 12
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 2 of 3
12.2 Communications with the Field Operations Center
In addition to electronic communications, verbal communications between the
field crews and the Field Operations Center should be conducted on a daily basis.
Each team is equipped with a portable cellular telephone to simplify these
communications, however, because of the cost involved in using a cellular phone, the
person calling in should attempt to locate a pay phone first. If one is not available,
then the cellular phone should be used. The EMAP Field Operations Center has been
assigned a Toll-Free "800" phone number to further simplify communications. That
number is:
1-800-732-2305
Any problems in the field should be relayed Immediately to the FC by the crew
member manning the mobile laboratory. On weekends, or in the evening, the FC is
available by pager. Phone calls to the "800" number are automatically forwarded to an
answering machine. Crews should try to make these communications as concise as
possible because of limited time available on the tape.
The information required by the Field Operations Center are the stations (and
event numbers) sampled on the previous day, the stations being sampled on that day,
and the stations the crew expects to sample on the following day. Also required is
any shipping information from that, or the previous, day, including sample type, where
it was shipped, and both the shipment ID number and the Federal Express tracking
number. Crews are provided with copies of the phone log sheet used in the FOG
(included in Appendix G). They should complete these sheets prior to placing the
phone call to assure they have all the required information readily available. Whenever
possible, crews should place their daily call during the morning.
Through the use of the portable phones, the Field Operations Center should be
able to contact each team at any time. The land-based crew member will also carry a
portable phone, allowing the FOC staff to contact him/her as well. The Field
Operations Center can utilize the Marine Operator to contact crews as a last resort.
As phone calls placed through Marine Operators are very expensive, teams
should restrain from using the Marine Operator unless Cellular phone service or pay
phones are not available.
Use of the portable cellular telephones is restricted to official and emergency
calls. Since there is a charge for incoming as well as outgoing calls, spouses and/or
friends are not to call on the portable phone except in the event of an emergency.
Portable phones can be used to report any emergency, whether it involves the crew
-------
Section 12
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 3 of 3
directly or not.
12.3 Ship-to-Shore Communications
Both the boats and mobile laboratories are equipped with marine-band VHP
radios and portable phones. Any problems or changes in itinerary should be
communicated between the boat and mobile lab using Channel 82A. As this
frequency is shared by other U.S. government operations, transmissions should be
kept to a minimum. This radio is also used to communicate with other boat traffic and
port operations as required. The mobile lab radio should be used only to
communicate with the boat, or, in an emergency, the marine operator.
Communications between the boat and mobile laboratory were frequently unavailable
during the Demonstration Project due to poor radio reception. The boat antenna has
been raised to the top of the mast, and the mobile lab antenna has been relocated to
a considerably higher position. The lab antenna now requires lowering prior to
departure from the staging area. These modifications should significantly increase the
range of operation of these units; FCC REGULATIONS PROHIBIT THE MOBILE LAB
FROM TRANSMITTING ON ANY MARINE FREQUENCY WHILE THE LAB IS IN
MOTION. The need to lower the lab's antenna during transit should effectively prevent
such unauthorized use.
In addition, it is highly recommended that the mobil phone be carried on the
vessel to insure good communication.
12.4 Truck-to-Truck Communications
Citizen's Band radios in the mobile labs and pick-up trucks should allow for
more efficient transmitting between staging areas since directions or changes in
planned routes due to traffic congestion can be communicated between vehicles. As
with all radio communications, proper etiquette must be followed. Additional
information is provided in Section 8.1
-------
-------
Section 13
Revision 0
Data: 6/9/93
Pago 1 of 9
SECTION 13
SAMPLING SCHEDULE AND STATION TYPES
13.1 Sampling Schedule
Sampling activities for the 1993 Virginian Province Project are scheduled to
begin on Monday, July 26, 1993. The Index Period has been divided into six-day
"windows", corresponding to crews' six-day work periods. Within each window, crews
will sample a predetermined cluster of approximately seven stations. Stations have
been clustered according to proximity and logistical considerations. Which cluster is
sampled in a given window has been quasi-randomly determined, i.e. the selection is
random, however, logistical guidelines have been applied to the process. For
example, the selection of clusters at opposite ends of a crew's region in two
consecutive windows would result in a re-draw, thereby reducing the burden on the
crew to travel long distances in limited time.
Crews should make every effort to sample all stations in the cluster within the
prescribed six-day window. If a station cannot be sampled, a decision will be made
by the Project Manager as to whether to drop the station or sample it at the end of all
other sampling activities. Crews should not sample any additional stations within a
window without permission from the Field Coordinator.
13.2 Station Types
Several different types of stations will be sampled during the Project. The
locations of all stations are provided in Table 13.1. Specific instructions on obtaining
samples are covered in the following chapters. A flow chart outlining the activities
conducted at a station is included below.
73.2.1 Base Sampling Sites (BSS)
Base Sampling Sites (BSS) are randomly chosen sites that will be used to
characterize the water quality of the Province. BSS are visited once during the index
period. Sampling activities at Base stations are as follows:
a. Perform a CTD cast with bottom and surface YSI measurements
b. Collect a surface and bottom water sample for chlorophyll
c. Collect a water sample for total suspended solids analysis from the surface
d. Collect benthic biology and grain size samples (three)
-------
Section 13
Revision 0
; Date: 6/9/93
Page 2 of 9
e. Collect sediment organics, sediment metals, AVS (acid volatile sulfides),
sediment toxicity, and grain size samples (generally one each).
f. Perform a fish trawl and process for species composition, and pathology. At
predetermined Base stations located in small estuaries certain species of fish
will be collected for spleen macrophage aggregate analysis.
g. Perform additional trawls as necessary to obtain the required number of fish for
pathology.
13.2.2 Long Term Trend (LTT) Stations
These are Base Sites that are revisited yearly to establish Long Term Trends at
individual locations. The sampling activities are identical to those described for BSS.
LTT stations are visited twice during the index'period, with the same activities are
performed on both visits. Visits must not be in consecutive windows and are.
preferably at least 12 or more days apart.
13.2.3 Replicate (REP) Stations ,
The locations of these spatial replicates'are randomly assigned to a randomly
selected subset of 1993 tidal river sub-segments and 1993 small systems. Sampling
at these replicates is identical to that at a Base Station. If lack of time is a problem in
finishing off all stations anticipated for a particular window, REP stations have a slightly
lower priority and should be dropped first.
-------
Section 13
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 3 of 9
ARRIVE ON STATION
AND ANCHOR
RECORD STATION NUMBER
AND COORDINATES
PERFORM CTD
CAST W/SURF.&
BOT. MEASURES
COLLECT TSS
SAMPLE FROM
SURFACE
COLLECT
CHLOROPHYLL
SURF & BOTT
OBTAIN BENTHIC
GRABS
1
SIEVE FOR
BIOLOGY (3)
1
COMPOSITE FOR
CHEM/TOX/AVS
GRAIN SIZE
GRAIN SIZE
PERFORM ONE
FISH TRAWL
At Selected
SPECIES
COMP. &
ABUNDANCE
Stations
GROSS
EXTERNAL
PATHOLOGY
PATHOLOGY
QA
& HISTOP.
I
PERFORM SECOND
TRAWL IF NEEDED
1
PATHOLOGY QA
&
HISTOPATHOLOGY
Figure 13.1 Field Sampling Activities at Base, Replicate and Long Term'Trend Sites
-------
Section 13
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 4 of 9
Table 13.1. Listing of 1993 EMAP-VP stations by team.
Team 1 Stations.
Sta. Class Size
Estuary Name
Latitude Longitude
(DD MM SS.SS)
Buzzards Bay
720
721
BSS
BSS
BUZZARDS
BUZZARDS
BAY
BAY
41
41
34
35
54.00
10.80
70
70
54
41
27.60
8.40
Block Island 'Sound
698 BSS
699 BSS
700 BSS
706 BSS
707 BSS
712 BSS
683 BSS
689 BSS
690 BSS
025 LIT
079 LIT
685 BSS
686 BSS
687 BSS
688 BSS
693 BSS
695 BSS
BLOCK ISLAND SOUND
BLOCK ISLAND SOUND
BLOCK ISLAND SOUND
BLOCK ISLAND SOUND
BLOCK ISLAND SOUND
Eastern Long Island Sound
HEMPSTEADBAY 40 38 55.00
NAPEAGUE HARBOR 41 0 47.46
GARDINERSBAY 41 3 31.20
Long Island Sound
LONG ISLAND SOUND ; 41 0 43.20
LONG ISLAND SOUND 41 10 29.40
LITTLE NECK BAY 40 46 20.00
OYSTER BAY 40 53 53.76
LONG ISLAND SOUND 40 55 51.00
LONG ISLAND SOUND 40 56 27.00
LONG ISLAND SOUND 41 5 9.00
LONG ISLAND SOUND 41 5 42.60
72
71
71
71
71
71
73
72
72
73
72
73
73
73
73
73
72
5
52
39
46
33
42
28
2
8
14
42
45
30
30
17
11
58
43.80
31.80
19.20
31.20
16.80
52.20
34.00
54.48
53.40
32.40
21.60
34.00
55.41
33.60
25.80
38.40
28.20
-------
696
697
702
703
704
705
709
713
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
173 LIT
215 LTT
681 BSS
682 BSS
684 BSS
694 BSS
710 BSS
719 BSS
726 BSS
727 BSS
735 REP
711
714
715
716
717
722
723
724
718
725
737
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
REP
LONG ISLAND SOUND
LONG ISLAND SOUND
NEW HAVEN HARBOR
LONG ISLAND SOUND
LONG ISLAND SOUND
LONG ISLAND SOUND
FISHERS SOUND
THAMES RIVER
Hudson
UPPER NY/NJ BAY
HUDSON RIVER
LOWER NY/NJ BAY
ARTHUR KILL
PASSAIC RIVER
HUDSON RIVER
HUDSON RIVER
HUDSON RIVER
HUDSON RIVER
HUDSON RIVER
ARTHUR KILL
Nantucket
MENEMSHA POND
CAPE POGE BAY
VINEYARD SOUND
NANTUCKET SOUND
NANTUCKET SOUND
POPPONESSETT BAY
NANTUCKET SOUND
NANTUCKET SOUND
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
River
40
41
40
40
40
41
41
41
41
42
40
6
6
14
14
15
.15
19
21
38
44
32
32
44
5
19
34
56
11
38
14.40
45.00
46.20
54.60
25.20
52.20
36.60
1.80
48.00
0.00
0.00
58.80
23.00
18.00
.51.60
39.60
7.80
30.00
49.50
Sound
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
20
23
26
27
27
35
35
35
9.52
15.61
38.40
7.80
20.40
42.00
38.40
49.80
Narragansett Bay
NARRAGANSETT BAY
PROVIDENCE RIVER
PROVIDENCE RIVER
41
41
41
34
48
43
16.20
41.40
16.00
74 3
73 56
74 4
74 14
74 7
73 53
73 58
73 57
73 56
73 51
74 10
70 1
30.00
42.60
21.00
52.20
6.00
57.00
35.40
13.80
54.00
27.00
48.00
70 46 21.19
70 27 47.84
70 47 21.00
70 20 45.60
70 7
70 27
70 14
27.60
53.00
29.40
9.00
71
71
71
21 4.80
23 53.40
21 46.80
-------
Section 13
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 6 of 9
Table 13.1 (continued).
Team 2 Stations.
Sta. Class Size
#
Estuary Name
Latitude Longitude
(DD MM SS.SS)
Chesapeake Bay - Maryland
45
58
136
631
633
640
642
649
650
652
658
661
667
670
672
623
624
LTT
LTT
LTT
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
TANGIER SOUND
CHESAPEAKE BAY
MIDDLE RIVER
CHESAPEAKE BAY
MANOKIN RIVER
WICOMICO RIVER
NANTiCOKE RIVER
CHOPTANK RIVER
CHESAPEAKE BAY
TRED AVON RIVER
EASTERN BAY
CHESTER RIVER
CHESAPEAKE BAY
SUSQUEHANNA FLATS
NORTHEAST RIVER
Cheapeake
CHESAPEAKE BAY
POCOMOKE SOUND
38
39
39
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
39
39
39
39
9
7
18
5
7
15
19
35
37
42
55
1
21
28
34
37.80
45.00
18.00
16.20
45.00
1.20
40.80
47.40
59.40
54.00
10.80
31.20
31.80
49.20
1.20
76
76
76
76
75
75
75
76
76
76
76
76
76
76
75
1
16
24
4
53
50
53
3
21
6
16
11
8
4
57
33.60
52.80
36.00
4.80
25.00
32.00
40.80
54.00
33.00
51.00
48.00
18.00
37.20
13.20
33.00
Bay - Virginia
37
37
48
49
25.20
21.60
76
75
1
49
39.00
10.80
178 LTT
654 BSS
660 BSS
663 BSS
664 BSS
Delaware Bay
DELAWARE RIVER
DELAWARE BAY .
DELAWARE BAY
DELAWARE BAY
DELAWARE BAY
40
38
39
39
39
10
51
0
8
9
0.00
25.20
15.60
15.60
6.00
74
75
75
75
75
43
13
7
15
2
40.80
10.20
55.20
21.60
37.80
-------
666
668
673
675
677
678
734
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
REP
DELAWARE
DELAWARE
DELAWARE
DELAWARE
DELAWARE
DELAWARE
DELAWARE
BAY
BAY
RIVER
RIVER
RIVER
RIVER
RIVER
39
39
39
39
40
40
40
16
24
42
52
8
1
7
15.60
15.00
41.40
1.30
30.03
4.20
39.00
Section 13
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 7 of 9
75 22 50.40
75 30 19.80
75 29 45.00
75 12 51.12
74 43 57.59
75 2 0.00
74 44 30.00
150 LTT
Delaware Coast
DELAWARE COAST 38 35 36.00
75 6 42.00
634 BSS
641 BSS
732 REP
659 BSS
669 BSS
671 BSS
676 BSS
Maryland Coast
SINEPUXENT BAY
SINEPUXENT BAY
TOMS RIVER
JEBAY
JAY
JAY
New Jersey
RBOR
IN BAY
\RBOR
38
38
38
8
19
19
52.80
0.00
34.75
Coast
38
39
39
39
56
24
33
56
58.50
25.00
28.00
40.20
75
75
75
74
74
74
74
13
6
6
57.00
34.00
1.66
53 40.59
27 53.00
19 12.00
11 0.00
-------
Section 13
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 8 of 9
Table 13.1 (continued).
Team 3 Stations.
Sta. Class Size
#
Estuary Name
Latitude Longitude
(DD MM SS.SS)
050
188
630
637
638
643
644
645
647
648
651
653
655
657
733
LIT
LIT
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
.BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
BSS
REP
Chesapeake
CHESAPEAKE BAY
POTOMAC RIVER
CHESAPEAKE BAY
POTOMAC RIVER
CHESAPEAKE BAY
POTOMAC RIVER
CHESAPEAKE BAY
POTOMAC RIVER
CHESAPEAKE BAY
PATUXENT RIVER
POTOMAC RIVER
CHESAPEAKE BAY
POTOMAC RIVER
CHESAPEAKE BAY
POTOMAC RIVER
Bay - Man/land
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
0
44
4
13
13
20
21
25
29
29
41
45
54
54
54
43.8
12.00
18.00
11.40
12.60
36.60
9.00
8.40
4.20
10.80
6.60
54.60
10.64
49.80
3.60
76
77
76
76
76
76
76
77
76
76
77
76
77
76
77
6
2
16
42
11
58
19
16
26
39
6
29
4
24
3
36.00
0.00
36.00
4.80
34.20
51.50
4.80
23.40
36.60
30.60
13.20
6.60
24.10
1.80
57.60
Chesapeake Bay - Virginia
060 LTT
601 BSS
602 BSS
603 BSS
604 BSS
606 BSS
607 BSS
608 BSS
609 BSS
610 BSS
611 BSS
612 BSS
CHESAPEAKE BAY
CHESAPEAKE BAY
JAMES RIVER
CHESAPEAKE BAY
CHESAPEAKE BAY
JAMES RIVER
CHESAPEAKE BAY
CHESAPEAKE BAY
JAMES RIVER
JAMES RIVER
YORK RIVER
CHESAPEAKE BAY
37
36
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
42
56
0
4
5
12
12
13
18
18
20
22
55.20
54.00
25.80
50.40
48.60
2.40
46.20
45.00
7.80
23.40
34.80
39.60
76
76
76
76
76
76
76
76
77
77
76
76
16
6
31
14
1
41
21
9
0
15
37
4
36.60
39.00
57.00
4.20
43.80
20.40
30.00
8.40
0.00
1.20
25.80
11.40
-------
613 BSS JAMES RIVER
615 BSS CHESAPEAKE BAY
616 BSS CHESAPEAKE BAY
617 BSS CHESAPEAKE BAY
618 BSS CHESAPEAKE BAY
619 BSS CHESAPEAKE BAY
620 BSS CORROTOMAN RIVER
621 BSS RAPPAHANNOCK RIVER
622 BSS CHESAPEAKE BAY
626 BSS CHESAPEAKE BAY
627 BSS TANGIER SOUND
628 BSS RAPPAHANNOCK RIVER
632 BSS RAPPAHANNOCK RIVER
635 BSS RAPPAHANNOCK RIVER
639 BSS RAPPAHANNOCK RIVER
728 REP JAMES RIVER
729 REP YORK RIVER
730 REP CORROTOMAN RIVER
731 REP RAPPAHANNOCK RIVER
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
38
38
38
38
37
37
37
38
24
30
31
38
39
40
42
56
47
56
57
5
9
11
14
17
31
40
4
15.60
36.60
34.20
32.40
31.20
28.20
27.00
35.02
27.00
21.60
19.20
13.01
43.31
59.50
56.00
20.40
30.00
57.72
51.00
77
76
75
76
76
75
76
76
76
76
75
76
77
77
77
77
76
76
76
23
11
59
19
6
54
28
50
14
9
56
58
5
13
15
59
47
27
57
Section 13
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 9 of 9
37.20
37.80
13.20
5.40
39.00
12.60
54.00
47.36
7.20
6.60
37.20
56.91
16.92
22.48
51.17
32.00
16.00
50.76
21.60
-------
-------
Section 14
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 1 of 14
SECTION 14
DISSOLVED OXYGEN, SALINITY AND TEMPERATURE
14.1 Sea-Bird Sealogger CTD
The first activity performed at every station is obtaining a vertical profile of the
water column for salinity, temperature, dissolved oxygen (DO) concentration, light
transmission, chlorophyll a fluorescence, and PAR (a measurement of the intensity of
light in the range of wavelengths used by algae in photosynthesis) using the Sea-Bird
SeaLogger CTD.
The Sea-Bird SeaLogger CTD unit is a self-contained array of instruments
capable of measuring all the parameters mentioned above. The core of the unit is a
data logger which stores all data collected by the individual probes. The entire array
runs off of internal batteries, therefore it does not require any electronic connection to
the boat during operation. Supplied with the instrument is the software required for
communicating with the data logger and for uploading data to the on-board computer.
The CTD unit is a very sensitive device. Crews need to be particularly careful
to avoid sudden shocks when handling this unit. Because of the weight of this unit
two people should always be involved in.carrying the CTD to and from the vessel.
The magnetic ON/OFF switch of this unit is also very sensitive. Attempts to turn the
unit ON or OFF should be in one smooth definitive motion. Do not rapidly throw the
switch ON and OFF in an attempt to "wake it up". This will thoroughly confuse the
unit, delay sampling and cause further irritation to the crew.
14.2 YSI Model 58 Dissolved Oxygen Meter and Probe
The YSI will be used to take oxygen measurements from surface water and
from bottom water collected in a GO-FLO bottle. In addition, the YSI will be used for a
weekly QC check of the GTD. The following information details the maintenance and
operation of the YSI Model 58 Dissolved Oxygen Meter.
14.2,1 Initial Setup of The YSI
1. The YSI Model 58 has two separate sets of batteries, one for the oxygen
meter and the other for the stirrer. Both sets consist of 4 D-size Alkaline
batteries. These are accessed by removing the four screws on the back
-------
Section 14
Revision 0
Data: 6/9/93
Page 2 of 14
3.
4.
panel then carefully pulling the meter back away. The upper battery
holder is for the oxygen meter, the lower holder for the stirrer batteries.
Note that the stirrer batteries will probably require more frequent
replacement, whereas the meter batteries will most likely last throughout
the entire field season. Observe correct polarity whenever changing
batteries in either holder.
When the YSI meter batteries are low, the LOWBAT warning will show
continuously on the display (the LOWBAT warning may flash
momentarily as the meter knob is turned off. but this is normal). The"
initial appearance of LOWBAT indicates about 50 hours of meter battery
life. The normal life for the meter batteries is about 1000 hours.
To check the YSI stirrer batteries, turn and hold the STIRRER knob to the
BATT CHK position. If the LOWBAT warning shows continuously on the
display then the stirrer batteries should be changed. The initial
appearance of the LOWBAT warning in the BATT CHK position indicates
5 hours or less of stirrer battery life. The normal life for the stirrer
batteries is about 100 hours.
While the meter is still open, observe the position of the sliding switch in
the upper right hand corner of the meter. This switch sets the meter
sensitivity for the type of membrane on the oxygen probe. The switch
should be in the middle position, set for a 1 mil ("standard") membrane.
Close the meter housing and gently tighten the corner screws. DO NOT
OVER TIGHTEN these screws, as they are easily stripped. As you close
the meter, work the rubber gasket so that the outer edge overlaps both
halves of the housing.
74.2.2 Changing the YSI Probe Membrane
The procedure for changing the YSI probe membrane is similar to that for the
HydroLab membrane. However there are some differences, so it's important to be
familiar with both procedures. The YSI membrane should be changed weekly. Visual
inspection is the best indication of when to change the membrane: if the membrane is
fouled, wrinkled, cut, has bubbles underneath it, or the gold cathode is
tarnished...then it's time. Try to schedule membrane replacement at the end of a field
day, or the night before. This allows the membrane more time to "relax" and
equilibrate. .
-------
Section 14
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 3 of 14
8.
Prepare the electrolyte by dissolving the KCI crystals in the dropper
bottle with distilled water. Fill the bottle to the top.
Unscrew the sensor guard, and remove the O-ring and membrane.
Rinse the sensor with distilled water and then with electrolyte. Gently
wipe the gold cathode ring with a kim-wipe or paper towel.
Fill the sensor with electrolyte. If you're a "rightie", grasp the sensor in
your left hand with the pressure compensating vent to the right.
Successively fill the sensor body with electrolyte, then pump the
diaphragm with the ERASER end of a pencil or with some similar soft,
blunt tool. Continue filling and pumping until no more air bubbles
appear. Tap the sensor with the pencil to free any bubbles trapped on
the sides.
Remove a membrane from the "standard membrane" package (DO NOT
use the HydroLab membranes - they are different). Secure the
membrane under your left thumb. Add a few more drops of electrolyte to
the sensor to form a meniscus over the gold cathode.
With the thumb and forefinger of your other hand, grasp the free end of
the membrane.
Using a continuous motion, stretch the membrane UP, OVER, and
DOWN the other side of the sensor. Stretching forms the membrane to
the contour of the probe.
Secure the end of the membrane under the forefinger of the hand
holding the probe.
Set the O-ring on the membrane above the probe, and using your thumb
and index finger, roll the O-ring down over the probe until it is seated.
Try not to touch the membrane surface while doing this. Gently tug at
the exposed corners to remove all wrinkles, then trim away the excess
membrane below the O-ring and replace the sensor guard. Inspect the
membrane to make sure there are no bubbles, wrinkles, or cuts.
The probe should be stored in the open-ended plastic bottle provided
for that purpose. Moisten the sponge or paper towel in the end of the
storage bottle to prevent the membrane from drying out. The membrane
needs to relax for a minimum of 12 hours following installation.
-------
Section 14
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/33
Page 4 of 14
14.2.3 Calibration of the YSl Oxygen Meter
The YSl should be calibrated before sampling at EACH station, and the meter
and attached probe should be turned on for at least 15 minutes prior to calibration or
sampling. In practice this means turning the meter on at the beginning of the day and
leaving it on (with the possible exception of very long transit periods between
stations). On field days when the probe is not being used leave the meter in the %
switch positions (or, in the case of the model 57, in the 0-10 MG/L position).
1. Calibration will be done in the probe storage/calibration chamber.
Confirm that a moist piece of towel or sponge is present in the bottle.
Remove any water droplets from the membrane surface by drying with
the corner of a paper towel.
2. Set the function switch to ZERO, and when the display reading has
stabilized, readjust display to read 0.00.
3. Reset the function switch to % mode. When the display reading has
stabilized, unlock the O2 CALIB control locking ring and adjust the
display to read. 100%. Relock the locking ring to prevent inadvertent
changes. Avoid exposing the calibrated probe to large thermal changes,
such as from direct sunlight or lying on a hot deck.
74.2.4 Operation of the YSl Oxygen Meter
In general the YSl will be used to confirm the proper operation of the CTD.
1. Calibrate the YSl (See above; section 14.2.3.
2. Remove the storage/calibration chamber and the sensor guard, and
CAREFULLY screw the probe into the stirrer. The probe membrane
should NOT touch the stirrer blades. Membrane damage occurs most
often when the probe is being inserted or removed from the stirrer. If a
measurement isn't to be taken immediately, wrap the stirrer-probe unit in
a moist towel and set it out of the sun.
3. Set the function switch to 0.01 MG/L mode.
-------
Section 14
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
PageS of 14
4. To perform a surface YSI check hang the probe next to the CTD DO
probe with the stirrer ON. Set the YSI salinity from refractometer
reading. Record temperature from a thermometer, and DO from the YSI
on the "CTD CAST DATA SHEET1.
5. To perform the bottom dissolved oxygen check of the CTD do the
following:
A. Collect a bottom water sample in the GO-FLO bottle.
B. Draw out a small sample from the bottle and measure the salinity
using the refractometer. Set the SALINITY switch to this value,
and record the salinity on the "CTD CAST DATA SHEET".
C. Insert the stirrer-probe unit into the GO-FLO bottle and turn the
stirrer ON.
D. When the meter reading has stabilized, record the oxygen value
on the "CTD CAST DATA SHEET.
E. Remove the probe, turn the stirrer OFF, rinse the probe with
freshwater, replace the storage bottle, and store the unit out of
sunlight
14.2.5 YSI Mobil Lab QC Check
A QC check of the YSI will be preformed once each sampling cycle. This
should be done before the CTD QC check, since the YSI is used to QC the CTD. YSI
QC data should be recorded on the CTD/YSI QC DATA SHEET. This information
MUST also be transferred to the computer, and should be done immediately following
the CTD QC check.
• 1. Air calibrate the YSI as outlined above (see section 14.2.3 CALIBRATION
OF THE YSI OXYGEN METER).
2. Bubble a bucket of freshwater for at least 2 hours to allow it to become
air saturated. Put the calibrated YSI stirrer-probe unit into the bucket
and turn the stirrer ON. The SALINITY switch should be set to 0.
3. When the meter has stabilized, record the YSI oxygen and temperature
readings.
-------
Section 14
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
PageS of 14
4. Insert a thermometer into the bucket and record the ambient water
temperature.
5. Siphon a water sample from the bucket into three BOD bottle, and do a
Winkler titration on two samples. If they differ significantly titrate the third
sample (see appendix D)-. (NOTE: As part of the titration process, the
thiosulfate should .be calibrated.) Record the Winkler oxygen value.
6. Tolerances for passing the YSI QC check are as follows:
- Temperature:
- Oxygen:
+/-2C
+/- 0.5 mg/l.
If a YSI fails to pass any of the QC checks, repeat the above procedures one
time. If the YSI still fails, change the probe unit and try again. Repeated failure
with a new probe unit .may indicate that the YSI meter is bad. Contact Steve
Kelly.at the FOC immediately.
14.3 CTD Dockside QC Checks
A QC check of the CTD (and the YSI) will be performed once each sampling
cycle, from a convenient dock or sheltered location. The CTD/YSI QC DATA SHEET
should be used to record all values taken during the CTD QC check.
1. If not already done, do the YSI QC check (see appendix F, section 5.0)
and calibrate the YSI (see above).
2. Set up the CTD in realtime mode. To do this, connect the data cable to
the CTD, select "Instruments Menu" from the main menu, select "CTD",
and select "Realtime CTD/YSI QC Check". You will be prompted to turn
on the CTD switch. NOTE: DO NOT turn on the CTD until just before
you are ready to lower it into the water. (As with a real deployment, this
will allow air to bleed out of the tubing system before the pump kicks in.)
3. Once the CTD is on, lower the instrument into the water. The computer
screen should change to a display of numbers updated every 1
seconds. Allow the CTD to equilibrate in the water - this may take up to
10 minutes, depending on the temperature difference between the deck
and the water. Watch the "Oxygen Temp" and "Temperature" numbers.
When they are within 0.5° C, the unit is equilibrated.
-------
Section 14
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page? of 14
Take a bucket water sample from next to the CTD, check the salinity with
a refractometer and record this value.
Put the calibrated YSI over the side next to the bottom of the CTD.
Adjust the YSI salinity to the refractometer salinity, then record the YSI
temperature and oxygen (as the AMBIENT values) and the CTD
temperature, oxygen and salinity.
Bring the CTD back on deck, but leave the magnetic switch ON, and
leave the computer in real time mode. Rinse off the pH probe with
distilled water and some pH 10 buffer, then insert the probe in the pH 10
buffer. Confirm that an electrical connection exists between the top of
the pH probe and the buffer solution. Record the CTD pH reading.
The CTD may now be turned OFF, the sensors rinsed with freshwater,
and all probe covers replaced. Exit from the real time mode with 0.3 contact the FOG regarding recalibration.
14.4 Obtaining CTD Profile (See Figure 14.1)
-------
Section 14
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 8 of 14
14.4.1 Setup and Initialization Procedures
During the surface and bottom soaks of the cast, independent measurements
are collected at the respective depths with a YSI meter according to the instructions in
above. Great care must be taken to avoid altering the oxygen concentration of the
bottom samples. Enter the DO concentration and temperature into the computer.
These data serve as backup measurements for the CTD, and a QC check on the CTD
instrument.
At each station, the general procedures for collection of data are as follows:
1. Connect the CTD to the end of the winch cable with a shackle, and
TIGHTEN THE PIN. Make sure a "pinger" is attached to the unit. A 50
pound weight should be hanging approximately one meter, below the
unit, and two floats attached to the top. This will prevent the unit from
impacting the bottom. Once the weight hits the bottom the unit will float
one meter above.
2. Select "CTD Cast" from the "Environmental Sampling" menu. The
computer will prompt for connection to the CTD. The computer will
attempt to communicate with the CTD. If successful, computer will
display "CTD Menu". If communication is not established, you will be
asked if you want to retry. Answer . If communication still cannot
be established, check your connections and try again.
3. For the FIRST cast of the day select "Initialize CTD". Answer to
clear the CTD memory. At this point logging will be initialized, and the
CTD time and date will be reset to match the computer time and date.
4. If this is NOT the first cast of the day, OR if you have completed "Initialize
CTD", select "Prepare For Next Cast".
5. Confirm that the magnetic switch is in the OFF position and press
. At this point the computer will check and display the CTD main
battery voltage and availability of free memory, then place the CTD in
quiet state. If the voltage or memory capacity are low a warning
message will be displayed. You can still elect to continue the cast, or
take action to correct the problems.
- To correct a low voltage problem, change the batteries (See 14.5 CTD
MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING).
-------
Section 14
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Pege 9 of 14
- To correct a full memory problem, initialize the CTD.
NOTE: Make certain that all files have been saved or they will be lost
6. Disconnect the CTD when prompted, and prepare for deployment
14.4.2 Deployment
1. Disconnect the data cable, and replace the dummy plug (be careful NOT
to bend the CTD pins). The bump on the side of the plug should be
aligned with the thick pin. Finger tighten the locking sleeve on the
dummy plug. Confirm that the magnetic switch on the CTD is in the OFF
position. Attach the cocked Go-flow bottle to the side of the CTD in
preparation for collecting a bottom water sample. For stations > 10 m
simultaneous bottom sampling may be difficult Bottom water sample
may need to be taken after the CTD cast is completed.
2. Prior to actually putting the CtD in the water, run through the following
checklist:
A. Remove the distilled water loop from the conductivity cell, and connect
the tube from the oxygen probe. Remove all rubber stoppers.
B. Check the transmissometer and fluorometer lens to make sure they are
clean. Use only Kim-wipes or lens paper to clean them. Do not wipe
dry lenses if there is salt on them.
C. Carefully unscrew the bottom of the bottle covering the pH probe, and
slide it straight down off the probe. If you can't reach the plastic bottle,
first remove the sensor guard cage by unscrewing it.
D. Remove the black plastic cap covering the PAR light sensor.
E. Attach the ballast weight and floatation if they are to be used. Secure
the winch shackle to the metal ring at the top of the frame, and raise the
CTD to the rail.
F. Slide the magnetic switch DOWN into the ON position, and immediately
lower the CTD into the water.
-------
Section 14
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 10 of 14
3. Attempt to position the boat so that the PAR sensor (the small white
sphere) is NOT shaded. This may involve holding the CTD away from the
boat with a boat, hook.
4. After allowing the instrument to reach thermal equilibrium (at least 4
minutes), hang the YSI probe over the side next to the CTD to measure
the dissolved oxygen and temperature with the calibrated YSI. Collect a
sub surface water sample with a bucket, and measure the salinity with
the refractometer. Process the water sample collected for total
suspended solids. Record the temperature and DO immediately prior to
descent of CTD.
5. Lower the CTD through the water column at a rate of approximately 0.25
meter per second until it reaches the bottom.
6. When you feel the CTD bottom weight touch, the wire will go slack, stop
lowering and hold the CTD at the bottom for at least 2 minutes. Pay
careful attention to the wire, and make sure the CTD isn't bounced or
dragged across the bottom. The bottom weight/buoy system should
ensure that the CTD sensors never actually touch the bottom, and
therefore won't become plugged with mud. Collect a water sample with
the Go-flow bottle attached directly to the CTD.
7. Raise the CTD to just below the surface and let it collect data for at least
2 minutes. As the CTD comes out of the water, slide the magnetic
switch UP to the OFF position. Check the conductivity and temperature
probes for damage and/or obstructing mud or stones. Rinse the
conductivity cell and DO probe with Dl water. Reconnect the distilled
water loops to the oxygen and conductivity sensors, and carefully cap
the pH and PAR probes. Remove the dummy plug from the data port.
Dry of the port and re-connect the cable, and download the data
8. Measure the dissolved oxygen and temperature of water sample
collected with the Go-flo with the calibrated YSI, and measure the salinity
with the refractometer.
-------
Section 14
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 11 of 14
Figure 14.1 PERFORMING A CTD CAST
INITIALIZE UNIT
I
ALLOW UNIT TO
EQUILIBRATE FOR .
3-4 MIN AT SURFACE
OBTAIN A SUB-SURFACE
SAMPLE FOR DO, TEMP
AND SALINITY. ALSO
COLLECT WATER FOR
SUSPENDED SOLIDS
AND CHLOROPHYLL
FILL PLASTIC
625 ml CONTAINER
1
PLACE ON ICE
PERFORM CAST,
DESCENT SPEED
= 0.25 m/sec
note: DO NOT ALLOW UNIT
TO IMPACT THE BOTTOM
I
ALLOW UNIT TO
RECORD DATA AT BOTTOM
FOR 2 MINUTES
EQUILIBRATE AT
SURFACE FOR 2
MINUTES AFTER '
UPCAST
OBTAIN A BOTTOM WATER
SAMPLE FOR DO, TEMP AND
SALINITY (YSI & REFRAC.)
AND CHLOROPHYLL
DUMP DATA TO
GRID
REVIEW CAST DATA &
COMPARE D.O. AND TEMP TO
BOTTOM AND SURFACE YSI VALUES
-------
Section 14
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 12 of 14
14.4.3 Retrieving Data
1. Select "Download Cast" from the CTD Menu. Reconnect when
prompted if not already connected. The computer will establish
communication with the CTD, display the cast headers in the scroll
window, and request the cast number to be downloaded. Enter the
appropriate cast number. This will normally be the highest number (i.e.
the latest cast). If there is only one cast stored in the CTD, the cast will
automatically be downloaded.
2. If downloading in the Mobil Lab, enter station and event number.
3. The computer will present a series of graphical displays of each sampled
parameter plotted against depth. At present, YOU MUST RECORD ON
THE "CTD CAST DATASHEET1 A CTD SURFACE AND BOTTOM D.O., A
CTD SURFACE AND BOTTOM SALINITY, A CTD SURFACE AND
BOTTOM TEMPERATURE, AND A CTD BOTTOM DEPTH. These
' numbers can be read from the graphical displays.
- To change parameter displays, press . Currently, you can
move forward with the or and backward with
through the displays.
- To scroll through the data in a parameter display, use the arrow and
page keys. Page keys work by holding the key down, and
pressing or .
- To dump a screen display to the printer, make sure the printer is on-
line, then hold the key down and press .
4. After you have viewed all the profiles, press and the computer
will ask if you want to accept this cast Answer or .
- "NO" will return you to the "First" or "Second Visit Menu".
- "YES" will bring up the "Field Crew's Station Info, screen".
5. Enter ALL the appropriate information, including the CTD DO, salinity,
temperature and CTD bottom depth as recorded on the data sheet.
Press to save and record the data. Answer 'rf the page is
correct. At this point more log files will be copied to the A: drive, and the
-------
Section 14
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 13 of 14
computer will return to the "First" or "Second Visit Menu".
6. After data are stored in the on-board computer, view the DO data on the
screen using the software supplied. Compare the bottom DO to the
value obtained by the YSI. If surface or bottom CTD DO measurements
differ by greater than 0.5 mg/l repeat the cast. If measurements from the
second cast do not agree, flag the data. The cast can still be accepted
if the other measurements appear reasonable.
7. After sampling is finished for the day, the CTD should be thoroughly
rinsed down with freshwater.
14.5 CTD Maintenance and Cleaning
1. As often as possible, flush the entire CTD with fresh water.
2. Keep the distilled water loop on the conductivity cell, and keep the
oxygen sensor moist (it does not need to be full of water, just in a humid
environment
3. To clean the conductivity cell and the oxygen probe, put a few drops of
the Triton X-10Q cleaner into their respective tubes, and allow to soak
over night. The tubes should be flushed with water before deployment.
NEVER use a brush or tool to clean the inside of the conductivity cell.
4. When the data cable is not in use, keep it coiled.
5. Handle the CTD with care - some of the sensors are more delicate than
others, and can be damaged by bouncing the unit on deck, or by letting
the unit fall over, etc.
14.6 Safety Considerations
The CTD is fairly heavy; therefore, care should be taken when deploying or
retrieving this unit from the end of the boom under adverse weather conditions. The
only other danger to the user is from the operation of the winch, .which is covered in
Section 9. In addition, care should be taken not to damage the instrument.
14.6 Contingencies
-------
Section 14
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 14 of 14
1. If the water depth is too shallow (<. 3 meters) to obtain a profile,
suspend the unit just above the bottom and collect data for two minutes
(following a three minute warm-up period). This must be noted in the
computer log, and the Field Coordinator notified.
2. If the CTD fails to function properly, the surface and bottom DO value
obtained from the YSI meter will be used in data assessment for the DO
concentration. In addition the Hydrolab unit will be deployed to profile
• salinity, temperature and pH. The operation of the Hydrolab is described
in Appendix E.
3. Any time a contingency plan is initiated, the FC must be notified. In the
case of equipment failure, the FC should be notified immediately so
arrangements can be made for shipping back-up equipment
-------
Section IS
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 1 of 10
SECTION 15
SEDIMENT COLLECTIONS
15.1 Sediment Collections
Sediments are collected for a variety of analyses. Three samples are collected
for benthic species composition, abundance, and biomass. Additional sediment grabs
are collected for chemical analyses and for use in acute toxicity tests (actual number
needed may vary based on the required volume). To minimize the possibility of
biasing results, benthic biology grabs should not be collected consecutively, but rather
interspersed among the chemistry/toxicity grabs. While a biology grab is being
processed (sieved), grabs should be collected for chemistry/toxicity.
A 1/25 m2, stainless steel, Young-modified Van Veen Grab sampler is used to
collect sediments for benthic analyses. The sampler is constructed entirely of
stainless steel and has been Kynar®-coated (similar to Teflon) and is therefore
appropriate for collecting sediment samples for both biological and chemical analyses.
The top of the sampler is hinged to allow for the removal of the top layer of sediment
for chemical and toxicity analyses. This gear is relatively easy to operate and requires
little specialized training.
Listed below is the protocol for obtaining sediment samples.
1. Using the washdown pump, thoroughly rinse the inside of the grab
sampler with seawater from the station being sampled. NOTE: The
sampler must be washed with Alconox prior to use at a station.
2. Attach the sampler to the end of the winch cable with a shackle and
tighten the pin. An auxiliary link is also installed to provide added
assurance against loss of the equipment. Attach a pinger to the grab.
3. Attach one set of weights to the sampler. These can be removed, or
additional weights added depending on the sediment type. The grab is
then cocked.
4. Lower the grab sampler through the water column such that travel
through the last 5 meters is no faster than 1 m/sec. This minimizes the
effects of bow wave disturbance to surficiaf sediments.
-------
Section 15
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 2 of 10
5. Retrieve the sampler and lower it into its cradle on-board. Open the
hinged top and determine whether the sample is successful or not. A
successful grab is one having relatively level, intact sediment over the
entire area of the grab, and a sediment depth at the center of at least 7
centimeters (see Figure 15.1). Grabs containing no sediments, partially
filled grabs, or grabs with shelly substrates or grossly slumped surfaces
are unacceptable. Grabs completely filled to the top, where the
sediment is in direct contact with the hinged top, are also unacceptable.
It may take several attempts using different amounts of weight to obtain
the first acceptable sample. The more weight added, the deeper the bite
of the grab. In very soft mud, pads may be needed to prevent the
sampler from sinking in the mud. If pads are used, the rate of descent
near the bottom should be slowed even further to reduce the bow wave.
6. Carefully drain overlying water from the grab.
7. Enter notes on the condition of the sample into the computer and on the
data sheet. Options on smell, texture, etc. are available via menus.
8. Process the grab sample for either benthic community analysis or
chemistry/toxictty testing as described below.
9. Repeat steps 4-8 until all samples are collected. To minimize the chance
of sampling the exact same location twice, after three grabs are taken
(whether successful or not), move the boat 5 meters downstream by
letting out the appropriate length of anchor line.
-------
Section IS
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 3 of 10
*:CEPTA8LE
PENETRATION
MET
Rgure15.1. Quality assurance criteria for obtaining grab samples. Oniy those
samples meeting QA criteria are retained. Those not meeting these
criteria are discarded.
-------
Figure 15.2
SEDIMENT COLLECTIONS
OBTAIN SEDIMENT
GRAB SAMPLES
1
EVALUATE EACH FOR
ACCEPTABILITY
EC
LOG NOTES ON AP]
BIOLOGY
?EARANCE OF GRAB
CHE]
IISTItt
MEASURE DEPTH AT
CENTER OF GRAB
REMOVE 2 CM PLUG
FROM EACH GRAB
FOR AVS SAMPLE
REMOVE TOP
2 CM
1
PLACE IN
S.S. PAN
BETWEEN GRABS,
KEEP ON ICE
EXTRUDE SEDIMENT FROM
CORE fie SAVE FOR GRAIN
SIZE ANALYSIS
I
CONTINUE UNTIL
SUFFICIENT QUANTITY
HAS BEEN COLLECTED
DUMP REMAINING
SEDIMENT INTO BUCKET
I
STIR SEDIMENT FOR 10 MIN
TO HOMOGENIZE
SIEVE THROUGH
0.5 ma SIEVE
I
RINSE ORGANISMS INTO
SAMPLE CONTAINER <700cc
PRESERVE WITH FORMALIN
FILL TO RIM
CLEAN
SIEVE
1
PLACE 250 CC IN GLASS
JAR FOR CHEMISTRY
100 CC FOR METALS IN JAR
1
PLACE 3000 cc IN PLASTIC
JAR FOR TOXICITY
PLACE 100 CC IN WHIRL PACK
FOR GRAIN SIZE ANALYSIS
I
PLACE ON ICE
DO NOT FREEZE
-------
Section 15
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 5 of 10
15.1.1 Field Processing of Samples for Benthic Community Assessment
Grab samples to be used in the assessment of macrobenthic communities are
processed in the following manner:
1. Assign a sample number to the sample, affix the label to the sample jar,
' and scan the number into the computer using the bar code reader.
2. Measure the depth of the sediment at the middle of the sampler and
record the value on the data sheet. The depth should be >7 cm.
Record descriptive information about the grab, such as the presence or
absence of a surface floe, color and smell of surface sediments, and
visible fauna in the computer.
3. Insert a small (2:5 cm diameter, 15 cm long), clear plastic core into a
random location within the sampler and extract a core sample. Extrude
the sediment from the core, tube into a 'Whirl Pack." If an insufficient
amount of sediment has been extruded to fill the Whirl Pack half-way, the
repeat until the pack is full. Place an appropriate bar code label on the
Whirl Pack. Record the sample number on the Whirl Pack, and store for
later analysis to determine the relative proportion of silt and clays versus
sands. The sample should be stored on ice (NOT dry ice) as the sample
should be refrigerated at 4°C, not frozen.
4. Process the remainder of the grab for benthic community analyses.
Dump the sediments into a basin and then into a 500 /am mesh sieve.
Place the sieve into a table (sieve box) containing water from the
sampling station. Agitate the tray in the sieve box thus washing away
sediments and leaving organisms, detritus, sand particles, and pebbles ,
larger than 500 pm. This method minimizes mechanical damage to
fauna that is common when forceful jets of water are used to break up
sediments. A gentle flow of water over the sample is acceptable.
Extreme care must be taken to assure that no sample is lost over the
side of the sieve.
5. Drain the water from the sieve box and gently rinse the contents of the
tray to one edge. Using either your fingers or a spoon, GENTLY scoop
up the bulk of the sample and place it in the plastic screw-top bottle
from which the sample number was scanned in Step 1 (which should be
placed in the sieve or a bucket in case some of the sample spills over).
Rinse the outside of the sample jar into the sieve, then, using a funnel,
rinse the contents into the jar. The jar should be filled no higher than the
700 ml mark. If the quantity of sample exceeds 700 ml, place the
remainder of the sample in a second, unlabeled container. Using a
-------
Section 15
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 6 of 10
9.
waterproof marker, write the sample number on the second container
and tape the two together. Note in the computer that the sample
consists of more than one container.
Carefully inspect the sieve to ensure that all organisms are removed
using fine forceps (if necessary) to transfer fauna from the sieve to the
bottle containing the proper sample number.
Ten percent buffered formalin is used to fix and preserve samples. A
100 % buffered, stained stock formalin solution should be mixed
according to the recipe in Table 15.1. 100 ml of the formalin should be
added to each sample jar, and a teaspoon-full of borax added to assure
saturation of the buffer. FILL THE JAR TO THE RIM WITH SEAWATER
TO ELIMINATE ANY AIR SPACE. This eliminates the problem of
organisms sticking to the cap because of sloshing during shipment.
Gently invert the bottle to mix the contents and place in the dark. If the
sample occupies more than one container, tape all the sample bottles
containing material from that grab together.
Prior to sieving the next sample, use copious amounts of forceful water
and a stiff brush to clean the sieve, thereby minimizing cross-
contamination of samples
Table 15.1. Directions for mixing stock solutions of formalin.
Chemical
Volume
Desired
Total
Quantity
100% formalin stock (stained and buffered!
Rose Bengal stain 8 £
Borax 81
100% formalin 8 i
1/4 teaspoon
8 heaping tablespoons
two gallons
-------
Section 15
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 7 of 10
15,1.2 Field Processing of Sediments for Chemistry and Toxicity Testing
In addition to the three grabs collected for benthic community analyses,
additional grabs are collected for chemical analyses and toxicity testing. The top two
cm of these grabs are removed, homogenized, and split for chemistry and toxicity
testing. Because of contamination concerns these samples are removed and
processed in the order described below:
1. As each grab is retrieved, carefully examine it to determine acceptability
as described above in Section 15.8, Step 6. Record notes on the
appearance of acceptable samples, and carefully remove and discard
large, non-living surface items such as rocks or pieces of wood.
NOTE: Great care must be taken to avoid contamination of this sample from
atmospheric contaminants. The Briggs and Stratton engine must be turned off and
either the boat engine turned off or the boat maneuvered to assure the exhaust is
down wind.
2. A dean stainless steel spoon and a uncontaminated syringe are used to
remove sediments from grab samples for these analyses. All items must
be washed with Alconox and rinsed with ambient seawater before use.
3. ACID VOLATILE SULFIDES - Use a clean 60 cc syringe to extract the
top two centimeters of material from undisturbed surfictal sediment. An
appropriate number of plugs must be taken from each chemistry grab in
order to fill a 125 ml plastic jar to the top of the threads (normally one
plug/grab), in between grabs the jar must be sealed and placed in a
cooler on ice. CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO PREVENT OXIDATION OF
THE SAMPLE. Fill the sample container completely, leaving no head
space. This sample must be refrigerated ASAP.
4. Remove the top two cm of sediment using the stainless steel spoon.
Place the sediment removed in a stainless pot and place the pot in a
cooler on ice (NOT dry ice). The sample must be stored at 4°C, NOT
FROZEN.
5. Repeat this procedure, composite the sediment in the same'stainless pot
until a sufficient quantity of sediment has been collected for all samples.
Stir sediment homogenate after every addition to the composite to insure
adequate mixing. Keep the container covered and in the cooler between
-------
Section 15
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 8 of 10
grabs.
6. Homogenize the sediment by stirring with a Teflon paddle for 10 minutes.
7. ORGANICS - Using a stainless steel spoon, carefully place 250 cc of
sediment in a 500 ml glass bottle for chemical analysis. CARE MUST BE
TAKEN TO ASSURE THAT THE INSIDE OF THE BOTTLE, BOTTLE CAP,
AND THE SAMPLE ARE NOT CONTAMINATED. If not already in place,
affix the label supplied with the bottle containing the lot number (this
need not be recorded anywhere). Record the sample number, wrap the
jar in "bubble wrap" to protect it from breakage, and place the sample on
ice (NOT dry ice). To reduce the possibility of breakage, the sample
should be stored at 4°C, NOT FROZEN.
8. METALS - Using a stainless steel spoon, place approximately 100cc of
sediment into a pre-cleaned plastic (HOPE) sampling jar. Record the
sample number and keep on ice at 4°C.
9. SEDIMENT CHEMISTRY QA - At one previously designated station per
crew, three additional samples need to be collected for each of the
following: 125 ml AVS, 250 ml organics and 125 ml metals are collected
for duplicate analyses (1) and for analysis by a referee laboratory (2),
Four plugs must be taken from each of chemistry grabs to fill each of the
bottles at a constant rate following directions in step 3. QA samples for
organics and metals are collected from the same composite as per the
directions in Step 6. The FC will notify the crew at which station these
samples need to be collected. In addition, one glass sample jar should
be left open on the deck whenever the organics sample is exposed.
This will serve as a blank.
9. SEDIMENT GRAIN SIZE - Attach an appropriate bar code label to a
Whirl-Pack, and fill approximately half-way for sediment grain size
analysis, and record the sample number. Store this sample on ice (NOT
dry ice).
10. SEDIMENT TQXICITY - Using the stainless steel spoon, fill
approximately 85% of the 1 gallon plastic container for toxicity testing
with sediment (minimum volume required is 3000 ml). Record the
sample number on the bottle, and place the sample on ice (NOT dry
ice). The sample must be stored at 4°C, NOT FROZEN.
-------
Section 15
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 9 of 10
15.2 Safety Considerations
All sediment grab samplers are dangerous pieces of equipment Once the
device is cocked, it could accidentally trip at any time. The operators must be careful
not to place hands or fingers in a position where they could be damaged (or
amputated) in the event that the device trips prematurely.
The sampler is a heavy piece of equipment (especially when full). The
operators must take care when deploying or retrieving this gear under adverse
weather conditions. A grab sampler swinging wildly at the end of a boom can be very
dangerous.
15.3 Quality Assurance
There are a number of steps that can be taken to ensure the integrity of the
samples collected.
1. The interior surfaces of the grab sampler (including the underside of the
hinged top) must be washed and thoroughly rinsed prior to use to
assure that no sediment remains from the previous station.
2. Prior to use, all Teflon and stainless steel supplies which are to come
into contact with samples must also be properly cleaned.
3. ASSURE THAT THE PROPER BAR CODE LABELS ARE AFFIXED TO
ALL SAMPLES.
4. At selected sites, "blanks" for chemistry will be obtained. Leave an
empty glass chemistry jar open whenever the sample is exposed,
mimicking the treatment it would receive if a sample was to be placed in
it. Then seal the jar and record the sample number. This jar is then
treated in the same fashion as all other chemistry samples.
5. Care should be taken to assure that the sediment saved for chemical
and toxicological analyses is collected only from .the top two cm of the
. grab.
6. Care must be taken to assure that the chemistry samples do not
become contaminated. This requires great care in extracting the sample,
-------
Section 15
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 10 of 10
homogenizing it, and placing it in the proper container. If it Is raining
when the sample is collected, all activities should be conducted under a
tarp to prevent contamination of the sample by rain water.
7. Great care must be taken to avoid atmospheric contamination from
engine exhaust. The Briggs and Stratton engine must be turned off and
the boat maneuvered to assure the engine exhaust is down wind of the
sample.
8. The grab must be suspended off the deck at all times to avoid
contamination.
15.4 Contingency Plans
It is recognized that at certain stations, the sediment type will prevent the
collection of sediment samples. If a single "acceptable" grab sample cannot be
obtained after five attempts, or if >70 percent of the attempts are unsuccessful, then
additional attempts are abandoned and no sediment samples collected. All other
samples should be collected. This must be noted in the computer and the FC notified
during the next scheduled call-in.
-------
Section 16
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 1 of 16
SECTION 16
FISH TRAWLS
After all required sediments are collected, one or more trawls are made to
collect fish for species composition, relative abundance, and for pathological
examination. In 1993, no fish will be collected for tissue analysis.
16.1 The EMAP Otter Trawl
A fish trawl is a funnel-shaped net that filters fish from the near bottom waters.
Fish are herded by ground wire and doors into the mouth of the funnel where fish are
captured. The basic components of a trawl net are described briefly below.
The doors of the net provide spreading power to the net. Water pressure
against the doors force them to spread the wings of the trawl. The wings are the
beginning of the webbing and form the mouth of the funnel on two sides of the net.
The wings are bordered on top and bottom by a headrope and a footrope,
respectively. For a single warp rig, each end of the headrope, or top line, is attached
directly to the upper ring on the back of the doors. Each end of the footrope, or
bottom line, is attached to the bottom ring of the doors. For strength and weight, a
sweep is attached to the footrope. At the bosom, or top of the curve of the mouth,
the wings attach to the body of the net The top portion of the body has an
overhanging panel, or square, which prevents fish from escaping over the top panel of
the trawl. Continuing back toward the terminus of the net are the first and second
bellies which are normally symmetrical top and bottom. The bellies contribute most of
the body of the net, and therefore make up most of the taper. The cod-end is the
rear portion of the trawl net which serves as a collecting bag for all that is captured by
the trawl.
Fish are collected using a high rise sampling trawl with a 16-meter footrope with
a chain sweep. Tow duration is 10 minutes with a towing speed of 2-3 knots against
the prevailing current. Speed over the bottom should be 1-3 knot. Fish are sorted
and enumerated and examined for evidence of gross pathological conditions.
Subsampling of fish is conducted as necessary. The outline below describes the
specific protocol to be followed during trawling operations. The procedures include:
net deployment, vessel operation while under tow, net retrieval, and processing.
-------
Section 16
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 2 of 16
Types of trawls can be defined as follows:
STANDARD TRAWL - This trawl is the "quantitative" trawl performed at all
stations for community structure and abundance determination. One standard
trawl should be performed at EVERY station. Any fish sample type can be
taken from a standard trawl. Fish are identified, measured, and examined.
NON-STANDARD TRAWL - At selected stations non-standard trawls may need
to be performed following the completion of a standard trawl to obtain a
sufficient number of fish for pathology QA or SMA. All sample types EXCEPT
PATHOLOGY can be obtained from a non-standard trawl. All fish are identified
and counted.
The type of fish samples that will be collected are as follows:
Pathology Fish - These are fish observed by the field crew to have a gross
external pathology (lump, growth, ulcer, and/or fin rot ONLY!I). ALL species
are examined for external pathology, therefore, pathology fish may be of any
species collected. Pathology Fish are collected during the standard trawl only.
SMA (spleen macrophaae aggregate) fish - These are "randomly" selected fish
collected only at pre-selected stations. SMA fish are selected by the crew after
or during examination for gross external pathology and are free from external
pathology (according to the collecting crew). Only those species listed on the
list of pathology target species are collected for SMA.
Pathology QA fish - These are fish collected at the same selected stations to
determine the crew's error rate. Pathology QA fish are NOT limited to target
species.
Taxonomy QA fish - The first two individuals of EVERY species collected by
each crew are preserved and sent back to ERL-N for verification by an expert
taxonomist.
16.2 Trawl Preparation
1. Inspect the trawl net for holes, including cod-end liners, and
mend/replace as necessary prior to departure from the dock. Inspect all
hardware for wear and replace as needed. All connections should be
.made securely and tightened with a wrench. Do NOT rely on hand
tightening shackles, bolts, or other fasteners.
-------
Section 16
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 3 of 16
2. Lead the winch wire from the drum through the turning block on the
mast assembly and through the snatch block at the end of the boom.
3. Attach the bridle to the winch wire with a shackle. Wind both legs of the
bridle onto the main winch drum, while maintaining tension on the wire.
All bridle connections should be tightened with a wrench.
4. Arrange the net on the deck with the cod-end aft and the head rope on
top. Close the end of the cod-end by using a cod-end knot. Check to
make sure there is no escapement possibility through the cod end rings.
Coil the float line from the cod-end to the float, and position it on the net
for easy access.
5. Attach the legs of the net to the trawl doors. The top leg of the net is the
extension of the headrope and must be secured to the top aft ring of the
door. The bottom leg is the extension of the sweep and must be
secured to the bottom aft ring of the door. One bridle wire should be
attached to each door at the towing point of the chain harness.
Shackles should be used for all connections.
16.3 Net Deployment
1. After all preparation steps have been completed, the Crew Chief should
check all resources available (chart, navigational aids, land marks etc.) to
determine that there are no under water hazards. Determine the
direction of current flow and survey the probable trawl track for potential
hazards, such as other vessels, deployed commercial fishing gear (nets,
pots, etc.), shallow water, or unsuitable substrate. In addition, depth,
weather, and sea conditions should also be evaluated prior to each trawl.
The decision as to whether or not to collect a sample is the responsibility
of the Crew Chief.
2. With the starboard engine in neutral, the boom should be positioned out
over the starboard gunnel with a enough incline for the doors to clear
the rail. Lead the bridles through the snatch block on the boom, raise
the doors with the winch, and bring them to rest on the gunnel
(starboard door forward, port door aft). Circle the boat slowly to
starboard. When the starboard side is down current, deploy the float
and safety line attached to the cod-end. Flake the net into the water
from the cod-end to the wings. Check to make sure that the legs of the
net are not twisted before continuing deployment. Pay out wire until the
-------
Section 16
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 4 of 16
doors are well behind the engines. Swing the boom to the centerline
then lower the boom, releasing tension on the snatch block (the wire
should now be on the goalpost assembly). Head slowly into the current
(e.g., 1 knot) and continue to pay out wire until appropriate warp length
is obtained (consult Table 16.1 for the proper amount of wire to be
released based on water depth). Great care should be taken to prevent
fouling of the propeller with the net. Care should also be taken to
maintain tension on the tow warp to avoid fouling the net on bottom.
The starboard engine can be engaged when the gear is clear of the
props and the doors spread.
Table 16.1. Amount of Winch Wire to be Used for Trawling and Dredging
Water depth (ft)
Ratio of line to water depth
(including the 125' bridle)
Line out
10 (3m)
20 (6m)
30 (9m)
40 (12m)
50 (15m)
60 (18m)
70 (21 m)
80 (24 m)
90 (27m)
7:1
7:1
7:1
6:1
5.5:1
5:1
4.6:1
4.2:1
3.8:1
Bridle only (38m)
Bridle+201 (44m)
BridIe+601 (56m)
Bridle* 120' (75m)
Bridle+155' (85m)
Bridle+180' (92m)
Bridle-f-202' (100m)
Bridle+216' (104m)
Bridle-f 222 (106m)
-------
Section 16
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 5 of 16
16.4 Trawling
As soon as the required warp length is reached, the winch operator
should inform the Crew Chief that the net is ready for towing. The Crew
Chief then visually resurveys the trawl track, records the time, initiates the
computer trawl clock, and begins the tow. An attempt should be made
to trawl along a uniform depth contour. Recording of the time and
coordinates is performed automatically by the computer system upon
prompting. .
Boat speed should be 2-3 knots. Speed over bottom, as measured by
Loran position, should be between 1 and 3 knots. If it becomes
apparent that these conditions will not be met, the net should be
retrieved and a different trawl direction tried.
During the trawl tow, the Crew Chief should monitor the depth finder for
potential obstructions or sudden changes in depth. If a hazard is
identified or a hang up occurs, the net should be retrieved and another
tow attempted approximately 100 m from the initial trawl track. If three
unsuccessful attempts are made, or 1.5 hours effort is expended,
trawling operations should be aborted. If a successful 10 minute trawl
cannot be accomplished, fish can still be collected from a shorter trawl
for SMA and pathology QA indicators.
The duration of all standard trawls should be 10 minutes from the time
the pay-out of warp is completed until the time hauling begins.
16.5 Net Retrieval
After approximately 10 minutes of trawling and when the crew is
prepared to haul back the computer should be prompted to end the
trawl.
Haul back the wire until approximately 10 meters of the bridle is still out.
Put the starboard engine in neutral. Throttle back and raise the boom so
the wire clears the goal post assembly. Turn the boat slightly to
starboard and move the boom over the starboard side (the boom should
be controlled by the vangs during this process). Take in wire until the
doors are at the block. Haul the cod end in by hand or use the capstan
head to assist
-------
Section 16
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 6 of 16
16.6 Safety Considerations
Operation of the trawl can be a dangerous operation. In addition to the
dangers of using the winch and capstan, improper towing procedures could capsize
the boat. The net should always be towed off the stern, with the winch cable passing
through the towing bracket. Towing off the side of the boat can capsize it Care must
also be taken when pulling the net in over the side. If the net is full, the total weight
may be too great to use the mast and boom.
When deploying the net, the crew must be careful not to entangle themselves
or other gear in the net, bridle, or winch cable. This could result in serious injury or
damage to equipment.
All trawling operations must be conducted in a manner consistent with
maintaining the safety of the crew. The Crew Chief will determine when weather or
sea conditions are unsafe for trawling.
In the event of net hang-ups on bottom obstructions, the Crew Chief must
consider the safety of the crew before attempting to free the gear. A means to sever
the tow line should be immediately available to the crew during all trawl operations.
SEVERING THE LINE SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED AS A LAST RESORT AND
WHEN THE LINE IS SLACK!!! SEVERING IT WHILE UNDER TENSION COULD
RESULT IN WHIPLASH OF THE LINE AND SEVERE INJURY.
Before deploying the trawl, the Crew Chief should ensure that other vessels do
not present a safety hazard during the tow. Some form of day-shape must be used to
inform boaters of the potential hazard (i.e., fish basket). Whenever possible, the Crew
Chief shall contact nearby vessels by marine radio to make them aware of the trawling
operation. In addition, the marine radio should be monitored by the crew prior to and
during trawl operations.
16.7 Criteria for Voiding Tows
A standardized tow will be considered void if one or more of the following
conditions occur:
1. A tow cannot be completed because of hang down, boat malfunction,
vessel traffic, or major disruption of gear.
2. Boat speed or speed over bottom is outside the prescribed, acceptable
range.
-------
Section 16
Revision 0
Oato: 6/9/93
Page 7 of 16
3. The cod-end is not tied shut.
4. If the tow continues for more than two minutes beyond the ten-minute
tow duration, or is, discontinued less than eight minutes following the
start.
5. The net is filled with mud or debris.
6. A portion of the catch is lost prior to processing.
7. The tow wire, bridle, headrope, footrope, or up and down lines parted.
8. The net is torn (>30 bars in the tapered portion, >20 bars in the
extension or cod end, or multiple tears that, in the opinion of the Crew
Chief, may have significantly altered the efficiency of the net).
16.8 Endangered Species
All species considered to be rare, threatened, or endangered (Table 16.2)
should be processed immediately and released alive. At the discretion of the Chief
Scientist, photographs may be taken to document the catch.
-------
Section 16
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 8 of 16
Table 16.2. List of endangered fish species that might be encountered in the
Virginian Province. These fish should be measured and returned to the
water immediately.
SPECIES
State protected in
Short nosed sturgeon
Atlantic sturgeon
Atlantic salmon
American shad
Striped bass
all (federal endangered species list)
CT, NJ, Rl
CT
NJ
DE, MD
16.9 Sample Processing
Once .a catch is brought on deck, fish are processed based upon the priority
level for that sample type:
1. Pathology
2. Taxonomy QA
3. Pathology QA / SMA
16.9.1 Processing of Fish for Gross External Pathological Analysis
I. Gross examination of fishes: (Ulcers, Growths, Lumps and Fin rot ONLY!)
Crews wiil perform a "standard" trawl at ALL STATIONS. All individuals
collected will be identified and counted, and the first 30 individuals of each
species will be measured. All individuals measured (i.e. the first 30) will be
-------
Section 16
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 9 of 16
examined for evidence of gross external pathology (lumps, growths, ulcers, and
fin rot ONLY). The examination is intended to be a rapid scan of the surface of
individuals to be completed while other fish measures are being completed (i.e.,
identifying, enumerating, measuring). This scan should take no longer than
10-15 seconds per fish. Fish determined to show evidence of a pathology are
assigned a sample number from the end of the chemistry range and processed
appropriately (see below). The type of pathology will be noted on the data
sheet and entered into the field computer. These are PATHOLOGY FISH.
Only fish collected in "standard" trawls are saved for pathology.
II. Selection, killing and fixation for transfer:
Proper fixation of specimens is critical to the ultimate quality of the data
obtained. Fish should be examined and fixed while still alive or shortly after
death (within one hour of collection). Specimens should not be frozen or kept
on ice at any time.
A. All specimens with gross lesions or other suspect conditions, as
identified in Section I above, will be processed and coded individually.
All these fish will be transferred as indicated below (Section III) to ERL-N
for subsequent examination.
1. Carefully cut the entire length of the abdominal cavity open using
scissors or a sharp knife. Gently insert the instrument into the
abdomen near the anus and make an incision to the operculum.
Cut with a lifting motion so that the incision is made from the
inside outward, taking care not to injure the visceral organs.
Remove the lateral musculature from one side of the animal's
visceral cavity to facilitate the fixation of the internal organs. Make
one or two cuts along the longitudinal axis of the livers of fishes
larger than 15 cm, remove the opercula, and immerse in fixative
(see step 5). This may require the gentle loosening and lifting of
the liver prior to cutting the organ.
2. If the total length of the fish exceeds 15 cm, only a portion of the
fish will be saved for laboratory analysis. Carefully cut, through
the entire thickness of the fish, from the top of the operculum
back along the spine, until a position behind the viscera! cavity is
reached, and then a 90° change in direction towards the anus.
The head and viscera are then saved. Remove both opercula,
and musculature covering the visceral cavity on one side. The
_
-------
Section 16
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 10 of 16
head and thorax can be separated at the esophagus if needed.
Any abnormalities found on the remaining portion of the fish
(which is to be discarded) are excised along with the surrounding
tissue, and saved with the head and visceral cavity. For fishes
smaller than 15 cm, the entire fish is saved.
4. If an external growth is present, slice through the lesion with one
clean cut using a sharp razor blade.
5. Place the sample (whole fish or head, visceral cavity and
abnormalities excised) in a plastic zip lock bag with multiple
perforations. Assign an appropriate sample number to each fish,
affix the bar code to a fish tag, and attach the tag to the fish.
Record this number on the data sheet, along with all other
pertinent information on that fish. Place the bag in a tight sealing
plastic container with sufficient fixative to completely cover the
specimen. Specimens should be fixed in Dietrich's fixative for one
or two days.
IMPORTANT NOTE -
At no time should onion bags be used to contain fish saved for
pathological examination. Plastic bags with at least 20 holes (from
a hole punch) should be used. ALSO, wire ties should never be
used to attach the tag to the fish. Plastic net twine can be pre-cut
and used for this purpose.
- Dietrich's Fixative (to make —5 gals.)
37-40% Formaldehyde
or 100% formalin 1500 ml
Glacial Acetic Acid 300 ml
95% Ethanol 4500 ml
Distilled water 9000 ml
6. Carefully record pertinent information relating to each individual
sample on the data sheet.
-------
Section 16
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 11 of 16
II. Shipping of preserved specimens:
Wrap each specimen in cotton or cheese-cloth and saturate with Dietrich's
fixative. Clearly label individual specimens with code tags wrapped up with the
fish. Place wrapped fish in zip-lock plastic bags and assure that they are
completely saturated with fixative. Pack wrapped and bagged specimen in
buckets or other suitable containers and ship via appropriate carrier. Fish sent
via courier should be double bagged packed in box with styrofoam packing
and have a final plastic, wrap that normally comes with each shipping box. Fish
can also be hand carried to ERL-N in liquid Dietrich's fixative without being
wrapped in cheese cloth.
76.9.2 Taxon QA Fish
The first two individuals of every non-threatened species collected by each crew
during the summer (from either trawl type) will be assigned a sample number from the
ranges designated on the data sheets, recorded on the data sheet, and preserved.
This fish should be preserved with the 10% un-stained formalin solution provided and.
shipped back to Charlie Strobel at ERL-N at the end of every shift.
16.9.3 Spleen Macrophage Aggregate
I. Collection of SMA fish:
Following the examination of fish for external pathology, SMA FISH will be
selected by the crew. SMA fish are collected ONLY AT SELECTED STATIONS. Only
target species are processed for SMA. The goal is to select up to fifteen individuals
(>75mm length) of each of the three highest priority target species present at that
station (see Table 16.3). These individuals are "randomly" selected from the pool of
fish. From a standard trawl these fish have already "passed" the crew's pathology
examination. Additional "non-standard" trawls should be initiated to collect additional
fish, as needed. SMA fish collected from a non-standard trawl still need to be
examined, for gross external pathologies. Pathologies should be recorded, but these
fish should never be sent in as Pathology fish.
No more than two hours of trawling are required of the crews regardless of the
number of fish caught. SMA fish are assigned a barcode number from a pre-assigned
range, recorded on the data sheet, and processed appropriately.
-------
Section 16
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 12 of 16
Table 16.3 Prioritized SMA Pathology Target Species list
1. Winter Rounder
2. Summer Flounder
3. Hogchoker
4. Channel Catfish
5. White Catfish
6. White Perch
7. Spot
8. Atlantic Croaker
II. Fixation for transfer:
This process is very similar to that of Pathology fish. However because a SMA
fish could also be a used as Path QA fish (meaning the iab will have to be able to
analyze for gross external pathologies) the fish must be in relatively "good" shape.
Fish should not be cut up if they are to large. If a fish does not fit in a bucket than it
will not be saved. Also, material should not be removed from the fish (i.e., belly flaps
and opercula). Care must be taken to avoid any unnecessary damage to any
musculature. Carefully cut the entire length of the abdominal cavity open using
scissors or a sharp knife. Gently insert the instrument into the abdomen near the
anus and make an incision to the operculum. Cut with a lifting motion so that the
incision is made from the inside outward, taking care not to injure the visceral organs.
Expose the visceral cavity to facilitate the fixation of the internal organs. The lateral
musculature should be cut in such a way as to insure that there is adequate fixation,
without removal of the flap. Viscera organs should be well exposed with out being
injured. Opercula should not be removed.
-------
Section 16
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Pago 13 of 16
16.9.4 Pathology QA Fish
I. Selection and fixation for transfer:
PATHOLOGY QA FISH will be randomly collected at the same SELECTED
STATIONS (2 per crew). These fish will be collected to determine the error rate
associated with crew member identification of gross external pathologies. Crews will
be informed in advance as to which stations these fish should be collected at. In
standard trawls, following the examination of fish and processing of Pathology fish, up
to 20 individuals (>75mm length) of each target species present and 10 of all other
species collected will be assigned a number from a pre-assigned range and
processed in the same fashion as Pathology fish. Fish captured in non-standard
trawls need to be examined for gross-external pathologies. If external pathologies
exist, they should be noted on the data sheet. Fish collected for SMA can be used for
Pathology QA. If, for instance, 15 individuals of a target species are collected, than
only 5 more additional individuals of that species need to be collected for PATH QA.
As with SMA fish, additional trawling may be required, with the crews expected to
spend up to two hours trawling at that site.
Fixation and preparation for shipment are identical to SMA fish. Care must be
taken to avoid any unnecessary damage to any musculature. Carefully cut the entire
length of the abdominal cavity open using scissors or a sharp knife. Gently insert the
instrument into the abdomen near the anus and make an incision to the operculum.
Cut with a lifting motion so that the incision is made from the inside outward, taking
care not to injure the visceral organs. Expose the visceral cavity to facilitate the
fixation of the internal organs. .
76.9.5 General Processing
1. After all fish have been sorted, process fish for pathological examination
as described above. Sampling for pathology, SMA and pathology QA
are performed concurrently with the collection of composition and
abundance data. Only fish are recorded. Crustaceans, other
invertebrates, and trash are noted in the computer then discarded.
2. Measure, with a measuring board, the fork length to the nearest
millimeter, of individuals of each species. If there are fewer than 30
individuals of a species, all individuals should be measured. If it is
estimated that more than 30 individuals of a species were caught, a
-------
Section 16
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 14 of 16
subsampling procedure should be used to measure between 30-50
individuals.. Subsampling will be accomplished by randomly selecting
fish from the buckets. All data are entered onto data sheets and later
into the computer.
NOTE-
Dog fish -
Skates -
. Rays -
Unforked -
Seahorse -
stretched total length
total length
wing tip to wing tip
total length with out extraneous filaments
strethed straight, head to tail
3. Enter data on the fish data sheets. Common names are acceptable. All
data are entered into the computer in the mobile laboratory with
common names (most are already listed in the computer). For fish not in
computer list the scientific name must also be included on the data
sheet
4. All fish not measured for length (i.e. those subsampled) are counted,
either by direct count or weight-counts. When extremely large catches of
schooling fish such as bay anchovy or other clupeids are made,
abundance may be estimated by weight-counts. At least 100 individuals
should be weighed in a batch, and 2 batches should be weighed to
determine mean weight per individual. All remaining fish should be
weighed, and the total number of fish estimated and recorded on the
data sheet. If two or more obvious size classes are present in a sample
(e.g., young-of-year and adults), the size classes should be treated as
separate species for the purpose of counting.
5. After all processing has been completed, the Chief Scientist should
review the trawl data sheet for discrepancies and inaccuracies. When
any questions have been resolved, he/she signs the data sheets as
being reviewed and the remaining portion of the catch can be returned
to the water. When significant mortality occurs and the trawl site is in a
highly visible area, the Crew Chief may elect to retain the catch until
more discrete disposal can be accomplished. Under no circumstances
should the crew give fish away to the general public.
6. On the following day, the crew member in the mobile laboratory enters
all data into the computer and assures that it is properly associated with
the correct station (see Data Management, Section 21). This crew
-------
Section 16
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/33
Page 15 of 16
member is also responsible for verifying the sample numbers of fish
saved for pathology, and providing the analytical laboratory with a
computer printout of the size and species of each fish shipped.
16.9 Quality Assurance
In order for the net to "fish" properly, the proper amount of winch cable must be
let out. Consult Table 16.1 for the proper scope. Care must also be taken to assure
that fish are not lost from the net during retrieval.'
It is important that the tow time and speed be as close to the desired values as
possible. Any deviations should be noted on the data sheet.
In an attempt to determine the "true" percentage error associated with species
identification and the determination of pathological conditions, the first two individuals
of each species collected will be preserved in 10% formalin and returned to ERL-N for
verification of identification.
16.10 Contingency Plans
Considering the wide variety of environments to be sampled by EMAP, it is
likely that towing a net will be impossible at some stations. If, due to repeated snags,
a successful trawl cannot be performed within 2 hours of starting, no further attempts
should be made. This is noted on the data sheet and the FC notified as soon as
possible.
16.11 Collection Permits
Many states require scientific collection permits for the collection of fish using
trawls. Permits issued for EMAP activities are carried on each boat. A permit must be
presented to any appropriate state official that requests to see it.
-------
DEPLOY NET
I
PAY OUT PROPER AMOUNT OF LINE
1
SET APPROPRIATE COURSE
1
RECORD START TIME AND COORDINATES
1
TRAWL FOR 10 MINUTES
2-3 KNOTS WATER SPEED
1-3 KNOTS SPEED OVER BOTTOM
1
RETRIEVE NET & DUMP CONTENTS ON DECK
I
SORT FISH BY SPECIES INTO BUCKETS
<30 FISH
MEASURE ALL
FISH
MEASURE FISH
& RECORD DATA
AND
EXAMINE ALL SPECIES OVER
75 mm FORK LENGTH FOR
GROSS EXTERNAL PATHOLOGY
>30 FISH
SUBSAMPLE
30-50 FISH
1
SAVE ALL DISEASED
FISH FOR HISTOPATHOLOGY
PROCESS FOR QA AND SMA
SEVER SPINAL CORD AND
OPEN GUT CAVITY
1
IF >15 cm FL, SAVE ONLY HEAD,
GUT CAVITY, AND DISEASED PORTIONS
IF <15 cm FL, SAVE ENTIRE FISH
1
PRESERVE IN DIETRICHS
Figure 16.1 FISH COLLECTIONS - Repeat for pathology QA and SMA for up to 2
hours.
-------
Section 17
Revision 1
Date: 6/9/93
Pago 1 of 16
SECTION 17
PACKAGING AND SHIPPING SAMPLES
After samples are collected, proper packaging and shipping procedures are
critical steps in assuring the integrity of the samples. Failure to follow these
procedures could result in the loss of valuable data. Each type of sample requires
different handling as described below. Packaging and shipping are performed within
several days of sample collection by the crew member in the mobile laboratory.
He/she is responsible for assuring that the samples are delivered to Federal Express.
At the time of collection the lids of all sample bottles should be tightened and
then sealed with electrical or sealing tape. As samples are packaged for final
shipment, the sample number of each sample is recorded in the computer. Upon
completion of packaging, a unique tracking number (bar code label) is affixed to the
SIDE of the box, and this number entered into the computer. The number must be
placed on the side, not top, so as not to interfere with the Federal Express tracking
system (which also uses bar codes). In addition to the Federal Express waybill, a
mailing label should also be affixed to the box as an additional precaution against
loss. A computer printout of the shipment number and all enclosed sample numbers
should be included in a packing slip envelope affixed to the inside of the top flap of
the box, or the top of the styrofoam packing box. The computer generated shipment
data sheet should also be sent to the Field Operations Center along with the next
shipment of data sheets and diskettes. Shipping information for field data sheets and
diskettes should be filled out by hand on a separate shipment data sheet. Samples
that are "hand-carried" require the same paperwork (less the airbill) and tracking as
those shipped by commercial carrier.
17.1 Proper Packaging Methods
Proper packaging of samples is critical in assuring they arrive at the receiving
laboratory in good condition. Improper packaging can result in damaged or lost
samples. This is costly in terms of time and money. There are several important
aspects of proper packaging: assembly of the shipping box, the amount of blue or
dry ice needed, and proper packaging of the contents.
Each team is supplied with several sizes of insulated shipping boxes, which
must be assembled in the field. Proper assembly is critical in assuring proper
insulation. Several sizes of styrofoam are included for the top, sides, and bottom. As
a tight fit is necessary, ONLY THE APPROPRIATE PIECES SHOULD BE USED.
THERE SHOULD BE NO NEED TO CUT DOWN PIECES OF STYROFOAM
-------
Section 17
Revision 1
Date: 6/9/93
Pago 2 of 16
INSULATION. First, the bottom should be placed INSIDE the plastic bag, and then
into the box. The sides should then be inserted, assuring the proper pieces of
styrofoam are used. When completed, the correct order of materials from the inside
out should be the styrofoam (again the pieces should FIT TIGHTLY), the plastic bag,
then the cardboard box. It is important that the plastic bag be BETWEEN the
styrofoam and the cardboard. Coolers are also supplied to the crews for shipping
sediment toxicity and grain size samples.
Each team carries coolers with dry ice and blue ice to keep samples frozen or
cool prior to shipment. Blue ice blocks are frozen by placing them under the dry ice.
Since chlorophyll is the only sample type that needs to be shipped on dry ice,
amounts of 20 pounds {or less) of dry ice will be used. A general rule of thumb is at
least 5-10 pounds, with another pound for every pound of sample (ASSUMING THE
SAMPLES ARE ALREADY FROZEN). The amount of blue ice needed to keep
samples cool is approximately one pound per pound of sample. This should
guarantee samples arrive frozen or cool (depending on the ice type) even if the
shipment is delayed a day. Each mobile lab is supplied with a shipping scale to
facilitate estimating the quantity of ice required. During storage on the boat and in the
mobile lab, all chilled samples should be stored on wet ice rather than blue ice. Blue
ice should be used only for shipping. Frozen samples should always be stored on
dry ice.
In addition, it is recommended that the sample be sandwiched between
refrigerant, i.e. dry ice should be packed both above and below the sample. It is also
important that the box contain a minimum of air space. Therefore, packing material
should be inserted above the top ice layer to fill the box.
A third consideration for all sample types (not just cooled or frozen samples) is
proper packaging within the shipping box. In the past, several shipments have
arrived broken due to improper packaging. While packing a shipment box, one
should assume that the box will be improperly handled. All samples should be
protected and sufficient packing material included to eliminate any possible movement
of the samples within the box. All material that could possibly leak, such as water or
sediment samples, should be sealed with sealing tape and packaged in zip lock bags.
AH glass sample bottles should be bubble wrapped and sealed in a zip lock bag.
Grain size whirl packs should also be placed in a zip lock bag by station.
Proper storage and shipment conditions are summarized in Table 17.1.
Federal Express requires a Dangerous Materials waybill for all shipments of formalin.
Federal Express requires a class 9 placard, UN number, packing description and a
emergency phone number for all shipments of formalin or dry ice.
-------
nditions
0
o
O)
c
"CL
Q.
Ic
CO
T3
C
CO
O)
"o
CD
Q.
CO
CO
J>
CO
z
o
Q
1
<5
Z
a
D.
X
CO
CO
z
ONDITIOI
O
O
z
Q
O
X
AMPLE TYPE
CO
t!_
X
CO
O
z
QC
=>
ST ONCE D
i"S
j
M^
1-
^
a
X
to
\ff
z
^J
g
QC
£
Z
UJ
>
UJ
CO
UJ
QC
a.
EDIMENT BIOTA
CO
E WEEKLY
g
S
a.
X
CO
Q
IGERATE
QC
UJ
or
EDIMENT GRAIN SIZE
CO
E WEEKLY
g
?
a.
X
CO
•
Q
IGERATE
QC
UJ
. QC
EDIMENT ORGANICS
CO
E WEEKLY
g
?
a.
X
CO
Q
IGERATE
DC
UJ
QC
EDIMENT METALS
CO
E WEEKLY
g
?
a.
X
CO
Q
IGERATE
QC
UJ
QC
-
EDIMENT AVS
CO
E WEEKLY
E WEEKLY
g g
S P
a a
X X
CO CO
Q Q
IGERATE
IGERATE
QC QC
UJ UJ
QC QC
EDIMENTTOXICITY
USPENDED SOLIDS
CO CO
a.
X
CO
c
z
QC
=3
ST ONCE D
^
:
«
rt
*V
•g
CD
U
-------
Section 17
Revision 1
Date: 6/9/93
Page 4 of 16
17.2 Benthic Species Composition and Biomass Samples
Samples for benthic community analyses are preserved in formalin in the field.
These samples are in plastic containers with tight fitting screw-top lids. As these
samples are preserved, there is no need to keep them cool. These samples need not
be shipped daily, however, they must be shipped at least once during a shift,
preferably on the last day. These boxes should not weigh more than 50 pounds. The
lid of each jar should be checked to assure that it is tight, and the lid taped with
sealing tape. The bar code label of each container is then read and the samples. .
placed in an insulated shipping box. The insulation is for protection rather than
thermal regulation. As described above, a computer printout of the sample numbers
included in this shipment is enclosed in the box. To assure blind processing of the
samples, no additional information is provided to the analytical laboratory.
The box is then sealed and an appropriate shipping label affixed. Be sure to
pack all bottles upright, and to fill gaps with packing material. Benthic biology
samples should be shipped Federal Express Standard Overnight, or Second Day.
Overnight delivery is not required. Samples should be shipped to:
EMAP Sample Processing
Versar, Inc.
9200 Rumsey Road
Columbia, MD 21045
(301) 964-9200
Attention: Lisa Scott
As this shipment contains formalin, Federal Express requires that the
appropriate boxes indicating dangerous goods be checked on the airbill. In addition,
a Dangerous Goods Airbill and Shipper Certification form must be completed. This is
available from the Agent picking up the shipment. See the instructions for shipping
Formaldehyde solution included below.
-------
Section 17
Revision 1
Date: 6/9/93
Pago 5 of 16
Instructions for Shipping Samples with Formaldehyde Solution:
Benthic Biology Samples, Pathology Samples, Taxon QA Samples
A. Dangerous Goods Waybill - See Example
Top Half of Waybill
1. Sender's Section: Fill in the Date and Your Name, confirm the
sender's account number (0029-0901-4), the URI address, phone
number and internal billing reference number (5-30875).
2. Confirm the recipient's shipping address and phone number.
3. Payment Section: Confirm that Bill Sender Box (#1) is checked.
4. Services Section: Check Standard Overnight Box, leave Freight
Service and Instructions sections blank.
Delivery and Special Handling Section: Check Dangerous Goods
Box. Check Deliver Weekday. Fill in the weight of each package
and the total number of packages and total weight of the
shipment.
-------
Bottom Half of Waybill
Section 17
Revision 1
Date: 6/9/93
Page 6 oM6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Shipper's Certification: Check the IATA/ICAQ Box
Proper Shipping Name: Formaldehyde Solution
Class or Division: 8
UN or ID No.: UN-2209
Subsidiary Risk: Leave Blank
Quantity and Type of Packing:
(1) Fiberboard Box x
(1) Fiberboard Box x
liters of Formaldehyde
liters of Formaldehyde
(NOTE: Each liter sample jar contains approximately 0.1 liters of
formaldehyde solution; therefore, if you are shipping 20 sample
jars in two shipping boxes: one box containing 12 sample jars and
the other containing 8 sample jars, you should fill in this section as
follows:
(1) Fiberboard Box x 1.2 liters of Formaldehyde soln.
(1) Fiberboard Box x 0.8 Kg of Formaldehyde soln.
Packing Inst: (for up to 5 liters) : 818 III
Authorization: Leave Blank
Additional handling Information: Leave blank
Transport details: Cross out Cargo Aircraft Only
Shipment Type: Cross out Radioactive
Declaration: Fill in: Your Name and Title. Place and Date of
shipment. Emergency Telephone Number (1-800-732-2305). and
Your Signature
-------
Soction 17
Revision t
Date: 6/9/93
Page 7 of 16
B. Proper Labeling of Shipping Boxes containing Samples with
Formaldehyde Solution:
Benthic Biology Samples, Pathology Samples, Taxon QA Samples
1. Mark (or use labels) on all 4 sides and top of box: THIS SIDE UP
2. Stick Number 8 placard label so that clearly visible on side
of. box
Mark the following on at least two opposing sides of box:
Formaldehyde Solution
UN 2209
Emergency phone:
1 (800) 732-2305
4. Be sure that each box has an Address Label with the URI
address.
5. Be sure that each box has an Address Label with the correct
address of the receiving facility.
-------
Section 17
Revision 1
Date: 6/9/93
Page 8 of 16
For Benthic Biology:
EMAP Sample Processing
Versar, Inc.
9200 Rumsey Road
Columbia, MD 21045
Attention: Lisa Scott
(410) 964-9200
For Pathology:
EMAP Sample Processing
U.S. EPA ERL-N
27 Tarzwell Drive
Narragansett, Rl 02882
Attention: George Gardner
(401) 782-3000
For Taxon QA:
EMAP Sample Processing
U.S. EPA ERL-N
27 Tarzwell Drive
Narragansett Rl, 02882
Attention: Charlie Strobel
(401) 782-3000
-------
Section 17
Revision 1
Date: 6/9/93
Page 9 of 16
17.3 Sediment Chemistry and AVS Samples
Following collection, sediment samples for organics and metals chemical
characterization should be refrigerated rather than frozen because freezing greatly
increases the likelihood of breakage of the glass container. It is also recommended
that samples be shipped cool, but not frozen, for the same reason.
Sediment chemistry samples should be shipped as soon as possible,
preferably on the day following collection. Weekend samples can be stored until the
following Monday, providing they are properly stored. Sample bottles should be
wrapped in bubble wrap to protect them from breakage, and sealed in a plastic zip
lock bag. They should then be placed in an insulated box with an appropriate amount
of blue ice. Chemistry "blanks" should be treated in the same manner.
Sediment AVS samples should be refrigerated immediately and shipped as
soon as possible. Weekend samples can be stored until the following Monday,
providing they are properly stored. Sample bottles should be packaged in zip lock
bags and placed in an insulated box with an appropriate amount of blue ice. These
samples should be well chilled at the time of shipping.
Sediment chemistry samples, AVS samples, duplicates and blanks must be
shipped Federal Express Next Day Service. Samples should be shipped to:
EMAP Sample Processing
U.S. EPA Research Containment Facility
26 West Martin Luther King Drive
Cincinnati, OH 45268
(513) 569-7286
ATTN: NateMalof
Samples shipped for chemical analysis by a referee laboratory should be
shipped to:.
EMAP Sample Processing
U.S. EPA Environmental Research Laboratory
27 Tarzwell Drive
Narragansett, Rl 02882
(401) 782-3000
ATTN: Rich Pruell
-------
Section 17
Revision 1
Date: 6/9/93
Page 10 of 16
17.4 Sediment Toxicity Samples
Sediment samples collected for sediment toxicity testing must be kept
refrigerated (4°C), NOT FROZEN. Sample should be shipped at least twice per shift.
Samples collected on weekends can be shipped on the following Monday, providing
they are properly stored in the mobile lab. Containers are then placed upright, along
with an appropriate amount of blue ice, in an insulated box.
Sediment toxicity samples are shipped Federal Express Next Day Service to:
EMAP Sample Processing
SAIC Environmental Testing Center
165 Dean Knauss Drive
Narragansett, Rl 02882
(401) 782-1900
ATTN: Cornelia Mueller
17.5 Total Suspended Solids Samples
Total suspended solids samples are 625 ml water samples stored on ice.
These samples must be shipped as soon as possible for filtration in the laboratory.
The data generated by the analysis of these samples are needed to interpret the CTD
data. For shipment, the samples packaged in plastic zip lock bags and placed in a
small, insulated box along with blue ice and shipped Federal Express Next Day
Service to:
EMAP Sample Processing
Marine Ecosystem Research Laboratory
Graduate School of Oceanography
South Ferry Road
Narragansett, R! 02882-1197
(401) 792-6132
ATTN: Steve Kelly
-------
Section 17
Revision 1
Date: 6/9/93
Page It of 16
17.6 Grain Size Samples
Samples for grain size analysis are collected along with each sample collected
for benthic biology and sediment chemistry/toxicity analyses. Samples for grain size
analysis should be kept cool (4°C), but not frozen. They should therefore be stored in
the mobile lab on ice. These samples are contained in Whirl Packs and sealed with
metal wraps. Tape should be placed around the ends of these wraps at the time of
collection to prevent the metal tips from piercing one of the other bags. At a
minimum, they should be shipped twice during a six-day shift. Whirl Packs should be
placed in a ziplock bag and packed into an insulated box or cooler with an
appropriate amount of frozen blue ice to keep the samples cool (place a thin layer of
paper between the blue ice and the Whirl Packs to keep them from freezing.
Samples should be shipped Federal Express, Next Day Service. Samples
collected on weekends can be shipped on the following Monday as long as they are
properly stored in the mobile lab over the weekend. Samples should be shipped to:
EMAP Sample Processing
U.S. EPA Environmental Research Laboratory
27 Tarzwell Drive
Narragansett, Rl 02882
(401) 782-3000
ATTN: Darryl Keith
-------
Section 17
Revision 1
Date: 6/9/93
Page 12 of 16
17.7 Chlorophyll Samples
Water samples for chlorophyll must be filtered with in 12 hours of collection.
Filters should be thoroughly dried, folded in aluminum foil, and sealed in a whirl pack
and placed so that they are surrounded in dry ice. Samples should be shipped
weekly (monday through thursday) on dry ice.
Instructions for Shipping with Dry Ice:
A. Use Regular Airbill - See Example
1. Sender's Section: Fill in the Date and Your Name, confirm the
sender's account number (0029-0901-4), the URI address, phone
number and internal billing reference number (5-30875).
2. Confirm the recipient's name, shipping address and phone
number
3. Payment Section: Confirm that Bill Sender Box (#1) is checked
4. Services Section: Check Priority Overnight Box /vour packaging.
leave Freight Service and Instructions sections blank
Delivery and Special Handling Section: Check Dry ice Box and
Fill in the total weight of drv ice for the shipment.
Some where on the airbill (possibly In box #3) you need
print the following:
Dry ice, 9, UN 1845, box X Kg , 904 HI
Dangerous goods - Shipper's declaration not
required
Note: print the weight of the dry ice in Kg, not the box!
to
-------
Section 17
Revision 1
Date: 6/9/93
Page 13 of 16
B. Proper Labeling of Shipping Boxes containing Dry Ice
1. Stick Number 9 placard label so that clearly visible on side of box
On the same side of the box the following
information must be printed:
Dry Ice, 9, UN 1845, box X _ Kg , 904 III
Dangerous goods - Shipper's declaration not
required
Note: print the weight of the dry ice in Kg, not the box!
3. Be sure that each box has an Address Label with
the URI address.
4. Be sure that each box has an Address Label with the correct
address of the receiving facility.
Samples should be shipped Federal Express, Next Day Service. Samples
collected on weekends can be shipped on the following Monday as long as they are
properly stored in the mobile lab over the weekend. Samples should be shipped to:
EMAP Sample Processing
Marine Ecosystem Research Laboratory
Graduate School of Oceanography
South Ferry Road
Narragansett, Rl 02882-1197
(401) 792-6132
ATTN: Steve Kelly
-------
Section 17
Revision 1
Date: 6/9/93
Page 14 of 16
17.6 Fish Pathology, SMA and Pathology QA Samples
Fish samples retained for pathological and histopathological examination are
kept preserved in Dietrich's fixative. It is therefore not necessary to ship fish samples
daily, however, tissues do deteriorate in the fixative. Therefore, fish histopathology
samples must be shipped AT LEAST WEEKLY, preferably on the last day of the crew's
shift.
Fish for histopathological examination are wrapped in cheese cloth saturated in
Dietrich's fixative, and placed in a zip-lock bag. Bags should be checked to assure a
proper seal, to prevent leakage. Details can be found in Section 16. Fish are placed
in an insulated box (the insulation is for protection, not thermal regulation), and
shipped Federal Express, Standard Second Day Service to:
EMAP Sample Processing
U.S. EPA Environmental Research Laboratory
27 Tarzwell Drive
Narragansett, Rl 02882
(401) 782-3000
ATTN: George Gardner
As this shipment contains formalin, Federal Express requires that the
appropriate boxes indicating dangerous goods be checked on the airbill. In addition,
a Dangerous Goods Airbill and Shipper Certification form must be completed. This
shipment also requires a class 8 placard and an emergency phone number to be
placed on the side of the box. Use the same shipping instructions outlined for the
Benthic Biology Samples above.
-------
Section 17
Revision 1
Date: 6/9/93
Page 15 ol 16
17.7 Fish QA Samples
Fish samples retained for taxonomic verification are kept preserved in 10%
formalin. It is therefore not necessary to ship fish samples daily, however, tissues do
deteriorate in the fixative. Therefore, samples must be shipped AT LEAST WEEKLY,
preferably on the last day of the crews shift.
Fish are wrapped in cheese cloth saturated in 10% formalin, and placed in a
zip-lock bag. Bags should be checked to assure a proper seal, to prevent leakage.
Fish are placed in an insulated box (the insulation is for protection, not thermal
regulation), and shipped Federal Express. Use the same shipping instructions
outlined for the Benthic Biology Samples above.
Samples are shipped to:
EMAP Sample Processing
U.S. EPA Environmental Research Laboratory
27 Tarzwell Drive
Narragansett, Rl 02882
(401) 782-3000
ATTN: Charlie Strobel
-------
Section 17
Revision 1
Date: 6/9/93
Page 16oM6
17.8 Field Computer Diskettes and Data Sheets
All data and field notes are entered into the field computer daily. This
information is electronically transferred to the ERL-N VAX, and stored both on the
computer's hard drive and on a diskette. These diskettes serve as a back-up of the
data set. Since modern communications frequently are not possible, diskettes must
be shipped to the FOG daily.
All diskettes are placed in diskette mailers, and then into Fed Ex letter
envelopes, and the envelope delivered to Fed Ex. The outside of the envelope should
be clearly marked COMPUTER DISKETTES - DO NOT BEND, X-RAY, OR EXPOSE
TO MAGNETIC FIELDS.
Data sheets should be xerox copied and shipped at least once a week. NO
DATA SHEETS SHOULD EVER BE SHIPPED WITHOUT BEING COPIED FIRSTI
Diskettes and Data Sheets are shipped to:
EMAP Field Operations Center
U.S. EPA Environmental Research Laboratory
27 Tarzwell Drive
Narragansett, Ri 02882
(401)782-3000
ATTN: Elise Petrocelli
-------
Section 18
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 1 of 2
SECTION 18
CONTINGENCY PLANS
It is recognized that any field program will be affected by factors outside the
control of the sampling crews. Weather, equipment failure, errors in designating
station locations, accidents, Coast Guard regulations, etc. can all prevent the field
crews from obtaining samples at one or more stations. It is therefore necessary that a
set of contingency plans be in place prior to the start of field operations. These
options are described below. .It is the responsibility of the Crew Chief or Pilot to
determine if a station is indeed not able to be sampled, and determine the proper
action as described in the protocol herein. If there is any question as to the protocol
to follow, the FC should be contacted immediately.
18.1 Adverse Weather Conditions
It is the responsibility of the Crew Chief or Pilot to determine if weather
conditions are bad enough to prevent sampling. The Crew Chief should evaluate all
alternatives, such as changing the sampling plan to more protected areas and return
to the prescribed schedule when the weather improves. Every attempt should be ...
made to not waste an entire day; however, THE SAFETY OF THE CREW IS THE
CREW CHIEF'S/PILOTS'S NUMBER ONE PRIORITY. Any deviations from the
prescribed sampling plan should be reported to the FC BEFORE THE BOAT LEAVES
THE DOCK. Several states require that the appropriate state permitting agency be
notified when the field crew will be sampling at specific stations. Changes must be
reported to them by the FC prior to the crew sampling that site.
Because of the sampling schedule, careful planning by the Crew Chief/Pilot is
critical. Predictions of inclement weather may necessitate a schedule change for a
particular window. Likewise, visits to stations may be delayed because of weather.
The manner in which sampling occurs during a window is up to the discretion of the
Chief Scientist, leaving several possible avenues for dealing with poor weather.
18.2 Station Inaccessibility
Stations can be inaccessible for a number of reasons: they were incorrectly
positioned on land or in water too shallow for the boat or they may be made
inaccessible during sampling due to unforeseen circumstances such as a Coast
Guard perimeter around an accident or oil spill. In any of these cases, the following
rules should be followed:
-------
Section 18
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 2 of 2
Any inaccessible station located in a "Large Estuary" (see Appendix A)
cannot be relocated by the field crew. If the site is deemed
unsamplable, the FC should be notified and the crew should move on to
the next station.
Any inaccessible "Tidal River" station (see Appendix A) can be relocated.
The crew will move towards the river "spine" along a transect
perpendicular to that spine. Attempts to relocate the station will be made
at 10-meter intervals along that transect. The new coordinates must be
recorded and the FC notified as soon as possible. If the station cannot
be relocated, the FC should be notified and will advise the crew as to
what to do.
Inaccessible stations located in "Small Estuaries" (see Appendix A) can
be relocated by the Chief Scientist. Attempts should be made to
relocate the station 25 meters east, then west, north, and south. If still
inaccessible, repeat at 50 meters. If an accessible location is still not
found, the station can be relocated anywhere within the system, provided
the location is representative of the conditions in that system (i.e. not
near the end of an outfall pipe). If the station is successfully relocated,
the new coordinates should be recorded, a note made in the computer
log, and the FC notified.
18.3 Equipment Failure
Contingency plans for failure of individual pieces of sampling gear are
discussed in the sections describing the operation of the particular gear.
In the event that the boat's engine fails while the crew is on the water, an
attempt should be made to repair the engine. As soon as the engine fails, the FC
must be notified IMMEDIATELY. Arrangements will be made to transport a spare
engine to the crew before sampling begins on the following day.
If another critical piece of equipment (hydraulic winch, trailer, pickup truck) fails,
the crew should attempt to repair it. If this is not possible, the FC should be notified
IMMEDIATELY so arrangements can be made to deliver the back-up equipment.
-------
Section 19
Revision 0
Date: 6/3/93
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 19
MAINTENANCE
The importance of proper maintenance of all gear cannot be over emphasized.
Failure of any piece of major equipment could result in a significant loss of data.
Maintenance of equipment should be performed as described below. It will be the
responsibility of the Team Leader to maintain a record of equipment usage, and
assure that proper maintenance is performed at the prescribed time intervals.
Crew Chiefs and Pilots are required to maintain a maintenance log. At the end
of every shift they will report boat engine hours, truck mileage and maintenance
performed on the vehicles and equipment to the FC.
19.1 GRiD Computers
The GRiD computers used on the boat and in the mobile laboratory are
designed to be rugged; however, they should be treated AS GENTLY AS POSSIBLE.
A wiring harness has been installed on each computer to eliminate the need to use
the DB-9 connectors on the back of the computer. All serial connections should be
made through the wiring harness. The computer should always be protected from
salt water, and the keyboard skin MUST always be in-place.
19.2 Sea-BirdCTD
The Sea-Bird CTD should require only minimal maintenance. The unit should
be rinsed with fresh water at least daily. Whenever it is not in use, the conductivity
probe should be covered with Dl water. This is accomplished by filling the hose from
the pump to the conductivity cell with Dl. The DO probe must also be in a moist
environment. Water in the above line should also keep the DO probe conditioned.
19.4 Boats, Motors and Vehicles
Maintenance schedules are described below:
-------
-------
MAINTENANCE SUPPLY SPECIFICATIONS
*«SB5WS»M»»*S*W*SSS'SSS*^^
SUPPLY
JAN LUBE OIL
tIGGS LUBE OIL
1UCK and LAB LUBE OIL
WER UNIT OIL
EER1NG UNIT (SEASTAR) OIL
fO CYCLE OUTBOARD OIL
EL CONDITIONER
JTBOARD MOTOR GREASE
AILER WHEEL GREASE
IECTOR TUNER
SPECIFICATION
10 W 40 High Detergent Mobil 1
30 Weight Summer Mobli 1 10 W 30-Be!ow 40° F
10 W 30 Mobil 1 - Check Owners Manual
OMC High Viscosity Gearcase Lube-90 Weight
Seastar Hydraulic Oil or Any Textron IIATF Fluid
OMC Outboard Lubricant ONLY!!!!!
OMC 2 + 4 Fuel Conditioner
OMC Triple Guard Grease
OMC Wheel Bearing Grease or High Speed
Bearing Grease
OMC Tuner
WER TILT-TRIM FLUID
OMC Power Tilt-trim Fluid
SPARK PLUGS
Champion 77JC4 (Torque 18-20 ft. IDS.)
IAN SPARK PLUGS
IGGS SPARK PLUGS
NGK BPR6HS or equivalent
Champion J19LM or equivalent
UCK TIRE PRESSURE
Check Tires
AILER TIRE PRESSURE
Check Tires
AILER BRAKE RESIVOiR
DOTS or DOT4 Brake Ffuid
TIRE PRESSURE
Check Tires
-------
O
-------
EQUIPMENT REPAIR/RETURN FORM
VIRGINIAN PROVINCE
RETURN THIS FORM WITH THE EQUIPMENT.
INCLUDE THIS INFORMATION ON THE DAILY PHONE LOG.
IEW#
CREW CHIEF
0"E (MMDDYY)
'PE OF EQUIPMENT:
;RIAL #:
FOR REPAIR/RETURN:
BARCODE #:
>DITIONAL COMMENTS:
RM COMPLETED BY:
>-NC VIRGINIAN PROVINCE REPA1R.FHM
ER
-------
WEEKLY MAINTENANCE REPORT
VIRGINIAN PROVINCE
THIS FORM SHOULD BE COMPLETED AT THE END OF EVERY SHIFT AND WHEN ANY OFTHE BOATS,
MOBILE LABS, TRUCKS, OR BOAT TRAILERS ARE TRANSFERRED AMONG CHEWS. RETURN THIS
CREW*
| CREW CHIEF
DATE COMPLETED (MMDDYY)
i
BOATNAME
ENGINE HOURS PORT:
STARBOARD:
MOBILE LAB LICENSE*
MILEAGE
TRUCK LICENSE*
MILEAGE
BOATTRAILER LICENSE *
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED THIS SHIFT
COMMENTS/PROBLEMS (Include scheduled maintenance that was not performed)
FORM COMPLETED BY(SIGNATURE):
EPA-eMAP-NC VIRGINIAN PROVINCE MAINTAIN. FHM
-------
Section 20
Revision 0
Dot*: 6/9/93
Pago t of 9
SECTION 20
QUALITY ASSURANCE
EMAP-VP field crews are responsible for collecting a wide variety of data and
samples to be used in the fulfillment of the Program's objectives. To meet these
objectives, the Program's assessments of ecosystem health must be based on
scientifically sound interpretations of the data collected. This, in turn, can only be
accomplished if all participants strictly adhere to prescribed methods and quality
assurance concerns. Since the field crews are the nodes from which all analyses
begin, it is critical that field personnel pay close attention to the methods and
concerns outlined in this document.
20.1 Data Quality Objectives
To achieve the goals of EMAP, and as required by EPA for all monitoring and
measurement programs, objectives must be established for data quality based on the
proposed uses of the data (Stanley and Vemer, 1985). Data Quality Objectives
(DQOs) are described in detail in the Quality Assurance Project Plan (Valente et al.,
1992) and will only be briefly discussed here. DQOs are generally established for five
aspects of data quality: representativeness, completeness, comparability, accuracy,
and precision. It is important to note that the actions taken by field personnel can
affect all five aspects of data quality.
20.1,1 Representativeness
Representativeness is defined as "the degree to which the data accurately and
precisely represent a characteristic of a population parameter, variation of a property,
a process characteristic, or an operational condition" (Stanley and Vemer, 1985).
Representativeness, as it applies to field operations, can be categorized into two tiers:
the representativeness of a station relative to the system or cell within which it is
located, and the representativeness of samples or data collected relative to that site.
Station location and the overall design were formulated to assure that the samples
collected were representative of the conditions within the province. Because of the
importance of design, crews must accurately locate stations and assure that
appropriate steps are taken to relocate a station when it is inaccessible. Once a
station is properly located, crews must take ail precautions to assure that the samples
and data collected are representative of conditions at that station. For example, a.
sediment chemistry sample contaminated by exhaust from the Briggs and Stratton
engine is no longer representative of the sediments at that site.
-------
Section 20
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 2 of 9
20.1.2 Completeness
Completeness is defined as "a measure of the amount of data collected from a
measurement process compared to the amount that was expected to be obtained
under the conditions of measurement1 (Stanley and Verner, 1985). In designing the
sampling program the minimum number of sample points required for an assessment
of the status and for the determination trends within the province was balanced
against costs. As a result, a completeness goal of 90% was established. This means
that 90% of the expected data MUST be collected to make a meaningful assessment.
20.1.3 Comparability
Comparability is defined as "the confidence with which one data set can be
compared to another" (Stanley and Verner, 1985). The extensive documentation of
methods found in EMAP manuals reflects the importance of comparability. The
manner in which data and samples are collected directly impacts their comparability
with EMAP data collected in other provinces, therefore, field crews must pay careful
attention to following the methods described in this manual.
20.1.4 Accuracy and precision
Accuracy is defined as the difference between a measured value and the true
or expected value and represents an estimate of systematic error or net bias.
Precision is defined as the degree of mutual agreement among individuals
measurements and represents an estimate of random error. Collectively these two
aspects provide an estimate of the total error or uncertainty associated with individual
measurements. In the context of many of the measurements made, accuracy cannot
be defined because expected or true values do not exist. Once again, careful
attention to the details of the sampling methods should provide accurate, precise data.
20.2 Quality Assurance Procedures
The EMAP-VP QA/QC program includes procedures that must be followed for
virtually every aspect of data and sample collection and analysis. Those pertinent to
field operations are outlined below. Each crew will be required to demonstrate
proficiency in all aspects of field operations prior to the start of the data collection
phase. This will consist of an examination at the end of training and field audits during
dry runs. In addition, the QA Coordinator or Field Coordinator will visit each crew at
least once during field operations to assure compliance with the prescribed
methodology. All components of sampling wilt be evaluated during visits.
-------
Section 20
Revision 0
Dote: 6/9/93
Pago 3 of 9
20.2.) Station Location
Despite the sophisticated electronic navigation instalments available on-board
the EMAP vessels, crews must still take great care in locating stations. The most
important step in assuring accuracy is the calibration of the computer system as
described in Section 11. Calibrations must be done carefully, making sure that the
known coordinates at the calibration location are correct, and that the calibration
location is as close to the station as possible. Calibration factors are valid only for
relatively short distances. Using property calibrated Loran, the geodetic accuracy of
the computer navigation system should be less than 50 meters.
A navigation log datasheet must be completed for each station. Included is
information on both the station and the calibration site. Locationai information from all
instruments, as well as ranges and bearings, must be recorded on this data sheet.
For consistency, all bearings (taken using a hand-held compass) should be obtained
with the crew member standing on the aluminum deck plate. This datasheet should
be returned to the FOC with ail other datasheets, and will be used by the data
management staff as a reference in case any station location is called into question.
When locating a station, the crew should attempt to drop the anchor as close
to the expected station location as possible (i.e. ± 1 second). However, even more
important than reaching the exact locations expected is being able to accurately report
where the sampling actually occured.
Because some of the station types cannot be moved, and those that can be
must be moved according to strict guidelines, an automated check of station location
will be instituted by the ERL-N VAX computer as soon as data are uploaded. If the
location of a station is questionable, a flag will be raised and the QA Coordinator
notified the following morning.
During the field reviews the QA Coordinator will check each crew's navigation
procedures to assure that they comply with those mandated by the Program.
20.2.2 Dissolved Oxygen - .
Determination of dissolved oxygen levels is one of the most critical
measurements being made on the boat The primary devices for obtaining these data
are the SeaBird CTD and the YS1 D.O. meter. Great care must be paid to the
methodologies described in this manual to assure accurate measurements. It is
especially important that the CTD not be allowed to hit the bottom during descent.
Past experience with this unit has revealed that impacting the bottom may result in
-------
S«ctlon20
Revision 0
Dot*: 6/9/93
Page 4 of 9
sediment being pulled up into the pumping system, thereby dogging it and producing
erroneous results. Another concern is making sure that no air bubbles are trapped in
the oxygen sensor. Bubbles in the sensor will result in an irregular profile.
Dissolved oxygen and pH sensors on the CIO are calibrated under controlled
laboratory conditions by trained technicians following the procedures described in the
SeaBird manual. Calibrations are conducted prior to the field sampling and as
needed throughout the field season. The dissolved oxygen and pH sensors are
checked for accuracy using Winkler titrations and pH standards, respectively, and
fluorescence offsets are determined by comparison with a laboratory fluorcmeter
using single-species algal cultures of known concentrations. Temperature,
conductivity, light transmission, and photosyntheticafly active radiation sensors are
calibrated by the manufacturer.
Because of the controlled conditions required for calibration of this instrument,
this activity cannot be performed in the field by the crews. Crews are required to
perform QC checks of the instrument If a CTD fails a check it should be returned to
the FOG for recalibration.
The proper field QA protocols for dissolved oxygen are listed below:
1. A QC check on the CTD must be performed once during each crew's shift
The unit is hung over the side of the boat and the readings are compared with
those from a calibrated YSI meter for dissolved oxygen, thermometer for
temperature, and refractometer for salinity. Back on the boat the pH probe is
immersed in a pH 10 solution and the instrument reading recorded. The
maximum acceptable differences between the CTD and reference : /•
measurements are 2 °C temperature, 3 ppt salinity, 0.5 mg/1 dissolved oxygen,
and 0.5 pH units. Exceedence of any of these tolerances should result in re-
testing, and, if the unit still fails, it should be returned to the FOC for
recalibration. •.-'•$"•
2, Once per shift (when the CTD is calibrated), a check on the YSI air .*•
calibration method is required. A bucket of seawater should be obtained and
aerated for AT LEAST 2 HOURS. This should bring the water to saturation^ ;
The D.O. concentration (at full saturation) should be obtained from the
saturation table provided. The YSI should then be air calibrated according to
the manufacturers instructions, and the D.O. of the saturated water determined
by the instrument In addition, three (3) samples for Winkler titration must be
taken from the bucket and titrated according to the instructions in Appendix D.
Titrate 2 samples and if they are significantly different, titrate the third. All
-------
Section 20
ReviaionO
Date: 6/9/93
Page 5 of 9
values (table, Winkler, YSI) should agree to within 0.3 mg/l. Exceedence should
result in repeating all steps a second time. If, after a second attempt, the YSI
meter is still off by >. 0.3 mg/l, arrangements should be made for its
replacement. If the difference is greater than 0.5 mg/l, the meter should not be
used, and it should be returned to the FOG for repair.
NOTE: It is important to note that the chemicals used for the Hach titrations
are sensitive. Cartridges of sodium thiosulfate, which is a tight sensitive
solution, must be kept in the dark when not in use. The standard
solution of iodate-iodide used to check the accuracy of the hach
titrations is subject to evaporation and heat The solution should be kept
in a dark container and cool.
3. Proper procedures must be followed when obtaining a Winkler sample. This
includes inserting the siphon tube at least 2/3 of the way down into the BOO
bottle and allowing three volumes of water to overflow. Because of the small
volumes of titrant (sodium thiosulfate) used by the Hach method, it is critical
that the person performing the titration be very careful during ail steps.
"Sloppy titration of the sample will most likely produce results outside of the
acceptable range. Because the concentration of the titrant may vary between
cartridges, and each titrator may deliver slightly different amounts per "click11, an
"F factor" must be determined prior to each set of titrations.
4. Immediately prior to use at each station, the YSI meter is "air calibrated"
according to the manufacturers instructions.
5. Proper procedures must be followed when obtaining a cast This includes
obtaining proper surface and bottom measurements using the YSI meter. If
either the surface or bottom measurements from the two instruments differ by
>. 0.5 mg/l, the cast should be repeated (including recalibration of the YSI). If
they consistently differ by >. 0.3 mg/l, the FOC should be notified and a
replacement CTD will be shipped to the crew. Temperature and salinity must
also be checked with a thermometer and refractometer respectively, and any
differences must fail within the tolerances listed in "1" above.
6. All necessary maintenance requirements must be adhered to. This includes
proper replacement of the membrane on the YSI probe and allowing the
membrane to relax prior to calibration.
-------
Section 20
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 6 of 9
20.2.3 Benthic Biology
Field crews are responsible for obtaining acceptable grab samples, sieving
them on-board, and preserving the material retained on the sieve. First, they must be
assure that all grabs processed are indeed acceptable according to the criteria
described in Section 13. Second, they must make sure that no organisms are lost
during any step, including transferring the sample to the sieve, and during sieving.
Third, samples must be properly identified and preserved to assure they are received
by the processing laboratory in acceptable condition.
20.2.4 Grain Size
Samples collected for grain size analysis require no special QA steps other than
carefully following the directions in Section 15 and assuring proper storage.
20.2.5 Sediment Chemistry
Great care must be exercised when processing sediment samples collected for
chemical analysis. Contamination of these samples can result in erroneous data,
which can compromise the Program's ability to detect trends in the level of sediment
contamination. The following steps MUST be taken to avoid contamination of the
sample:
1. ALL utensils, bowls, grabs, etc. that come in contact with the sample must
be washed with alconox prior to the collection of the first grab. Once washed,
crews must take precautions to assure that they do not become contaminated
(e.g. by laying the stainless steel spoon on the deck).
2. Only those utensils provided or approved should contact the sediments.
Therefore, if additional mixing spoons are required they should NOT be
obtained at the local supermarket
3. As soon as any of the stainless spoons or bowls begin to rust they should
be discarded.
4. Both the Briggs and Stratton and the outboard engines should be turned
OFF whenever the sample is exposed to the air. Their exhausts carry high
levels of contaminants which can be deposited on the sample. Sample
collection onboard larger vessels will be particularly sucecptable to "fall out*
from the exhaust stacks. Care should be taken to keep the stacks down wind
of the sampling deck. In addition, a plastic tarp should be used to cover every
-------
Section 20
Revision 0
Dot*: 6/9/93
Pago 7 of 9
grab while remaining on deck (before and after sample extrusion). Whenever
there is insufficient breeze to assure all exhaust fumes, and stack fall-out, are
kept away rom the work platform, a blank bottle should be opened next to the
homogenate when the sediment is exposed.
5. Exposure of the sample to the atmosphere should be minimized. Whenever
possible the sample should be covered because contamination from the
atmosphere, even without the engines running, can be significant.
6. Rain water should not be allowed to contaminate the sample.
7. Excess seawater should be carefully drained from the surface of the grab by
"cracking" the sampler slightly,
8. All grabs used in the composite must meet the criteria for an acceptable
grab. It is especially important to make sure that the surface sediments did not
wash out of the sampler.
9. Crews should be careful in removing the surficial layer, keeping as close to
the two centimeter (2 cm) mark as possible.
10. Replicates and blanks should be collected as directed. Blanks consist of
leaving an empty chemistry jar open to the atmosphere whenever the sample is
exposed to the air.
11. Because of the potential for contamination, the chemistry samples should
be the first ones removed from the homogenate.
12. Samples should be placed in a cooler on ice as soon as they are collected
and recorded.
13. If the vessel is unable to anchor the position relative to station should be
monitored carefully during benthic collection. A fix should be collected for
every grab by the Navigation system at the operator's request
20.2.6 -AVS (Acid Volatile Suffides)
TTie concentration of AVS in sediments is affected by the oxidation state of
those sediments. Therefore, it is important that sediments retained for analysis of AVS
be kept as close to nominal conditions as possible. This means minimizing the
aeration of those sediments. Cores should be removed from each chemistry grab as
-------
Section 20
Revision 0
Page 8 of 9
soon as the grab is determined to be acceptable, placed in the appropn'ate container,
and placed on ice. Fill to the top of the threads and chill as soon as possible.
Because the AVS core is taken from grabs to be used in the chemistry homogenate,
contamination of the grab sample is a concern. Great care must be taken to assure
that the core devise does not become contaminated between grabs. As with all other
utensils the core devise must be cleaned before each station.
20.2.7 Sediment Toxicfty
Since sediment toxicrty samples are collected from the same homogenate used
for sediment chemistry, the steps outlined above should be followed. In addition,
because of the possibility of failure of a toxicity test, it is important that a full 3 £ of
sediment be collected for analysis at each station. This will provide a sufficient volume
of sediment for re-testing if necessary.
20.2.8 Fish Community Structure
All fish collected during field operations will be identified and measured. Only
those crew members skilled in fish taxonomy should be responsible for the
identification of species. The quality of identifications will be assured through rigorous
training and testing prior to the start of field operations. Each crew must contain at
least one member who possesses taxonomic expertise who will have the final say on
all field identifications. As a check on the crew's ability to accurately identify fish, the
first two individuals of each species collected by each crew will be preserved and
shipped to ERL-N for verification by a qualified fish taxonomist Erroneous
identifications will be brought to the crew's attention prior to their next duty cycle.
'•'•'"
Length measurements should be made as carefully as possible, .with the crew
chief periodically re-measuring some fish. During field QA visits the accuracy of
measurements will be checked. All measurements should agree to within ± 5 mm.
20.2.9 Fish Pathology
The percent fish exhibiting signs of gross external pathology will be determined
from field observations. As a check on each crew's ability to identify pathologies, any
fish identified as having an external pathology will be sent to ERL-N for confirmation
by an expert. In addition to these fish, all crews are required to preserve and ship
SMA (spleen macrophage aggregate) and pathology QA fish which will be collected at
selected stations. All of these fish will be examined by a qualified pathologist to
-------
Section 20
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 9 of 9
determine the rate of "false negatives" (number of pathologies missed by the field
crews).
Because the number of fish exhibiting external pathologies is expected to be
small, and only a limited number of "QA" fish will be collected, it is critical that the crew
be extremely diligent in their examinations. Fish pathology has proven to be an
important indictor, but unfortunately it is one that is difficult to quality assure.
As with all other indicators, the crew's performance will be checked during QA
reviews.
20.2.10 Data Entry
Needless to say, proper recording is critical in assuring data of the quality
required for the EMAP assessment. A sophisticated field computer, system has been
designed to assist in assuring that all data received by the data management team are
correct, however, for this system to work properly it is important that crew members
be very careful in their entry of information.
The final back-up against which all computer data sets will be compared is the
data sheets. Crew members must make sure that all data sheets are correctly,
completely, and LEGIBLY filled out. If the information on the data sheet is incorrect
the final data used will also be incorrect. All data are transcribed from the data sheets
into the field computer by a member of the crew and then checked by that crew
member. Following entry and this first level check, IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF
THE CREW CHEF OR THE CHIEF SCIENTIST TO REVIEW THE DATA AND ISSUE
HIS/HER ASSURANCE THAT IT IS 100% CORRECT. Once the crew chief/chief
scientist has "signed off' on a dataset it will be "locked" to prevent further editing by
any crew member and uploaded to the ERL-N VAX. Once at the FOC, a number of
automatic range checks will be performed, followed by a manual check (comparison
with the datasheet).
in designing the 1992 computer system, ease of editing was a primary concern.
This significantly reduced the number of data errors last year, and we are hopeful of
an even lower rate of data errors this year.
-------
-------
Section 21
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/33
Pagal of 6
SECTION 21
FIELD DATA BASE MANAGEMENT
Management of data in the field is of paramount importance. Without proper
data management the quality of the data generated is questionable. Field data
management consists of two categories: written data sheets and electronic data.
Experience gained during the 1990 Demonstration Project and 1991 and 1992
sampling seasons demonstrated that the field computers were capable of
withstanding the rigors of boat operations. In 1993 the use of the computer system is
again MANDATORY. ALL DATA RETURNING TO THE FOG WILL BE IN ELECTRONIC
FORMAT AND QUALITY ASSURED BY THE CHIEF SCIENTIST. However, as an
added precaution, data will continue to be entered onto data sheets as well as into the
computer (example data sheets can be found in Appendix G). In general all data
except for the fish indicators will be entered directly into the on-board computer while
on-station. The use of bar code readers will facilitate the entry of sample numbers
and eliminate transcription errors. Because of the complexity, fish indicator
information will be recorded on data sheets and entered, into the computer in the
mobile laboratory.
Although it is mandatory that all data be transmitted electronically to the FOC,
the Chief Scientist has the option of using the boat computer system only for
navigation, and entering ALL data into the mobile lab computer upon returning to the
dock. If this option is exercised, IT IS HIS/HER RESPONSIBILITY TO ASSURE THE
DATA SENT TO THE FOC IS ERROR FREE, i.e. no transcription errors were made.
The on-board computer system, along with the bar code readers, have been provided
as tools to assist the field crews in providing high quality electronic data. In other
words, the use of the on-board computer system and bar code readers is highly
recommended, and it is felt that the use of this system will be a considerable time-
savings to the crews. Use of the navigation component for determining location
remains mandatory.
It is the responsibility of the Chief Scientist to guarantee the quality of the
data shipped to the FOC. At the end of each day it is his/her responsibility to review
the data collected that day and "sign-off" on it
All samples collected for the EMAP program must be tracked from their
collection to the receipt of analytical results from laboratories. In order to accomplish
the tracking of all samples collected, each sample will be assigned a unique
identification number (SAMPLEID) composed of an event number followed by a
sample number.
-------
Section 21
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 2 of 6
21.1 Sample Tracking Procedures
A variety of water, water quality, sediment, and biological samples are collected
during the EMAP-Near Coastal Virginian Province sampling effort. These include
physical samples (i.e., sediment and fish samples) and non-physical samples (i.e., fish
trawl and CTD cast data). It is vital that all of these samples and data be tracked from
collection to the receipt of analytical results. To accomplish this purpose, all samples
collected are assigned unique sample identification numbers (SAMPLElDs) composed
of a four-digit event number (used instead of the station number to maintain blind
sample analysis) and a three-digit sample number.
21.2 Event and Sample Numbers
All BSS and REP stations will be sampled once during the summer. During
each station visit a pre-determined set of samples will be collected. All of these
samples will be linked by a single event number even if more than one station visit is
required to collect the samples (i.e., if a fish trawl is not performed during the first
station visit but the station is revisited and trawled the next day).
The same suite of samples will be collected during visits to BSS/LTT stations as
are collected at BSS and REP stations. However, BSS/LTT stations will be sampled
twice during the summer and a full suite of samples will be collected during each visit.
Each suite of samples will be linked by a single event number; therefore, each
BSS/LTT station will be associated with two event numbers.
Ranges of three-digit sample numbers have been assigned to each sample
type (Table 21.1). The SAMPLEID uniquely assigned to each sample or activity will
consist of an event number concatenated with one of the sample numbers in the
appropriate pre-assigned range (except for SMA and PATH QA fish). Since
SAMPLElDs for physical samples will be barcoded, the entry of these IDs into
electronic data sets by the field crews and receiving laboratories will be fast and
accurate. Duplicate SAMPLEID barcodes will also be applied to data sheets for ease
of data entry. A sample type code will be imprinted on each barcode to make it
easier for the field crews to identify which barcode is applied to each sample and data
sheet. This sample number design will allow for the collection of extra samples (i.e., if
a sample is damaged or lost) and will provide extra, pre-assigned sample numbers in
case a SAMPLEID barcode is assigned to the wrong sample (a new barcode in the
correct range will be placed over the incorrect barcode on the sample container and
data sheet).
CTD cast SAMPLElDs will be automatically entered by the computer system.
These IDs will consist of the four-digit event number followed by "2", one digit in the
-------
Section 21
Revision Q
Date: 6/9/93
Page 3 of 6
range 1-9 indicating which field computer was used to download the cast, and one
digit in the range 0-9 as a cast number. Although only one CTD cast is required per
event, the cast number would be incremented by one for each additional cast
performed and downloaded. For example, the first cast performed at event 3120 and
downloaded on field computer number three would be automatically be assigned the
SAMPLED 3120230. CTD cast file names will consist of the cast SAMPLEID with the
extension .HEX. If no CTD cast was performed, the SAMPLEID assigned to the water
column measurements taken using the YSI meter, thermometer, and refractometer will
consist of the event number followed by "200".
If there are not enough SAMPLEID barcodes for pathology, taxon QA, SMA,or
path QA fish, valid SAMPLElDs must be assigned to these fish using the event
number and sample numbers starting with 068 and continuing up through 199. These
SAMPLElDs must be written on the fish tags using permanent marker and also must
be written on the data sheet.
Fish spleen macrophage aggregate (SMA) and pathology QA/QC (PQA)
samples will be collected at two stations per crew (four stations per team, total of 12
stations). These samples are tracked using 1000 barcoded SAMPLElDs (500 IDs per
sample type) within a dummy event: 3200. the SMA fish will be assigned
SAMPLEIDs 3200000-3200499, while PQA fish will be assigned SAMPLElDs 3200500-
3200999. The barcodes for these SAMPLElDs will be divided three ways and
distributed to the field teams in separate envelopes (about 165 barcodes for each
sample type per team). These envelopes will also contain data sheets for recording
fish data for non-standard trawls. The barcodes given to a team will be used for all
four stations sampled by that team for these fish, regardless of crew number or fish
species. This is not blind sample numbering scheme; ail fish sent to the laboratory
will be identified as PATH/TQA, SMA, or PATHQA.
Sediment QA/QC samples will be collected at one station per crew (total of 6
stations). These stations are not pre-determined; the crews will be notified of QA/QC
stations prior to a QA sampling event Sediment QA/QC samples are tracked using a
blind numbering scheme consisting of three dummy events per QA/QC station.
Barcodes for these samples will be provided in separate envelopes for each crew.
One duplicate of each sediment organic, AVS, and metals sample is collected per
dummy event for a total of nine QA/QC samples:
Dummy Event 1: SAMPLElDs for the duplicate sediment organics, AVS, and
metals samples end in the same three digits as the samples collected for the
real event (030, 033, and 036). These samples will be shipped with the QA .
blank bottle to the laboratory performing the routine sediment chemistry
analyses.
-------
Section 21
Revision 0
Data: 6/9/93
Pago 4 of 6
Dummy Events 2 and 3: Two duplicates each of the sediment organics, AVS,
and metals samples (total of six samples) will be sent to the reference
laboratory for analysis. These SAMPLEIOs will end in 031, 034, and 037,
respectively.
Envelopes containing ail data sheets and SAMPLEID barcodes necessary for
sampling each station (event envelopes) will be assembled for each field team. Since
the suites of samples collected at each station type and size class are the same, any
event envelope may be used for any station. If SMA and PQA samples will be
collected, the barcodes and data sheets provided in extra envelopes will be used in
addition to the regular event envelope. Additional event number ranges have been
assigned to sediment quality assurance/quality control (QA/QC) samples, fish
pathology QA/QC samples, and to crew training (dry run) events (Table 21.2).
21.3 Data Sheet and Diskette Tracking
Data sheets and diskettes from the crews will be tracked in the field and In the
field operation center (FOC). Diskettes will be assigned barcoded SAMPLEIDs in the
field in the same way as other physical samples. The crews will use each diskette for
two days: one day in the boat computer and one day in tha mobile lab computer.
The diskettes will be shipped overnight to the FOC after ail data on that diskette are
verified against the data sheets by the field crews. Field data sheets for each event
will also be shipped overnight to the FOC once all of the data for that event have been
entered and verified. Any data sheet shipped must be photocopied prior to shipping.
The diskettes and data sheets will be shipped separately to ensure that if either
shipment is lost the field data will still arrive at the FOC.
-------
Section 21
Revision 0
Data: 6/9/93
Page 5 of 6
Table 21.1 Sample number ranges assigned to each sample type.
Sample Type and Code
Sample Number Range
Barcoded?
Diskette (DK)
Suspended Solids (SS)
Benthic Grain Size (BG)
Benthic Infauna (Bl)
Sediment Toxicity (ST)
Sediment Grain Size (SG)
Sediment Organics (SO)
Sediment AVS (SA)
Sediment Metals (SM)
QC Blank Bottle (BB)
Chlorophyll a-Surface (CHS)
Chlorophyll a-Bottom (CHB)
Fish Pathology/Taxon QA (PATH/TQA)
Extra Rsh Samples
CTD Casts
Standard Fish Trawl
Non-standard Fish Trawls
Sediment Organics Duplicate (SO)
Sediment Organics Reference 1 (SO)
Sediment Organics Reference 2 (SO)
Sediment AVS Duplicate (SA)
Sediment AVS Reference 1 (SA)
Sediment AVS Reference 2 (SA)
Sediment Metals Duplicate (SM)
Sediment Metals Reference 1 (SM)
Sediment Metals Reference 2 (SM)
000-002
003-005
006-014
015-023
024-026
027-029
030-032
033-035
036-038
039-041
042-044
045-047
048-067
068-199
200-299
300
400
030
031
031
033
034
034
036
037
037
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Fish Spleen Macrophage Agg. (SMA)
Fish Pathology QA (PQA)
3200000-3200499 Yes
3200500-3200999 Yes
-------
Section 21
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 8 of 6
Table 21.2. Event numbers assigned for the VA93 sampling season. The
number of sampling events planned for the VA93 season is 146, including
second visits to the 12 BSS/LTT stations. Two "extra" event numbers have
been assigned for each field team (total of six extra events). Therefore, the
total number of event numbers assigned for VA93 is 152. Extra VA92 bar
codes will be used for dry run events.
Station/Sample Type
Event Number Range
Chemistry Duplicates
BSS, BSS/LTT, and REP
Stations
Chemistry Reference 1
Chemistry Reference 2
SMA/PQA Dummy Event
3000-3008
3009-3160
3161*3169
3170-3178
3200
-------
Section 22
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 1 of 2
SECTION 22
WASTE DISPOSAL
Proper disposal of all wastes is an important component of field activities. At
no time will any waste be disposed of improperly. It is the responsibility of the Crew
Chief to assure that all garbage is disposed of correctly. Proper methods for the
disposal of wastes generated during field activities are as follows.
22.1 Routine Garbage
Regular garbage (paper towels, plastic, discarded labels, etc.) is to be placed
in the trash cans in the boats or mobile lab. This garbage is then disposed of on land
by placing it in PUBLIC trash receptacles. In no case should trash be disposed of in
PRIVATE receptacles without permission of the owner.
GARBAGE SHOULD NEVER BE THROWN OVERBOARD. This includes even
small items such as the disposable strips from the whirl packs.
22.2 Detergent Washes
Detergent is used in the boat and mobile lab to wash off retrieved DataSonde
units and grab samplers. Only biodegradable detergents are to be used; therefore,
the wash water can be disposed of on the ground or overboard. Be sure not to
dump it on a lawn.
22.3 Formalin or Dietrich's Fixative
Great care should be exercised when working with these fixatives, as they are
suspected carcinogens. Formalin and Dietrich's (which contains formalin, alcohol, and
acetic acid) should never be disposed of in the field. There should be no reason to
generate waste. Any fixative that is poured into a container and then not used should
be poured back into the original storage container.
In the event that waste IS generated, it must be placed in an appropriate
container and shipped (or driven) to ERL-N where it can be disposed of properly.
shipped, the container will need a dangerous goods waybill.
If
-------
Section 22
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 2 of 2
22.4 Fish Waste
Fish processed following a trawl should be dumped overboard. Large
quantities of fish should never be disposed of on land. Discretion should be used in
the disposal of fish at sea. Large quantities should not be disposed of in enclosed
areas, or when numerous other boaters are close by. Fish should only be disposed
of in open areas where disposal will not adversely affect either the ecology or
aesthetics of an area. Under no circumstances should fish be given to the public.
-------
Section 23
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 1 oi 1
SECTION 23
CONTACT PERSONNEL
The primary contact for all field-related activities is the Field Coordinator. Any
technical questions, reports of accidents, injuries, equipment breakdown, etc. should
be addressed to him.
In the event that the Field Coordinator is not available, the Project Manager
must be notified. The Project Manager is also the appropriate person to contact
regarding general Program matters, affecting operations other than just field
operations.
This structure is graphically depicted in Figure 3.5, and the proper chain-of-
command discussed in Section 3.4. The names and phone numbers of contact
personnel are listed below.
FIELD COORDINATORS
1-(800)-732-2305 (FIELD OPERATIONS CENTER)
STEVE KELLY
(401) 544-6319
(401) 294-4291
(401) 792-6132
(PAGER)
(HOME)
(MERL)
PROJECT MANAGER
MR. DARRYL KEITH
(401) 782-3135
(401) 789-7581
(OFFICE)
(HOME)
-------
-------
Section 24
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Paga 1 of 2
SECTION 24
LOST GEAR
Lost gear can potentially have a significant effect on the sampling program.
Crews should take every precaution against the loss of gear by properly tightening
shackles and other connectors, but accidents are likely to happen.
Whenever a CTD or grab sampler is deployed, a pinger is attached to the
instrument. This will assist in locating it should the gear be lost.
Whenever gear is lost, the navigation system should be used to document that
position as a way point (F4), to make future recovery attempts possible.
If a piece of equipment is lost, attempts to recover it as described below should
be followed. If the gear cannot be retrieved immediately, and a spare unit is carried
by the team (even if it is on shore), the spare should be used to complete sampling
activities, if a spare is not immediately available, sampling for all other indicators
should continue, and a note made in the log that the samples that were to be
collected by the lost gear were not collected.
Upon the loss of any gear, the FC should be notified immediately. Where
appropriate, replacement equipment will be sent to the team. Attempts to recover
gear are as follows.
24.1 Recovery of a CTD
The CTD is a very expensive piece of equipment. If a unit is lost, all attempts
must be made to retrieve it as soon as possible. As this is also a delicate instrument,
grappling is inappropriate.
As soon as it is determined that the unit is no longer attached to the end of the
winch cable, record the exact coordinates. Attach the trawl to the winch cable, and
attempt to retrieve the unit by catching it in the net. If the CTD is recovered,
thoroughly test it out to determine if it is damaged. If it passes a QC check, continue
with sampling activities.
If the unit is recovered, and it has been damaged (visual damage or failure to
pass the QC check), notify the FC immediately and he will arrange for the back-up
CTD to be delivered before the next day. Continue with sampling for all other
indicators.
-------
Section 24
Revision 0
Date; 6/9/93
Page 2 of 2
If recovered, regardless of the damage done, note the event in the
computerized equipment log and notify the FC.
if the unit is not recovered after two attempts to catch it in the trawl, deploy a
marker buoy at the exact location it was lost, and notify the Field Coordinator
IMMEDIATELY. He will arrange for a commercial dive operation to recover the CTD.
To avoid the possibility of damaging the lost unit, cease all sampling activities at this
station.
24.2 Recovery of a Grab Sampler
If a grab sampler is lost, attempt to recover by grappling in the area where the
sampler was dropped. If the gear is successfully recovered, continue with sampling.
If it cannot be recovered, continue sampling for all other indicators. Since trawling is
still performed, the possibility exists that the grab could be caught in the net. If the
gear cannot be recovered, notify the FC immediately. He wijl arrange for shipment of
spare equipment.
24.1 Recovery of a Trawl Net
When trawling in water less than 30 feet a cod-end float should be attached to
back end of the trawl with sufficient line so as to provide reasonable scope. A small,
trawl size, float should be used to eliminate unnecessary drag. This float will mark the
location of the gear if the trawl line has to be cut or released prematurely. The line
can be used to retrieve the trawl from a snag. If the water is too deep for the cod end
line, then the grapple should be used to attempt retrieval.
-------
Section 25
Revision 0
Date: 6/9/93
Page 1 of 2
SECTION 25
REFERENCES
Beasiey, B. and R. Biggs. 1987. Near coastal waters segmentation. Report by the
College of Marine Studies, University of Delaware.
Beaulieu, J., 1991. Users guide for the EMAP Near Coastal Field Data Acquisition
System. Computer Sciences Corp., Narragansett, Rl.
Holland, A.F., ed. 1990. Near Coastal Program Plan for 1990: Estuaries.
EPA 600/4-90/033. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental
Research Laboratory, Office of Research and Development, Narragansett, Rl.
Morris, PA, 1975. The Peterson Field Guide Series: A Field Guide to Shells of the
Atlantic and Gulf Coasts and the West Indies. W.J. Clench, ed. Houghton
Mifflin Co., Boston. 330 pages.
SAIC, 1991. User guide for Environmental Data Acquisition System (EDAS V1.01).
Science Applications International Corp., Newport, Rl.
Schimmel, S.C., 1990. Implementation plan for the Environmental Monitoring and
Assessment Program Near Coastal Demonstration Project. ERL-N contribution
No. 1164.
Stanley, T. W., and S. S. Verner. 1985. The U. S. Environmental Protection Agency's
quality assurance program, pp 12-19 jn: J. K. Taylor and,T. W. Stanley (eds.).
Quality Assurance for Environmental Measurements, ASTM STP 867. American
Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.
Strobel, C.J. 1990. Environmental Monitoring and Assessment Program - Near
Coastal Component: 1990 Demonstration Project Field Operations Manual.
EPA-600/X-90/XXX. U.S. EPA Environmental Research Laboratory, Narragansett,
Rl. October 1990.
Terrell, T.T. 1979. Physical regionalization of coastal ecosystems of the United
States and its territories. Office of Biological Services, U.S. Fish and Wildlife
Service, FWS/OBS-79/80.
U.S. EPA Headquarters Library
Mail code 3201
120° Pennsylvania Avenue NW
Washington DC 20460
-------
Section 25
Revision 0
Dot*: 6/9/93
Page 2 of 2
Valente, R.M., C.J. Strobel and S.C. Schimmel. 1992. EMAP-Estuaries; Virginian
Province Quality Assurance Project Plan. U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency, Environmental Research Laboratory, Office of Research and
Development, Narragansett, Rf (in preparation).
1* I „-, "S 1
.'Vi J-j <2... •••'.-•
-------
APPENDICES
-------
-------
APPENDIX A
EQUIPMENT LIST AND CHECK LISTS
-------
-------
Appendix A Revision 0 6/9/93
Equipment List
Each team is provided with the following equipment and supplies. This list can serve as
a daily checklist to assure the crew is properly equipped.
Four wheel drive pickup truck (1)
camper shell (1)
bed liner (1)
front bumper winch (1)
CB radio (1)
Mobile laboratory (1)
work bench (1)
shelves for storing supplies
marine band VHP radio (1)
cellular telephone (1)
GRID computer with printer, power cables, phone cord and keyboard skin (1)
bar code reader (1)
first aid kit (1)
jumper cables (1)
tool box (1)
electric drill (1)
voltage tester (1)
Hach DO test kit with spare BOD bottles (2)
flashlight (1)
10 pound fire extinguisher (1)
CB radio (1)
24 foot Chesapeake-style boat
155 hp commercial Johnson engines (2)
trailer with winch, spare tire and spare rollers (1)
mast and boom assembly (1)
hydraulic winch & capstan (1)
self-contained power supply for winch (1)
windshield wipers
marine band VHP radios (2)
cellular telephone (1)
Loran navigation instrument (1)
GPS navigation instrument (1)
compass (1)
Appendix A - 2
-------
-------
Appendix A Revision O 6/9/93
hand-held compass (1)
Radar unit (1)
depth finder (1)
spare propellers (2)
GRiD computer with printer, power cables, phone cable and keyboard skin (1)
bar code reader (2)
anchor with chain and line (2)
first aid kit (1)
fire extinguishers (2)
oar (1)
personal flotation devices with lights (1 per person)
survival suits (1 per person)
ring buoy (1)
life sling (1)
Emergency Position and Information Radio Beacon (1)
boat hook (1)
tool box
cable cutter (1)
Nicopress tool (1)
garbage pail (1)
emergency eye wash (1)
jumper cables (1)
binoculars (1)
hardhats
spotlight (1)
flashlight (1)
flares (1kit)
fish totes
nautical charts
spare oil
spare shackles
siezing wire
spare Nicopress sleeves
spare cable for winch
spare bridles
fenders
spare line
docking lines
Sampling gear
trawl net with doors (2)
Young-modified Van Veen grab sampler (2)
Appendix A - 3
-------
-------
Appendix A Revision 0 6/9/93
grab stand (1)
Sea-Bird CTD with data cable (1)
Go-Flo water sampling bottles (2)
spare parts for the Go-Flo bottles
0.5 mm stainless steel sieve (2)
sieve box (2)
Stainless mixing pot for sediments (3)
Stainless spoons (3)
Teflon spatula for sediments (3)
fish measuring board (1)
refractometers (2)
field thermometers (4)
Hach DO test kit with spare BOD bottles (1)
YSI DO meter
dissecting kits
pingers for all deployed gear
filet knives
coolers
fish scales (2)
Petersons fish guide (2)
Petersons guide to shells (2)
other fish keys
Supplies
sediment chemistry sampling bottles
sediment AVS bottles
sediment metals bottles
sterile plastic syringes
sediment toxicity sampling bottles
bottles for benthic species composition and biomass
cubitainers -1 and 5 gallon
zip lock bags - multiple sizes
cheesecloth for wrapping preserved fish
cores for grain size samples
625 ml containers for suspended solids samples
spare parts for CTD
aluminum foil
Dietrich's fixative
formalin
long forceps for fish preserved in Dietrich's
wide mouth funnels (3)
centimeter ruler (3)
Appendix A - 4
-------
-------
Appendix A Revision 0 6/9/93
Alconox detergent
gloves
paper towels
Kimwipes®
alkaline batteries - AA and D
pH 7 and 10 buffers
salinity standard
Federal Express shipping labels
3.5" high density diskettes with mailers
data sheets (packs including bar code labels)
field notebooks (log)
plastic clipboards (2)
number 2 pencils ,
pens and waterproof markers
waterproof tags for fish
shipping boxes - multiple sizes
strapping tape
"blue ice bottles"
dry ice
insulated gloves
buckets for fish preserved in Dietrichs (2)
buckets for sorting fish (10)
boating yellow pages (depends on the team)
tap water
DI water
squirt bottles
brushes for cleaning gear
scissors
hole punches
whirlpacks - multiple sizes
tubing for Go-Flo bottles
protective glasses
Viton gloves
particle masks
Mercury clean-up kits
gear lube
outboard engine oil
grease guns
computer-generated maps
this manual (2)
Appendix A - 5
-------
-------
Appendix A Revision 0 6/9/93
Appendix A - 6
-------
-------
Appendix A Revision 0 6/9/93
LAUNCHING CHECKLIST
e
1. Remove trailer tie-down strap.
2. Install scupper plugs
3. Check brass boat plug and the two plugs on the bottom of the outboard bracket.
4. Drop the engine trailering brackets.
5. Lower the speedometer pick-up unit.
6. Rotate battery switch to 1 for odd days and 2 for even days.
7. Make sure the keys are in the ignition.
8. Raise all antennas.
9. Raise the mast and boom assembly and secure all stays.
10. Make sure hydraulic hoses are not pinched.
11. Check all electronics.
12. Load all gear and supplies.
13. Remove the Briggs and Stratton exhaust cover.
14. Disconnect trailer wiring.
15. Check the ramp for obstacles.
16. Have wheel chocks and winch handle available.
17. Attach bowline.
18. Check oil and gasoline levels.
19. Launch boat.
Appendix A - 7
-------
-------
Appendix A Revision 0 6/9/93
RETRIEVAL CHECKLIST
1. Engage the front hubs on the truck, place in 4WD LOW, back down the ramp, and
chock the wheels.
2. Center the bow of the vessel on the keel roller system and drive the boat on to the
trailer. Trim engines up slightly, and be careful of running the engines aground.
3. If there is not enough water raise engines and haul boat onto trailer with the winch.
4. Attach safety chain.
5. Drive up the ramp, removing wheel chocks.
6. Lower engine trailering bar.
7. Remove the scupper plugs.
8. Check gas level. Fill before next launching.
9. Lower and secure mast and boom assembly.
10. Lower and secure antennas.
11. Turn off batteries.
12. Install trailering strap.
13. Close forward hatch.
14. Remove gear and electronics as appropriate.
15. Secure all gear not removed.
16. Install Briggs and Stratton exhaust cover.
17. Check lock oh the trailer tongue.
18. Reconnect trailer lighting and check lights.
19. Check all safety chains and take out of 4WD.
Appendix A - 8
-------
-------
Appendix B Revision 0 6/9/93
APPENDIX B
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS SAFETY
AND
HANDLING INFORMATION
Appendix B -1
-------
-------
Appendix B Revision 0 6/9/93
This appendix consists of Materials Safety Data Sheets for all hazardous materials carried
by the lab or boat crews. The permit issued to the Environmental Research Laboratory,
Narragansett for handling and generating hazardous wastes covers EMAP field
operations.
The EPA Generator ID # is RID075721639
Appendix B - 2
-------
-------
Material Safety Data Sheet
from Genium's Reference Collection
Genium Publishing Corporation
1145 Catalyn Street
Schenectady, NY 12303-1836 USA
(518)377-8855 ct"ul*
SECTION 1. MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION
COHP.
No. 360
FORMALIN
(Revision B)
Issued: March 1981
Revised: November 1988
Material Name: FORMALIN
Description (Origin/Uses): Used as a disinfectant; as a germicide and fungicide for plants and
vegetables; to destroy flies and other insects; to manufacture phenolic resins (formerly used in home
construction but banned in 1982), artificial silks, cellulose esters, dyes, organic chemicals, glass mirrors
and explosives; in improving fastness of dyes in fabrics; tanning and preserving hides; and mordanting '
and waterproofing fabrics; also used in rubber latex applications and in embalming fluids.
Other Designations: Formal; Formaldehyde Solution; Morbicide
Manufacturer: Contact your supplier or distributor. Consult the latest edition of the Oumica/wec*
Buyers' Guide (Genium ref. 73) for a list of suppliers.
SECTION 2. INGREDIEN1
Formaldehyde,* HCHO, CAS No. OQSOOO-0
Methanol, CAS No. 0067-56-1
•See Comments in section 3.
••Methyl alcohol may be absorbed through intact «*»", which contributes to
overall exposure.
Comments: See NIOSK, STECS (LP8925000), for toxicity data on both free
formaldehyde gas and formaidehyde-in-water solution (formalin); see KTECS
(PC 1400000) tor toxicity data for the methanol stabilizer component of
formalin.
OtolS
OSHA PELS
8-Hr TWA: I ppm
15-MinSTEL: 2pp
JM1TS
•STEL 2 ppm. 3 mg/m>
OSHAPELa(SUn*)
- —• - "r A. ^vv PP&ttt ZwO ka)£
i-MinSTEL: aOppm.SlOmgrta1
ACGM TLVs (SWn«), 198£*»
TLV-TWA: 200ppm.260mg/m*
TLV-STEL: 250 pm, 310 mg/m*
SECTION 3. PHYSICAL DATA
pH: 2.8 to 4.0 (Basic)
% Volatile by Volume: 37 to 55
Boiling Point 205T (96*Q
Melting Point: <32'F (0*Q
Specilk Gravity (H,O a 1): 1.0 to 1.15
Appearance and Odor: A clear, water white liquid; with pungent, characteristic, formaldehyde odor (detection level: ca 1 ppm).
Comments Commercial formalin solutions contain varying amounts of formaldehyde gat. methanoL and water. Contact your supplier
for the specifications of the purchased product; the physical properties listed an representative values for (he common 37%-by.*eJtht
formaldehyde-gas-in-water solution containing methanol at a stabflizer.
SEClTOrf • 4. FIRE AND EXPLOSION DATA
Flashpoint 122T(50'q* [ Autoigm'tionTeuiyeiaBut. 79ST(424'O,Fbnnaldgop«ntioQS award swpp^
do so. Unusual Fin or EiptatailUardat FonnataUquiditsetfpnseBtiamodariiBfiitajrtexploswnha
that can be evolved from work opentioni is flanmiabla. If the fomulmsolutiw
possftili^ of flamnubility associated with the methanol vapor. Special Flrc*flgktfs« Pneadma: Wearasatf^ooauadbnamiag
••Mixwrea of air and free formaldehyde gat an nighty flamnrtli;ih«wid«famwofe*»toiMiiyfc
tible liquid. The flash point of a 37% formaldehyde and 0% m*m8adsol«tioB(»-37%ma«aaol4M soloani-) is tWT aonreat of igailsiM. Al1
formalin solutions and anoi
HazardoasProductaofDtcompoaiUosu
i of me <
-------
N'0.360 FORMALIN 8/88
SECTION 6. HEALTH HAZARD INFORMATION
Formaldehyde gat is
- - - . • . - ..__ . —„. pulmonary edema, pneumonitis and
even death can result from inhalation of high concentrations- Skin contact with strong formalin solutions or with formaldehyde gas have
caused primary skin irritation. Ingestion of formalin solutions causes corrosive gastritis with a high likelihood of perforation. Seven stomach
pain, nausea, vomiting, coma, and even death can result Approximately 2 ounces constitute a mean lethal dose of 37% formalin. Formalin
solutions splashed into the eyes have caused seven injury and cornea] damage. Sensitive individuals may develop symptoms from aa
exposure that is as low as 0.05 ppm. Exposure at 10 to 20 ppm causes profuse tearing, a severe burning sensation, and cough; it can be
tolerated for only a few minutes. Medical Conditions Aggravated by Long-term Exposure: None reported. Target Organs: Skin, eyes,
URT, Primary Entry: Inhalation, skin contact. The formalin solution may contain methanol that can be absorbed through the skin. Acuta
Effects: Irritation of the eyes, skin, and URT. Chronic Effects: Cancer may be caused by chronic exposure to formaldehyde gas. Formalin
solutions and resins chat contain formaldehyde cause sensitizaiion dermatitis. Sensitization to formaldehyde has been reported following
chronic low-level exposures resulting in asthmatic symptoms after minimal exposure. FIRST AID: Eyes. Immediately flush eyes, including
under the eyelids, gently but thoroughly with plenty of running water for at least 15 minutes. Skin. Rinse the area with water and then wash it
with soap and water. Inhalation. Remove the exposed person to fresh air; restore and/or support his or her breathing as needed. Have
qualified medical personnel administer oxygen as required. Ingestion (applicable only to accidental Ingestion of formalin solutions, not
applicable to formaldehyde gas): Never give anything by mouth to someone who is unconscious or convulsing. Begin immediate dilution
with 4 to 8 ounces of water or ™'fr Get medical help (in plant paramedic, community) for all exposures, Seek prompt medical assistance
for further treatment, observation, and support after first aid. Not* to physician: Severe inhalation exposures (ca SO ppm) may cause pulmo-
nary edema. Treatment for accidental ingestion includes a gastric lavige with water or saline until clear, followed by activated charcoal with
saline or sorbital catharsis. Treat exposed person for anion-gap acidosis; monitor blood memanol levels concurrently. The rapidly metabo-
lized formic acid requires attention: treat for acidosis and use dialysis to remove the formic acid.
SECTION 7. SPILL, LEAK. AND DISPOSAL PROCEDURES
Spill/Leak: Notify safety personnel, eliminate all sources of ignition, provide adequate ventilation, and evacuate all unessential personnel.
Cleanup personnel need protection against skin contact with the liquid and inhalation of its vapor (see sect 8). Contain large spills and
collect waste. Neutralize the spilled formalin with aqueous ammonia or mix it with sodium sulfite. Wash the residues with dilute ammonia to
eliminate vapor. Prevent runoff from entering streams, surface waters, waterways, watersheds, and sewers. Preplan for emergency response.
Waste Disposal: Consider reclamation, recycling, or destruction rather than disposal in a landfill. Waste formalin can be burned in an
approved incinerator. Approved landfills may accept properly neutralized formalin solutions. Follow Federal, state, and local regulations.
OSHA Designations
Listed as a specifically regulated substance (29 CFR1910.1028).
EPA D«ifnadoos (40 CFR 3014)
RCRA Hazardous Waste; No. U122
CERCLA Hazardous Substance, Reportabto Quantity: 1000 Ibs (454 kg), per the Clean Water Act (CWA), Section 311 (b) (4), and the
Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA), Section 3001.
8. SPECIAL PKOlEUliOre INFUKMAUUKv
G
shie
Always wear protective eyeglasses or chemical safetygogfte*. When splashing of formalin sototions is possible, wear a full face
llow OSHA eye- and face-protection regulations (29 CFR 1910.133). Respirator: Wear a NIOSH-aoproved respirator per Genium
fnr dm m.«it«.im.iiM. tfmftatntiiMM mAlor ttt* erpntm* IJmiH cited in lection 2. Follow QSHA iMpiralnr fegul«rimi« (•» rCT
1910.134). For emergency or nooroutine operations (spills or cleaning reactor vessels and storage tanks), wear an SCB A. Warning: Air-
purifying respirators will not protect workers in oxygen-deficient atmospheres. Othert Wear impervious nierik, butyl rubber, or Viton
gloves, boots, aprons, and gauntlets, etc, to prevent excessiveor prolonged skta contact Venttbdoav Install sod operate general and local
exhaust-ventilation systems powerful enough to ffltmntB sirboraele*^ of formaldehyde below the O
i of ignition, These
apply to work areas
Design all ventilation systems to be explosion ptoof in order ID minimize sow
where either formaldehyde gas or formalin solutions are used. Safety Stntfom
showers, and washing facilities available m work areas. fontMilMf*! Eqatptaentt ContMlensee pose a special hazard; soft lenses may
absorb irritants, and all lenses concentrate thea. Do not wear cenfsrt lenses in any watt ana. Reno*emntsntBia>»t clothing and launder it
before wearing it again; clean this material from snow and equipment Other* Design all engiuuiiiigsy*ttus a a manner that minimizes
sources of ignition such as open flame, uniasolaiad heatsn, etc. Eleetricaflygroimd and bond aUcantainen and equipmint used mshippujg,
recavmg, manuftcotrtnc aM sanpliiw optnibat dli« nwo^
exptosmCommenteFMniMioMpmonilhyfin^iawtMwadiihofOttfU^
^~ r ^^^OoMttt^id^ataib^'a^v^ia^A^iMmy^acteaatiietvnA
formalin sohitieos or:
i from S3*F (28*C or 37% rormalm
Contni ihf inveniory of
Remove from fuiiter exposure soy worker
Data (49 CFR 172.101-2)*
DOT SUppte* Name: Fbrmaldehrde Solutions
DOT OMR ORM-A or Combustible Liquid
•Foraalrnaoltttioiuvirymthewflainpomtsand
RefereaciK 1.2.26.38.84.86-94.100.111113.114.116.117.120. 22,
DOTLtbea None
IDNOfcUN119lorUN220«
; the DOT i
far
PreptredbyPJIge»,BS
Industrial Hyfieni Revfew: DJWilsao,CIH
Medical Review: MJH«rdk»,MD;WSav«man,MD
-------
22675
HSDS OATE: J/U/«(
CHAHCC NO.t 827t
far isilttinca, Contact:
Re«umory Affairs Oi»t.
ro BOM 1(7 Anal. IA 50010
'""' a
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
»0ft «N-«50S
KACH OSDERI: SI7JS1
HACH COMPANY
PO BOX tor
u
Eaiirjtncy Telipnont I
Rocky Mountain Poll
Ctr.
I. PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
CATALOG HO.l
PRODUCT NAME; Sadlu* TMoiUlfete 8.2000 J 0.0010N-
CAS NO.! MA CHEMICAL NAME: Not applicable
FORMULA; Not aaelleable CHEMICAL FAMILY: Mat applicable
II. INGREDIENTS
Sodium ThlosulMta
PCT: <10
CAS NO.: 777J-16-7 SARA I NOT LISTED
TLV: Mat etteaiUhed
HAZARD! M*y cauie Irrttitlon
Ottter comenentii each
PCT: <1 CAS NO.: MA
TLVi Not applicable
HAZARD! Not
DenlfierallMd Hitor
PCTl ta 190 CAS WO. t 77J2-14-5
nv; Not Malleable
HAZARD I Nan*
PEL: Net MtioUshod
SARAl MOT LISTED
PEL:. Mat ippUciBH
MOT LISTED
Not applicable
PEl:
Any conponont e» thll •ixturo not specifically Mated (•«. "ether
co«Bon«nt»"l t* flat eenaldarad to proiant • carelnoien hazard.
IZZ. PHYSICAL DATA
IT ATE i llwiitf APKARAHcei Ciaar ond oalarlat* ODORi Mana
SOLWILITy INi WATERi Hlialkla ACIDi Mliatbla OTHEBi Mat dataralnad
SOILINO POtNTl '100C MELTIN8 PT.: MA SPEC OR AVI TV! O.Mt *H| 7.*
VAPOR PSESSUREl Hat datarailnad VAPOR DCMSITV (Uf«l)i NO
EVAPORATION RATE! 0.74 METAL CMROSIVtTV - ALUMINUM! Nana STEEL I Nona
STMILlTVt Sao Caxditlant ta Avoid
STORAGE PKECAUTIONSt Stara In I aa«l, dry plaoa and pro tact fra« tunllfht.
IV. FIRE, EXPLOSION HAZARD AND REACTIVITY DATA
VII. FIRST AID
EVE AND SKIN CONTACT, Fluih y|th plonty of »otar.
IMCESTIONi Olva Una auantttlaa of «atar or ntlk. cm pnyilelan
tnmadlataXy.
INHALATION) Not IPPllClbH
VIII. SPILL AND DISPOSAL PROCEDURES
I" CASE OF SPILL OK RELEASE: Otluta «lth uator. Pour doxn tha driln vtt
«ca» witar.
DISPOSE OF IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL FEDERAL. STATE. AND LOCAL REGULATIONS.
IX. TRANSPORTATION DATA
D.O.T. PROPER SHIPPSNO NAME: Nat Currantly Raaulatad
HAZARD CLASS! Nat ••plseakla ID: NA
I.C.A.O. 'PROPER SHIPPING NAME. Not Currently Raftiiattd
HAZARD CLASS) NA ID I NA GROUP I MA
I.M.O. PROPER SHIPPINO NAME: Nat Currently Raiulatad
HAZARD CLASSl MA ' [Dl NA CROUP: NA
X. REFERENCES
. t) TLVi Thraahald Ll»lt Votuaa and llalatiaai Expetura !ridlea» far US
M»«. Aaiarlean Canfaranv* af Oa«arn*antil In4a*trUl HyilanHta, 1M
2) Air Caftt«ajlnant>, Fadaril Ratlttar. Val. S4, Ma. ii. THurtday. Janua
M, 11««. p». isia.jats.
SI tn-hauia Infaraiitian
«) TaaHnlait
FLASH PT.i Mat aaaliaiBla HETHODt NA
FLAMMABILITV LIMITS - LOWER! MA UPPEKl MA
SUSCEPTIBILITY TO SPONTANEOUS HEATING.! Mana
SHOCK SENSITIVITY: Mana AUTOtOHITtM PT. i NA
EXTINGUISHING: NEOIAt Met applleaala
F1RE/EXPLOSIC** HAZARDS! Nan*
HAIAROOU9 OECOMP. PRODUCTS! Mana nportad
OXIOIZERi No NFPA Codltt Haalth: 0 PlaieniDillty! 0
CONDITIONS TO AVOID: Heat and lltnt
Ratetlvltyi «
V. HEALTH HAZARD DATA
ACUTE TOXJCITY: Praotloally nan-toxlo
ROUTES OF EXPOSURE! Nat applicable
TARGET OROANt! Mot tPPlleablO
CHRONIC TOXICITY: Proetlcally non-toxlo
ROUTES OF EXPOSUREl Mat OpFllaaBto
TARBCT ORBAMSi Nat ap»ltoabla
CANCC* INFORMATION: Mot appllaabla
ROUTES OF EXPOSURE: Mot epplloaole
TARSCT OROAHSt Not applloatlla
OVEREXPOSUREt No efftoti intloiMtad
MEDICAL CONDITIONS AOORAVATEO W EXPOSURE! Nana raaarta*
VI. PRECAUTIONARY MEASURES
Av«14 aonttat vlth aya*.
Moid tharouthly aftar hinollnf.
PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT! **«aty *liiio« vitli to* •«• tide thlalda
THE INrORPMTION CONTAINED HEXEIM t* BASED ON DATA COHSIOOKD TO K ACCUUTE. HOMEVn, NO MAHUMTV
REOAROIMO THE ACCURACY Of THEM DATA OK THE RESULTS TO BE MTAINBD FROM TW US! THDWOF.
IS EXFtESSED OR IMPLIED
CCI HACH CO.
-------
-------
20762
MS CM DATE!
CHANCE NO.:
P0»: ON-0505
H*CH ORDERf: 417S5I
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
far A*si*tanca, Contact:
Rajulatary Affair. Dapt. HACH COMPANY €m.r,.««y T.l.pn.n. a
FO Box 107 Anot, (A sagio PO BOX 187 R.e,y Mountain PoUon ctr
"?-"^* AMES, n SOII10 ,,„„ ,2S-S7J4
I. PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
CATALOO NO,I 2074Z
CAS HO.: 532«-I4-t
FORMULA! H2NSQW
II. INGREDIENTS
PRODUCT NAHEt Sulfi«lc Kelt Powilor PUlo
CHEMICAL NAME: Sulfaalo aeld
CHEMICAL FAMILY! Inorjinic Aelda
SARA! NOT LISTED
PEL: Mot aatabllinad
SulfanU Acid
PCT: lot CAS MO.; 532»-l«-4
TLV! M«t aatablltnad
HAZARD! Caustl burns! nedarataly tO«le
III. PHYSICAL DATA
STATE: *oUd APPEARANCe: Hhtt* cryittlllno powdor ODOR: Nona
SOLUBILITY INI WATER! SolUOlO ACIDl SolublO
OTHER: Slllhtly aolualo ale., nothonol BO I UNO POINT: MA
MELTING PT.t 205C docoato. SPEC ORAVITVt 2.15 PHI of IX join « l.lfl
VAPOR PRESSURE! Not applicable VAPOR DENSITY Kin, Mueoui •(•or«n*t
CANCER INFORMATION! Hot •POllDablO
ROUTES OF CXPOSURtl Not »»ll«oblO
TASSrr OROAHSl Mot IPOHoiblO
OVCREXPOSURCt CoutOi burn*
HEOICAL CONDITIONS AOORAVATtD BV EXPOSURE < Mono rooortod
VI. PRECAUTIONARY MEASURES
VII. FIRST AID
EVE AMD SKIN CONTACT: ImodUttly n»>n i ind skin «ltft «ot«r for I!
nlnutn. ftmom eonto«ln*t«« ciothinf. Cill pnyjlclin.
INGESTtONt Do not Induct »»|tlnf. OIvo t«rto «wintltl«» of xittr. 01
lint 1 ounci of milk of mtintilt la >n *«uil amount of voter, or tni
whltM tt I tfft. Niv.r n«o onythlni »y meutlt to on uncontciout »«f
C»H phyileUn.
INHALATION! Ronov* to fr«jh fir. Stvo ortifleiol r»iplr»tlon I» ntctts
Call vhytleiin,
VIII. SPILL AND DISPOSAL PROCEDURES
IN CASE OF SPIli. OR RELEASE! Covor eentamlnittd Sax, H. [rvlnf. Dantaro«» Proportloi of Induatrial NatarlaU, tth
Haw Vorkt Van Naatrand Ralnheld Co. t*04.
51 Ttehnleal judoownt
>1 Oottalln, R.E. at at. Clinical Toxlcoloiy of Connarolol Produeta. 5
Ed. 3altl»orai Tha Million and Wllktna Co., l*a«.
71 NIOSK Railatry of Toxlo E'ftott of Ch««leal Subatoncaa, 118S-B*.
Cincinnati! U. S. Dapartwant af Maalth and Hm.an Sarvleaa, A»rll, ;
Hoih thorouthly iftir hindlln*.
Avoid oontiot with *yoi, $ktn *nd olotlllnf.
So not briitAo ehtlloolo.
Koo* oM>y trtm hoot, iporkt ond «p«n fldOM.
PROTECTIVE EOUIPMEMTi ruvt tiood, i«14 rotlttmt flovol, loft irotft io«»loi,
loo oott
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS BASES ON DATA CONSIDERED TO K ACCURATE. HOWCVCB, MO WARRANTY II EUPRgSSgP OK IMTt-IED
REOARDIM THE ACCURACY OF THESE DATA OR THE RESULTS TO 86 OBTAINED FtOM THE USE THEREOF.
1C) HACH CO. Ill'
"»•» Caa»any,
HCAO8UARTEBS, PO io« M«, lataland. CO ••lit
Noon Ear.ao.
tin,
M«o)ur 1. BgyttlUM
-------
-------
POI: m-«5IS
HACH ORDERS: 117(51
349
HSOS DATE l
CHANGE NO. I
•745
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
For Antitenoe, Conteett
Reiulotory AMelrs Oept. HACH COMPANY Emrtency Telephone *
CO Bex «7 AMI, I* SOOU PO BOX t07 Reeky Meunteln Polton Ctr
!»»«> 227-4224 _ AMCS, [A SOOU _ (3031 >23-sm _
X. PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
PRODUCT MAICl Stereh Indloetor Solution
CHEMICAL HUG I Mot •PPllCIOlO
CHEMICAL FAMILVl Not tsplioeble
CATALOG NO.I S4»
CAS MO.I NA
FORMULA: Wot opellooble
II. INGREDIENTS
Stereh, Soluble
PCTi y* burnt i «ory toxle
SARA! NOT LISTED
PEL) Net established
BoMlnerellzod Ml or
PCTl to til CAS NO. I 773I-14-S SAHAl MOT LISTED
TLV: Not OPPllceble PELi Nat opplleoblo
HAZARD i NOR*
ZIX. PHYSICAL DATA
STATEi liquid APPEARANCE: Nhlto, turbid solution ODORt Nan*
SOLUBILITY IMi KATES: HUeJblt ACtDi Mliolblt OTHER i Not d»tor«ln«d
SOILING POINT I "lOO'C MELT1NO PT.l NA SPEC ORAVITVl t.*«» pHl S.I
VAPM PuesSUREl Not aotorilnod VAPOR BCNSITV (oir-l)i HO
EVAPORATION RATEl I. S3 WTTAL COBBOSWTY - ALUMINUHt NO STEEL I NO
STABILITY) StlklO
STORAoe P«ECAUTIOHSi Stort tllhtly oloiod.
XV. FIRE, EXPLOSION HAZARD AND REACTIVITY DATA
FLASH PT.l Hot opplittolo HETHODt NA
Ft. A»*t ABILITY LIMITS - LO(«R: NA UPPER t NA
SUSCEPTIBILITY TO SPONTANEOUS HEATINQl Nono
SHOCK * ENSlTtVITYl Mono AUTOIONITION PT. I NA
EXTINGUISHING HEDIAl Not »|ille*klo
PIKE/EXPLOSION HAZARDS: Nono
HAZARDOUS DECOMP. PRODUCTS: Wont r.porto* -
OXIDIZES: No MFP* Codon Moolth: 0 Flwiblllty: « Rooetlvlty: 0
CONOITIOMS TO AVOID: Nono
V. HEALTH HAZARD DATA
THIS PRODUCT MAY BE: Irritotlnf to oyot. .
ACUTE TOXICITVt Priotlellly non-toxlo
ROUTES OF EXPOSURE: Mot «B»llCObl«
TAROET OROANSl Not OWllOOklo
CHRONIC TOXICITVi Priotlsolly non-toito
ROUTES OF EXPOSURE) Not iPPllcoblo
TAROET OROANSt Not ooplleoblo
CANCER iNFORMATIONi oxporiaoxtol wtiton «od oxporlnontil torotofon
ROUTES OF EXPOSURE: Not dotornlnod
TAROET OROAMSi Not do tor •! nod
OVEREXPOSMtCt Noy oouoo oyo Irritotlon
MEDICAL COMDITtONS AOORAVATEO IV EXPOSURE: Allortloi or *on>ltl»lty to
lolleylio tcld.
VI. PRECAUTIONARY MEASURES
VII. FIRST AID
EYE AND SKIN CONTACT! lomdlotoly fluid oyo* Mlth Motor ror IS »inutoo. Ci
pnyolclon. Huh tkin with IOOP ond ptonty »» wotor.
INGESTIONi Oi»o lorio o.uintltlot »t uotor or milt. Coll »t>y«lcl«n
limodlotoly.
INHALATION: Not OOOllOOOlO
VIII. SPILL AND DISPOSAL PROCEDURES
IN CASE Of SPILL OR RELEASE: Dtluto Nltn Motor. Pour doxn tho driin with
oent
SI Vendor Inforoiotlon.
Avoid oontoot Mitlt oyoi ond skin.
Moih tliarou(hly i*t»r hsndllnf.
PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT) »o»oty iloiioi with top ond tldo thlotd*
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS BASED ON DATA CONSIDERED TO BE ACCURATE. HOWEVER. NO WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF THESE DATA OR THE RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED FROM THE USE THEREOF.
(Cl HACK CO. !»«»
-------
-------
POi: IM-tSM
MACH ORDERIi it>ISI
l»7l MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
far Aiilitinio, conticti
MSCS OATEl J/U/tl R«|-ulltory Affoiri Dopt. HACH COMPANY Euortmey Tilofnono fl
CHAMOEMO.I AIM PO »OX W A*MS. IAS0011 PG BOX 1«7 Rooky Nosnt.ln Polion Ctr.
<•««! «7-«22« AMES, I* SHU ISM I tIS-5714
X. PRODUCT ZDENTIFICATION
CATALOG MO. I ItM
CAS NO.l 100S«-»*-5
FORMULA: MnS04 H20
ZZ. INGREDIENTS
PRODUCT NAME: MonilflOUl Sulfitl
CHEMICAL NAME: Minfiniio Suifito,
CHEMICAL FAMlLVt Inorfinio Soltl
Monahydritl
SACAI LISTED
PEL) C: S «t/MS ii Hn
Monfinotii Sulfoti
PCTl 1«0 CAS NO.: U»S4-»»-§
TLVl 5 BO/MS II Mil
HAZARD! Sytttnlo toifon by jnholitlon
ZIZ. PHYSICAL DATA
STATEi solid APPEARANCE: Pink oovdor ODOR: Hot dotomlnod
SOL U8 HI TV ttli KATES I Solublo AClOt Not 0«tir»ln»d
OTHER! Not dotorBlnod MtLlW POIHTt NA MELTINO PT. i >«OOC
SPEC GRAVITY! NO pHl of 5X loin. • 1.7 VAPOR PRESSURE: Not ippllcotlo
VAPOR DENSITY l MA EVAPORATION RATEl HA
METAL CORROSIVITV - ALUHIKUHl «.«02 In/yr STEELt NO STABILITY: Stlbll
STORAOE PRECAUTIOMSt Stori In • cool, dry pliei.
IV. FIRE, EXPLOSION HAZARD AND REACTIVITY DATA
FLASH PT.I Nit ipplleibl* MTTHOO: NA
FtAMHABIltTV LIMITS - LOHERl HA UPPER) NA
SUSCEPTIBILITY TO SPONTANEOUS HEAT I HO I Nan*
SHOCK SENSITIVITY! Nan* AUTOIOMITION PT.: NO
EXTINGUISHING MEDIA! vittr, B*rtan dloildi, ar dry eh«»Joil
FIRE/EXPLOSION HAZAROSl Hty mlt t»ll fu«»»
HAZARDOUS DCCOMr, -PRODUCTS) Miy nit tixlo fu»«l of lutfur oxid** In fin
OXIDIZERi Ho MFM Codoo Hooltht I Flomamftllltyt 0 Roootlvltyt 1
CONDITIONS TO AVOID: Hi at. naliturii con tut with ituatngn or Mfnotltin
V. HEALTH HAZARD DATA
THIS PRODUCT KAY »Ei Irrltitint to oyot, ikln and rotflrltory triot.
ACUTE TOxrcITYl Madoritoly toxlo
ROUTES OF EXPOSURE: Indolltlon
TARGET OBOANSt ointril norvou* tyiton
CHRONIC TOXICITVt Cinralitlvo lolton
ROUTES OF exPOSUREl innilitlifl
TAROCT OROAMSt dtntrot norveu* lystoa .
CANCER IMFORHATtONi ExuriMntil ntoploM foriltlin (ftonlin or lollfnant
timorit
• ROUTES OF EXPOSURE: Hot dttiroiinid
TAROCT GROANSl Not ditoralnod
OVCREKPOSUREi Slooplnoit. ii*ikn»« In t«|l. •oik-llto foolol OMproiilon,
•utolo-txlteMn*. tlurrod *poo«l). Miy eouio or contribute to upotr
ro*»lritory Inftetloni or pnou»onlo. Hanionoto hot boon nportod to eiuio
blood ohintoi.
MEDICAL CONDITIONS AGGRAVATED BV EXPOSURE: AleobotliB. llvor dyifgnotlon,
piychlotrlo dlioisoi disono of tho norvoui iy«to> or ruplrotory triet
VI. PRECAUTIONARY MEASURES
Nosh thoroufhly oftor Kontftlni.
A»«ld contict witli tyoi, ikln md olothlnf.
D» not broitho ehiBlcilt.
PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT: idodwot* vonttlotlon, ttfoty flutoii dtipoioblo
flo»o*
VII. FIRST AID
EVE AND SKIN CONTACT i iModtotoly flutn «y«i with «it«r for IS oilnutio.
tnyolelin. Flutn ikln Hitti olonty of votor.
INdCSTIONi Olvt lorn quintlUM of ootor or «ljk. Oil pNyiioion
lM*dllt«ly.
INHALATION: Ro«o«* to frotn olr. Oivi ortiflclll rotptrotion If noooott
till
VIII. SPILL AND DISPOSAL PROCEDURES
IN CASE OF SPILL OR RELEASE: Sw«»P uo lOMdor. Avoid broothlnf mtortii.
Dloolvo In wotor. Flutn dotm tho droln Kith tietn «otor.
DISPOSE OF IN ACCORDANCE MITH ALL FEDERAL, STATE, AND LOCAL REGULATIONS.
IX. TRANSPORTATION DATA
0.0. T. PROPER SHIPPIMO NAME: Not Currently RofUlotod
HAZARD CLASS) Mot ooplleiblo ID: MA
I.C.A.O. PROPER SHIPPIM MAME: Hot Currintly Rofulotod
HA2ARO CLASS: HA ID! MA GROUP: HA
I.H.O. PROPER SHIPPING NAME: Not Currontly Roivlotod
HAZARD CLASS: NA !0l NA OROU*! HA
X. REFERENCES
I) TLVl Thrtihold Lliolt Voluot otld lleloflool Expoturi Indiooi for 118«
It**. Amrlcon Conforoneo of GoirornBontol Induotriil Hyiionlsti, l»e«
2) Air Contnlntnti. Fodorol Rotiitor, Vol. 54, No. 12, Tnursdoy, Jonuor
If, 1*«*. pp. 2S32-it«3.
S> Sox, H. Irvlflf. Donfirovi Proporttoo of Intfultrlol Motorioli, «tn Ed
NOM York: Von Hottrond Roinhold Co. 14M.
«)
S) Toohnleot ludtaont
tl KIOSH/OSHA Ooeuiitlonil Hoolth Guldollnit for dtonieol Horordo.
Clneinnotl: Doportoiont of Hoolth md Hiimn Sorvleos, HS1.
7) Gonolln, R.E. ot il. Cllnlcol To«Jeolofy of Comoroloi Produoti. 5th
Ed. Boltlnorot Tho Hllltmo ond Ntlkin* Co., H««.
SARA: Tnll product eontiini I ohoalodl or elmicot* oubjoct to tho report
ro«.ulro«ont* of notion SI5 of Tttlo MI of thi Suporfund AmndHnti tnt
Roouthorlxotlon Aot of Me* md «« CTR Port 372.
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS BASED ON DATA CONSIDERED TO BE ACCURATE. HOWEVER, NO WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF THESE DATA OR THE RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED FROM THE USE THEREOF.
(0 HACH co. m»
-------
-------
1972 MATERIAL
For Aoolltonoo, contoott
HSDS DATEt 4/24/M Rotulttory Affolr* Dot.
CHAMGC NO.I 827* CO B«x 107 A«0*, I* 5«»10
(800) 227-4224
SAFETY DATA SHEET
POt: ON-«SCS
HACH ORDERtl H7D5I
HACH COMPANY
PO MX t07
•AMES. I* St«l«
EBorioney Toiopftono t
Iteelty Mountoln Potion Ctr.
(JOS) *25-S71t
I. PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
CATALOG NO.) 1072
CAS NO.I MA
FORMULAS Net oppllooblo
II. INGREDIENTS
PRODUCT NAME: Alkilln* lodldo-Aiido ROIfOnt
CHEH1CAL NAMEl Not oppllcotlo
CHEMICAL FAM1LVI N«t oppllooblo
llthluoi Hydroxldo, Monohydroto
PCTl <*S CAS NO.i lS10-»»-S
TtVi Not ootoblltnod
HAZAROi Corrooivo poloon
SARAi NOT LISTED
PEll Not OStObllthod
PotofsiUB lodldo
PCTl <4« CAS MO. I 7»*l-ll~« SARAi NOT LISTED
TLVl Mot Oltoblllhod - PEL I N«t oltobllinod
HAZARD t Hoy oouoo irrltotlon
SodluB Axldo
PCTl , oxoooo ««l«tur«r eontiot
with ooid* or oxldlzort.
V. HEALTH HAZARD DATA
THIS PRODUCT MAY BEt oorroolvo to oyot, Mot iKln ond rooplrotory troot.
ACUTE TOXIC! TV t orol rot LDSO • 3S»»t/Kt * vory toxlo
ROUTES OF exPOSUREi ln«»tlon, Inholotion, okln obtorptlan
TAROCT OROANSt control nofirou* tyotooit ll»«r, Kldnoyt, iploon
CHRONIC TOXIClTVt Not dotoralnod!
ROUTES OP EXPOSWCi Not dotoroilnod
TARGET ORBANSt Not dotornlnod
CANCER INFORMATIONi An Inffodtont of tklt Bluturo It o ootontlol eorolnooon.
ROUTES » EXPOSURCl Intootlon
TABCET OROANSi Not dotoriolnod
OVEREXPOSWEi Ciuiit IOVOPO burns, dtxxlnoit, nouito, oontrol norvouo iy*t»
doprooalon, OOBO< dootk. chronlo iodldo ovortooo >oy oouoo ikln r«»h,
runny noto, hoodoohoi, lovor ond Irritotlan ft moous mtmtrmnei.
MEDICAL CONDITIONS A06RAVATES tV EXPOSUREi Cnronle rostlrotory dltootot,
otpoelolly tkoao obttruotlm tno olrwoyl ikln dltordorii oyo eondltlonii
•ly lowof nlo> olood *ro»turol
HAZARD CLASS! « IDt UN17SI GROUPt II
I.M.O. PROPER SHIPPING NAMEl C0fr00l*0 Solid. M.O.S.
(LlthltiB Hydroitlda Mlxturo)
HAZARD CLASSl a IDt UN175I OROVPl II
X. REFERENCES
1) TLVi Throihold LlBlt Voluoo ond Bloloiictl Exooturo Indioot for 1148
lia«. ABorletn Conforoneo of OovornBontil tnduttriol Hyflonlit>, ivss
2> Air CentOBlnonto, Fodorol Rotlttor, Vol. 54, No. 12, Thursday, Jonuor
It, l«6f. •*. 2SS2-2fai.
3) In-houoo inforBotlon
4> Toehnlool JudfBont
S> Outildo tootlnt.
») MIOSH Rotlttry of Toxle Effooto of Chonlaol Subttonooo, 1485-84.
Clnoinnotlt U. S. Doportioont of Hoolth and Huvon Sorvloio, April, l«|
7> Son, M. Irvine. Donooroat Proportloo of tndaitrlol Hotorlolt, «th Ed.
Now Vorkt Von Nostrond Roinnold Co. 1«»4.
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS BASED ON DATA CONSIDERED TO BE ACCURATE. HOWEVER, NO HMRANTV 13 EXPRESSED OR
i REOARDIHO THE ACCORACV OF THESE DATA OR THE RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED FROM THE USE THEREOF.
IMPLIED
(C) HACH CO. !W
-------
-------
CAT. NO. J»01
HSOS OATEr 3/H/H
CHANCE t
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
POP, I 5471*11
HACH ORDERS! 12B«««
Far Assistance, Contlet:
Rtjulitory Affilri Dipt.
PO BOX 407 Ami. IA 50010
(8001 227-4224
,HACH COMPANY
. PO BOX 907
AMES, ZA 50010
Emtrjincy Telephone I
Reeky Meuntoln Poison ctr.
(305) 12S-57U
I. PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
CATALOG NO.! 401 -
PRODUCT NAME: ledtte-Iodldo Stsndtrd Solution 9.QOI2SN
""CAS NO.: MA CHEMICAL NAME: Net ipplleeeio
FORMULA: Net sppltepole CHEMICAL FAMILY: Met applicable
II. INGREDIENTS
VII. FIRST AID
EVE ANO SKIN CONTACT: Flush with plenty e» weter.
[NGESTION: Glut Urse qusntltles «f w*ter er milk. Call physiclen
liMcdlottly.
INHALATION: Net Ipplietkle
VIII. SPILL ANO DISPOSAL PROCEDURES
All components ere
PCT: <«.! CAS NO.: NA
•• ' TLV! Net oeplleeele
-' HAZARD: Net eeplieoele
Oeminertllzsd Htter
PCT: to 100 CAS NO.: 7732-13-S
TLV: Net sppllcitle
HAZARD: None
SAB AI NOT LISTED
PEL: Not epplleoblo
SARAI NOT LISTED
PEL: Not «ppllcitil«
Any eempenent of this mixture net seeelMcilly listed (•«. "other
components") Is net considered te present e eirelnoftn nez*rd.
III. PHYSICAL DATA
STATE: liquid APPEARANCE: Cleer, colorless ODOR: None
SOLUBILITY INi MATER: Mlsetele ACID: Not determined
OTHER: Net determined BOILING POINT: "HOC MELTING PT.i NA
SPEC GRAVITYi 0.»BO oHt 8.1 VAPOR PRESSURE: Net determined
VAPOR DENSITY (elr'll: NO EVAPORATION RATE: 1.07
METAl CORROSIVITY - ALUMINUMS NO STEEL: NO
STABILITY: See C«nditiens te Avoid
STORAGE PRECAUTIONS: Store tlshtly closed in * coat, dry piece.
IV. FIRE, EXPLOSION HAZARD AND REACTIVITY DATA
IN CASE Of SPIU OR RELEASE: Oliut* «ltn ueter. Pour Ham the drein with
excesi weter.
DISPOSE OF IN ACCORDANCE HITH ALL FEDERAL, STATE. AND LOCAL REGULATIONS.
IX. TRANSPORTATION DATA
D.O.T. PROPER SHIPPIMO NAME; Net Currently Reeultt**
HAZARD CLASS: Net ipplleeale ID: NA
I.C.A.O. PROPER SHIPPING NAME: Net Currently Reeulltld
HAZARD CLASSI NA IDl NA CROUP: NA
I.M.O. PROPER SHIPPINO NAHE: Net Currently Reeuleted
HAZARD CLASSl NA ID: MA GROUP I NA
X. REFERENCES
11 TLV'i Threehettf Llnlt Veluee end «l»lefl»l E»»eture Indices for l»s«
118*. Aieerlcttt C«nferenee of Qeverneientel Indtistrlel HyfltnUtj, itan
2) 21 CFR 1100 - !«)» (Cede ef Federel Riiuletloni - L«»prl
S) In-Koute Infsrmtlen
4> Teehnle*! jvdfnent
FLASH PT.: Net levllcettle METHODi NA
FIAWMBIUTV LIMITS - LOWER} NA UPPER: NA
SUSCEPTIBILITY TO SPONTANEOUS HEATING: None
SHOCK SENSITIVITY) Nene AUTO IGNITION PT.:
EXTINOUISH1MO MEDIA: Net •»»llc«tle
FIRE/EXPLOSION HAZARDS: Net tPplleiOlt
HAZARDOUS DECOM?. PRODUCTS: Hone reperted
OXIDIZER: Ne NP»A Cedes: Hetltkl 0 Fl
CONDITIONS TO AVOID! Heit, tveporitloB
llltyi 0 Reeetlvity: 0
V. HEALTH HAZARD DATA
THIS PRODUCT MAY BE: Irritetlnf to eyes.
ACUTE TOXICITYt Prsetlcslly nen-toxle
ROUTES OF EXPOSURE: Net eppll«*ol*
TAROET OROAMS: Net ipplloi»Ie
CHRONIC TOXICITY: Net dtternined
ROUTES OF EXPOSURE: Net detoreilntd
TARGET OROANSt Net «tter*lne«
CANCER INFORMATIONS Net determined
' ROUTES or EXPOSURE: Net determined
TARGET ORGANS: Net tfeteralned
OVEREXPOSURE: May eioto »ye Irrltetlen.
MEDICAL CONDITIONS AGGRAVATED »V EXPOSURE: led Id* »ey etirsvete sklft
dtferdoft
VI. PRECAUTIONARY MEASURES
Weifi there««tily ifttr hendllnt.
Avald eenteet "ltd eye*.
A»ald prelon«ed er repeeted eentset with skin.
PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT, nftty flKiit, ideeutte ventlletlen
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS BASED ON DATA CONSIDERED TO BE ACCURATE. HOWEVER, NO WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF THESE DATA OR THE RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED ~*OM THE USE THEREOF.
(CI HACH CO. l?«l
Ht«h Caapeny, WORLD HEADQUARTERS, PO Ba» 381, Loveltnd, CO 805J1
Meeh Europe, ap ;;i, aseeo He«ir I, BEL01UM
I OF 1
-------
-------
E»M.. SCIENCE ui WOOOCREST-ROW p.o.aox- sons*. CHERRY- HILL.* *.j-
TELEPHONE NUMBER" 1609* 354-9200
SECTION
NAME £ PRODUCT
S3S: 3SB =3 S3S
ItCAL NAMES ROSE 3ENGAL 1C.I. S45440I CA 3632-68-8
.3G NUMBERS RX0155 RX0160
NAME £ SYNONYMSs 01 SODIUM SALTt TETRAIODOTETRACHLOROFLUORESCEIN
[HAL FAMILY: ZANTHENE DYES FORMULAS C20H205UC14NA2
JLA WEIGHTS 10IT.69 GM/MOLE
SECTION 2 PHYSICAL DATA
88 88 3888 8838 S88S8 888388833 83SS8S 8888888883&38388S383833 88S8388338888S33S:
G POINT* 760 MM HG I DEGREES CJ NONE SPECIFIC GRAVITY fH20 * I!
G POINT I DEGRESS Cl SOLUBILITY IN H20t X BY WT. AT 20 DEGREES C
SOLUBLE VAPOR PRESSURE AT 20 DEGREES C
ANCE ANO ODOR ODORLESS VAPOR DENSITY tAIR 9 1)
IROWN POWDER PERCENT VOLATILEs BY VOLUME 5* HZQ MAX
JRATION RATE fBUTYL ACETATE * 1J NONE
SECTION 3
FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD DATA
POINT
-------
SECTION 7 SPECIAL PROTECTION INFORMATION
3 S3 SS 33 83 3833 3333 = 3 833 383 S3 83 88 88 33 83 83 88883f88888i3r3888888 38 88389883 33838388888|
ENTILATION* RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROTECTIVE CLOTHING* EYE PROTECTION
EAR DUST MASK* RUBBER OR NEOPRENE GLOVES* SAFETY GOGGLES
OCAL EXHAUST RECOMMENDED
= 3 38S 33 83 33 38 33 3S3 883 8 383 8883 38 83 838= 8888 3388 33388=8888333 38 88833333888833333s:
SECTION 8 SPECIAL HANDLING AND STORING PRECAUTIONS
= 338= 3833=883333383383883833383888383 33 83 8-3S88838S3 388883 38 38 838883 8838838883:
TORE IN TIGHTLY CLOSED CONTAINER—MATERIAL IS HYGROSCOPIC
SSS3S 83 333 s 8833 8888 333 388 83 83 3
SECTION 9
= S S 3 S 8 8 8 8 8 8 3 S SS 3 S S S S = a S 3 = S S 8 S S
REGER TO SECTION 3 THROUGH 81
8883383 38883883883833388333888383338838838383838:
HAZARDOUS INGREDIENTS
833333338888383338338833333S3388388388388S338833S
S5SS3SSSSSSSSSS3SSSJS3S3SSSS3S3S
SECTION 10
S3 88 38 83
OTHER INFORMATION
:3 8883 83 33 3383 83 888833 8388888/8833883 33 33883388S88338S38:
JT - NOT REGULATED
l£ STATEMENTS CONTAINED HEREIN ARE OFFERED FOR INFORMATIONAL PURPOSES ONLY AND
:E INTENDED TO BE FOLLOWED ONLY 8Y PERSONS HAVING RELATED TECHNICAL SKILLS AND
* THEIR OWN DISCRETION AND RISK. SINCE CONDITIONS AND MANNER OF USE ARE
iTSIDE OUT CONTROL* ME MAKE NO WARRANTIES* EXPRESS OR IMPLIED* AND ASSUME NO
A8ILITY IN CONNECTION WITH ANY USE OF THIS INFORMATION*
FE XSSUCOs 5-87
SRGENCY PHONE NUMBER I609J4Z3-6300
-------
aect:on v — rtsactiviry uaia
EXCFRSIVF WFAT
Incomoatibility (Matsnals to Avoid)
STRONG OXIDIZING AGENTS, STRONG REDUCING AGENTS.
Hazardous Decomposition or Byproouca
CARBON MONOXIDE, CARBON DIOXIDE.
Hazardous
May Ocsur
Conciaons 10 Avoid
Section VI — Hsalth Hazard Data
hsai'.n Kazarcs (Aazs ana C.vanic)
INHALATION OF THE VAPORS MAY CAUSE IRRTTATTOS OF THE RESPTttATOBV gySTFM TWCTgTTnw MAV
CAUSE NAUSEA, VOMITING*. OK" rggrTSTTON OF THE MOTTTTT Off STOMACT. nnwrarr UTTW TUP FVTTC M.
CAUSE SEVERS IRRITATION; POSSIBLE PERMANENT TNJTOY. rONTACT WTTB TWF
MATT
,
| Carorogsmcijy:
NT??
(ARC Monrapns?
CSHA a»guaiM?
NO
Mec::al Confirtrons
ffaratiy Aggravated by Exposure MONK
^DSfcsncy and ctrst Aid Procedures
IF INHALED REMOVE TO FRESH AIR. IF BREATHING IS DIFFICULT GIVE OYYCTM. TT?
LARGE 'AMDUNTg OF WATER THEH ONDUCE VOMITING. IN CASE OF CONTACT FLTJSH SKIN OR EYES
FRESH WAtER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES. OBTAIN MEDICAL ASSISTANCE!
Section VII — Precautions for Safe Handling and Use
19 e» taxen in Cas» Maisnai ts Hataaseil or Spiliad
5PTLL ON VERMICITLITg Oft PIATOMACEOTTS EARTH. SCOOP TIP AND PLACE TH A PLASTIC BAC
ISPOSAL
SPTT.T.
WITH FBBSH WATER
[ Wasts Disposal Memod
»n«TB! TIT
UTTg ATT. HXISTINC FEPEKAL. STATS. AND LOCAI^
Be Taken in Handling and Storing.
KEEP TIGHTLY CLOSED IN A COt
[Clner Prscauiiom
NONE
ISectfon VIII — Control Msasuras
|flsspraio/y Protaeoon (Specfy
>HE RZ00IREO WHEHK APIQTIATg TEBT3XATIOH EXISTS. ABOVE TL7. WEAR SELT CONTAINED BRZATHrNG
Local Eriaust
SX_
Mechanical (Gsneo9
XX
OttMT
•Gioves
RESISTA
tat Protean* CUMng or Eouiprnent
mirrui
SAFETY GXASSES WITH SIDE SaxsLDS.
WASH 3Ain?5 T50UROCGLY AFT5R HAITOLIN ANY CHEMICAL.
Pags 2
-------
Material Safety Data Sheet -
f/;ay be used to compfy with
CSHA's Hazard Communication Standard,
29 CFH 1910.1200. Standard must be
consulted for specific requirements.
U.S. Department of Labor"
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(Non-Mandatory Form)
Form Approved
OMB No. 1213-0072
iEMTTTY-fAT-Usaron taoef and IJstf
I-100«
Wore: S/ank spaces are nor permnad tt any ram is nor appAeaCt o? no
informaeon is avai/aofc. tne space musr oe manxti to «atea» that
Section 1
BRAND-NU LABORATORIES. INC.
Aasr-ss (Wumoar. Sreet Ciy, Sia«, and Zip Coos)
P.O. BOI 895
MERIDSN. CT. 06450
emergency teisprione Numoer
(203) 235-7QS*
Teieonone Numoer lor tniormation
(203) 235-7989
Oaie Prepared
x— \ 8/14/90
Signature ol Pres^rar topaonai)
< tiu2JL
Section tl — Hazardous Ingredients/Identity information /
_Hazifoous Components (Ssscifc Chemicai laantiiy Common Name(5)) OSHA P3. ACGIH TLV
OCTYLPHENOXYPOLYETHOXYETHANOL CAS NO. 9036-19-5 NONE ESTABLTSmm T.n
Otner Limits
Recommenced
lOOKsnal)
Section III — Physical/Chemical Characteristics
Boiiing Port;.
Vapor Pressure (mm Hg.)
Vapor Denary (AH - 1)
-270°-C7
Offl90«"r
vi
Spodte Gravity (HjO • 1) .
Viettrtg Point
evaporation Rat*
(Butyl Acetate -1)
T.Tf7-
7« r '
<1
Soiubitoy m wa
COMPLETE IH ALL PROPORTIONS.
Appearance and Odor
CLEAR. COLORLESS. VISCOPS LIQUID WITH MILD ODOR.
Section IV — Fire and
Explosion
Hazard Data. . *.*•". ' •• ' I ':•:.'
Fiasn Point (Metnod Useo)
THI^ VATRptAT, IS KOH-TyT-A'HMA'Rrfe
Flammanie Lirmtt I LEL
1 ..A.
ua.
H.A.
cjoinguishing Meda
USB EXIIHcui.^HIHG MATERIAL APPLICABLE TO THK SURROi>MblNC FIHB.
spaoal on Fighting Procedures
PBOPFff
VTW1? TTCHTTWC
5EOmjeeaac
TTSK STT.V—COHTAIHKB BRKA'I'H I KG
KEEP FIRE EXPOSED CONTAINERS COOL WITH WATEX SPRAT.
unusual Ri and Stpiasan Hazard*
NONE INDICATED.
S.A. - HOT APPLICABLE/NOT AVAILABLE
-------
Appendix C Revision 0 6/9/93
APPENDIX C
PERMIT FOR OPERATING MARINE-BAND
VHF RADIO
Appendix C -1
U.S. EPA Headquarters Library
Mail code 3201 •*
1200 Pennsylvania Avenue NW
Washington DC 20460
-------
',.- '.'_ -!'•-)• • , '-
•v-.• ."' -...•-••'•
-------
Appendix C Revision 0 6/9/93
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND ASSESSMENT PROGRAM
BOAT RADIO FREQUENCY ASSIGNMENTS
CALL SIGNS
R1V CYPRINODON
RjVARBACIA
R/V MYSIDOPSIS
R/V CHAMPIA
MOBILE LABS
WRH 4387
WRW 8803
WRM 8373
WRG 3330
KB 2053
FREQUENCY ASSIGNMENTS
CHANNEL
TRANSMIT FREQ.
(MHz)
TYPE OF OPERATION
6
9
12
13
14
16
20
22A
67
82A
156.300
156.450
156.600
156.650
156.700
156.800
157.000
157.100
156.375
157.125
Intership safety
Calling, radio checks
Port operations
Bridge to bridge communications
Port operations
Safety and DISTRESS
Port operations
Communications with Coast Guard
Bridge to bridge - Louisiana
Working channel US govt. only
In addition, all public correspondence channels (marine operator) can be used: 24, 25,
26, 27, 28, 84, 85, 86, and 87
Appendix C - 2
-------
-------
Appendix D Revision 0 06/09/93
APPENDIX D
PERFORMING WINKLER TITRATIONS
USING THE HACH DO KIT
Appendix D -1
-------
-------
Appendix D Revision 0 06/09/93
DETERMINATION OF DISSOLVED OXYGEN BY THE HACH KIT PROCEDURE
The method described here follows a modification of the classical Winkler
procedure. A divalent manganese solution, followed by strong alkali, is added to the
sample. The precipitated manganous hydroxide is dispersed evenly throughout the
seawater sample which completely fills a stoppered glass bottle. Any dissolved oxygen
rapidly oxidizes an equivalent amount of divalent manganese to basic hydroxides of
higher valency states. When the solution is acidified in the presence of iodide, the
oxidized manganese again reverts to the divalent state and iodine, equivalent to the
original dissolved oxygen content of the water, is liberated. The amount of iodine is
measured by titration with sodium thiosulfate.
Once a week, a be check on the performance of the YSI dissolved oxygen
probe is required. This includes evaluating the calibration of the DO probe and will
determine whether a membrane change is necessary. The Hach company model OX-DT
Dissolved Oxygen Test Kit has been selected for use in these QC checks.
1.0 SAMPLING PROCEDURE AND STORAGE
a. Insert the tube from the Go-Flo bottle approximately 3/4 of the way down into a
clean 300-ml BOD bottle. Open the top valve on the Go-Flo bottle and allow the
sample to slowly enter the BOD bottle, being careful to avoid the introduction of
air bubbles. Allow at least two volumes (600 ml) to overflow, then crimp the hose
and gently remove it, allowing just enough water to enter the bottle to displace the
volume of the hose. Make sure there are no air bubbles trapped in the BOD bottle
and stopper. Three samples should be collected and fixed as described in this
section. Titrate two of the three. If the results are significantly different, titrate the
third and use the best two.
b. " Add the contents of one manganous sulfate powder pillow and one alkaline iodide-
azide reagent powder pillow.
c. Immediately insert the stopper so air is not trapped in the bottle. Firmly hold the
stopper in place and invert several times to mix. Note: A flocculent precipitate
will form which will be orange-brown if oxygen is present. In salt water, the
floe may not settle fully.
d. Let the floe in the solution settle to about 1/3 of the way down the bottle. Again
invert the bottle several times and wait until the floe has settled to about one-half
to two thirds down. Note: Waiting until the floe has settled twice assures
Appendix D - 2
-------
-------
Appendix D Revision 0 06/09/93
complete reaction of the sample and reagents. At this point, samples may be
stored in the dark up to 8 hours before analysis. If the sample is not to be titrated
immediately, store upright and seal the top by pouring a small amount of water
into the flared lip area.
NOTE:
At this point the Oxygen has reacted with the chemicals and is bound up in the
flocculent.
2.0 ANALYSIS
a. When you are ready to perform the titration, remove the stopper and add the
contents of one sulfamic acid powder pillow. (Do not re-mix the sample before
adding the sulfamic acid). Replace the stopper without trapping air in the bottle
and invert several times to mix. Note: The floe will dissolve and leave a yellow
color if oxygen is present.
b. Attach the cartridge to the titrator body following the procedure described in the
Hach manual. Insert a clean delivery tube into the titration cartridge. Remove all
air from the delivery tube by turning the delivery knob to eject a few drops of
titrant. Reset the counter and wipe the tip with a clean Kimwipe.
c. Use a clean graduated cylinder to measure 100 mis of sample and then transfer
the sample into a 250-ml erlenmeyer flask. The erlenmeyer flask should be placed
on the battery-powered mixing stand and a stir bar should be added to mix the
sample. The stir bar should not be spinning rapidly enough to create a significant
vortex.
d. Place the delivery tube into the solution so that the tip is submerged and swirl the
flask while titrating with sodium thiosulfate to a pale yellow (straw) color.
e. Add four drops of starch indicator solution and swirl to mix. Note: A blue color
will develop due to the formation of a starch-iodine complex.
f. Continue the titration to a colorless end point using the fine adjustment on the
titrator. The titration is finished when the sample first turns completely colorless.
Record the number of digits from the digital counter.
g. Calculate mg/l dissolved oxygen by multiplying the digits required x the digit
multiplier (.02 for 2 -10 mg/l dissolved oxygen). For example, a reading of 300
digits x .02 equals a DO concentration of 6.00 mg/l. Depending on the accuracy
of the strength of the sodium thiosulfate solution in the cartridge, a correction
factor may need to be applied (see the instructions which follow this section).
Appendix D - 3
-------
-------
Appendix D Revision 0 06/09/93
h. Record this value on the appropriate data sheet.
i. Discard the remainder of the sample and rinse all glassware with deionized water.
3.0 INSTRUCTIONS FOR DETERMINING THE ACCURACY OF THE HACH
WINKLER TITRATIONS USING THE IODATE-IODIDE STANDARD
SOLUTION
The accuracy of the Hach Winkler titrations can be checked by using an iodate-
iodide standard solution which has a constant dissolved oxygen concentration of 10 mg/l.
The periodic use of this standard solution provides a check both on the strength of the
sodium thiosulfate titrant and the accuracy of the digital titrator. One titration with the
iodate-iodide standard should be performed every time a new titration cartridge is used.
In addition, it is good practice to check the strength of the titrant at regular intervals
(every two or three days) and apply the appropriate correction factors to the titration
results for the actual field samples. The procedure for performing the titration of the
iodate-iodide standard and calculating the correction factor is given below.
1. The titration of the iodate-iodide standard solution basically follows the same
procedure as a normal Winkler titration. First, measure 100 ml of the iodate-iodide
standard solution using the graduated cylinder and pour it into the erlenmeyer
flask. Place the flask on the mixing stand and add a stir bar.
2. While the solution is mixing, add the contents one Sulfamic Acid powder pillow
(Hach kit reagent 3). The solution will turn clear yellow. Wait a few minutes for all
the sulfamic acid crystals to dissolve.
3. Titrate the solution following the instructions for the Winkler titration given in the
previous section (begin at step 12, after you have prepared the digital titrator).
4. When the titration is complete, record the number on the digital titrator. The
standard should be equal to 500 but this number will very due to manufacturer
inconsistencies. Each batch that goes out with you in the field will be pre-tested
and the expected number will be documented with that batch. If the reading is
that you get is equal to the expected value, there is no need to apply a correction
factor. If the reading on the digital titrator is between ± 5%, then the digital titrator
readings for actual field samples must be corrected. The calculation for
determining a corrected digital titrator reading involves using a simple proportion,
as follows:
a
b
c
d
Appendix D - 4
-------
-------
Appendix D Revision 0 06/09/93
Where:
a = digital titrator reading following titration of iodate-iodide standard
b = the expected value following the iodate-iodide solution titration
c = digital titrator reading following titration of actual sample
d = "corrected" digital titrator reading following titration of actual sample
The equation is solved for "d" (the corrected digital titrator reading following
titration of a sample). The corrected reading is then multiplied by 0.02 to give the
oxygen concentration in mg/l.
Example:
With a expected value of 500. You titrate the iodate-iodide standard solution and
get a reading of 480 on the digital titrator. You then titrate a normal field sample
and get a reading of 350. You would correct this field sample reading as follows:
480
500 =
350
d
Rearranging the equation:
d = 500 x 350
480
d = 364.6
To get the dissolved oxygen concentration of the field sample in mg/l, multiply
364.6 by 0.02. This gives a final dissolved oxygen concentration in the sample of
7.29 mg/l.
If the reading on the digital titrator is outside the bounds of +. 5% of the expected
following the titration of the iodate-iodide standard solution, the thiosulfate
cartridge should be discarded and a new one should be used. Low readings or
high readings generally indicate that the titrant is too strong or too weak to give
accurate results, even if you use corrected digital titrator readings. A second
source of inaccuracy in the Hach Winkler kit is the digital titrator itself. If the digital
titrator readings are still out side the described bounds when the iodate-iodide
titration is performed with a new cartridge, the digital titrator is suspect and a
backup one should be used.
Whenever the digital titrator readings are "corrected" using the above equation, the
calculations should be recorded on the back of the data sheet in the field, so that
they can be checked when the data sheet is sent to the Field Operations Center.
Appendix D - 5
-------
-------
Appendix D Revision 0 06/09/93
4.0 DETERMINATION OF DISSOLVED OXYGEN
The following notes will hopefully enable everyone to do a dissolved oxygen titration
efficiently and accurately.
• Be sure the sample bottle is clean and rinsed twice with the water to be tested.
Check carefully for bubbles.
• Try to be as precise as possible when adding manganese sulfate and alkaline
potassium iodide reagents; however, since these are added in excess there is
some room for error. It is necessary to add the manganese sulfate first.
• You may add these two solutions to the sample in the field and then go back
home to complete the test. The test must be completed within the
recommended number of hours for the procedure you are using. Keep
samples in the dark until you are ready to analyze them.
• The amount of sample to be titrated is critical. Measure carefully. The bottom of
the meniscus should rest on top of the white line on the titration tube. (A
meniscus is a curved upper surface of a liquid column that is concave when the
containing walls are wetted by the liquid).
• The titration is also extremely critical. Once the starch has been added, titrate
' carefully so as not to overshoot the endpoint.
• Add a uniform number of drops of starch per sample if possible. Simply add
titrant until the sample is light yellow; add starch solution and continue adding
drops "very carefully" until solution just turns clear. - The first complete
disappearance of blue color is the endpoint. (If you see the solution turn blue
again,, ignore it!)
• Record all values on the record sheet.
• Finally, if you have any further questions, please let us know. Testing for the
amount of dissolved oxygen is very important and we want to know we are getting
accurate numbers.
Appendix D - 6.
-------
-------
Oxygen Solubility In Seawater
(values in mg/l)
Temp.
(°C)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Salinity (ppt)
0
14.62
14.22
13.83
13.46
13.11
12.77
12.45
12.14
• 11.84
11.56
11.29
11.03
10.78
10.54
10.31
10.08
9.87
9.67
9.47
9.28
9.09
8.92
8.74
8.58
8.42
8.26
8.11
7.97
7.83
7.69
7.56
7.43
7.31
7.18
7.07
6.95
6.84
6.73
6.62
6.52
6.41
5
14.12
13.73
13.36
13.01
1Z67
12.35
12.04
11.75
11.47
11.19
10.93
10.68
10.44
10.21
9.99
9.78
9.58
9.38
9.19
9.01
8.83
8.66
8.49
8.34
8.18
8.03
7.89
7.75
7.61
7.48
7.35
7.23
7.11
6.99
6.88
6.77
6.66
6.55
6.45
6.35
6.25
10
13.64
13.27
1Z91
12.58
12.26
11.95
11.65
11.37
11.10
10.84
10.59
10.35
10.12
9.90
9.69
9.49
9.29
9.10
8.92
8.74
8.57
8.41
8.25
8.10
7.95
7.81
7.67
7.54
7.40
7.28
7.16
7.04
6.92
6.81
6.70
6.59
6.49
6.38
6.28
6.19
6.09
15
13.17
12.82
1Z48
12.16
11.85
11.55
11.27
11.00
10.74
10.50
10.26
10.03
9.81
9.60
9.39
9.20
9.01
8.83
8.65
8.48
8.32
8.17
8.01
7.87
7.73
7.59
7.46
7.33
7.20
7.08
6.96
6.85
6.74
6.63
6.52
6.42
6.32
6.22
6.12
6.03
5.94
20
12.71
1Z38
1Z06
11.75
11.46
11.18
10.91
10.65
10.40
10.16
9.93
9.72
9.51
9.30
9.11
8.92
8.74
8.57
8.40
8.24
8.08
7.93
7.79
7.64
7.51
7.38
7.25
7.12
7.00
6.89
6.77
6.66
6.56
6.45
6.35
6.25
6.15
6.06
5.96
5.87
5.78
25
12.28
11.96
11.65
11.36
11.08
10.81
10.55
10.30
10.07
9.84
9.62
9.41
9.21
9.02
8.83
8.65
8.48
8.31
8.15
8.00
7.85
7.70
7.56
7.43
7.30
7.17
7.05
6.93
6.81
6.70
6.59
6.48
6.38
6.28
6.18
6.09
5.99
5.90
5.81
5.72
5.64
30
11.85
11.55
11.26
10.98
10.71
10.45
10.21
9.97
9.74
9.53
9.32
9.12
8.93
8.74
8.56
8.39
8.22
8.06
7.91
7.76
7.62
7.48
7.35
7.22
7.09
6.97
6.85
6.74
6.62
6.52
6.41
6.31
6.21
6.11
6.02
5.93
5.83
5.75
5.66
5.58
5.49
35
11.45
11.15
10.88
10.61
10.35
10.11
9.87
9.65
9.43
9.22
9.02
8.83
8.65
8.47
8.30
8.14
7.98
. 7.82
7.68
7.53
7.40
7.26
7.13
7.01
6.89
6.77
6.66
6.55
6.44
6.34
6.24
6.14
6.04
5.95
5.86
5.77
5.68
5.60
5.51
5.43
5.35
40
11.05
10.77
10.51
10.25
10.01
9.77
9.55
9.34
9.13
8.93
8.74
8.56
8.38
8.21
8.05
7.89
7.74
7.59
7.45
7.31
7.18
7.05
6.93
6.81
6.69
6.58
6.47
6.37
6.26
6.16
6.07
5.97
5.88
5.79
5.70
5.62
5.53
5.45
5.37
5.29
5.22
Benson, B.B. and D. Krause Jr. 1984. The concentration and isotopic fractionation of oxygen dissolved in
freshwater and seawater in equilibrium with the atmosphere. Limnol. Oceanogr., 29(3), 620-632.
-------
-------
Appendix F KevbfeaO 6/9/93
APPENDIX F
1993 EMAP DATA SHEETS
Appendix F -1
-------
-------
NAVIGATION LOG DATA SHEET-VIRGINIAN PROVINCE
STATION INFORMATION
•ATION NUMBER
4ET1C VARIATION
DATE (MMDDYY)
•—••••••i^^^—; ^^^^^ ^J
MAGNETIC BEARINGS/RANGES ON STATION:
SIGNED LAT.
DEG
MIN
SEC
SIGNED LONG.
DEG
MIN
SEC
W
. FROMILonan
GPS
Computer-Loran
Computer-GPS Q Computer-Loran/GPS | |
ITTTUDE
DEG
MIN
SEC
N
JGITUDE
DEG
MIN
SEC
W
)RAN
TD
w
TD
x
TD
V
TD
z
1PUTER COORDINATES ACCEPTED? Y
DID YOU MOVE THE STATION?
JYOU DID NOT ACCEPT THE COORDINATES OR IF YOU MOVED THE STATION. ENTER A COMMENT ON THE BACK.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM STATUS AT STATION
IRAN
Master:
Whiskey:
Xray:
Yankee:
Zulu:
GPS
OOP
1MENTSINCL SOURCES OF INTERFERENCE
CALIBRATION SITE
DATE
'STEMD
GPS LAT.
DEG
MIN
SEC
N
GPS LONG.
DEG
VIIN
SEC
W
TIME
POSITION FROM: GPS
CHART [~~|
CHART DATUM:
DISTANCE TO STATION (M):
JBRAT1ON SITE NAME:
SITE LAT.
DEG
MIN
SEC
N
SITE LONG.
DEG
MIN
SEC
W
TD
x
TD
y
&RANCAL FACTORS
WHISKEY:
XRAY:
YANKEE:
ZULU:
-------
-------
ISTATION INFORMATION DATA SHEET-VIRGINIAN PROVINCE
1
•TATION
IJMBER
I/ENT
IJMBER
ITE
ICOYY
IATNAME ARBAC
•EW# IA £
JEW
IIEF
IEW
EMBER 2
3ITOR
=ATHER CONDI
RECKONS OR M<
EA CONDITIONS
STATION
CLASS
visrr
NUMBER
;IA r~]MYsiDopsis rn
3*n»n*n
PAGE OF
BSS Q] BSS/LTT Q REP [j|
DISKETTE USE DUPLICATE BARCODE LABEL OR
SAMPLHD WRITE DISKETTE SAMPLED IN BOXES.
(SAMP. #
000-002)
SYPRINODON) |
3A 1 1 3B 1 1
OM 1 | OO 1 1
1 1 1 — 1
CREW
MEMBER 1
LAND
MEMBER
PURPOSE
OF VISIT
TIONS 01 iNNY F 1 HAHILY
IRE) ^INNY j (RUMMY
OVER-
CAST
3 CALM ^ CHOPPY ROUGH
OTHER:
OTHER:
RAINY | WINDY FOGGY | |
ME ON STATION (24 HR) I
'RASH PRESENT? Y [~] N []
ASTIC F
!AD RSH |~
3HING GEAR
j] MEDICAL WASTED MOD
DEPTH (M)
IF "Y", PLACE A CHECK BESIDE EACH KIND
IRED WOOD j
~\ CANS . 1 1 NATURAL WOOD
PAPER SCUM/FOAM
TIRES 1 1 GLASS
BALLS SEAWEED 1 1
OIL SUCK n OTHER:
OMMENTS:
ME OFF STATION (24 hr) ;
COMPLETED BY:
EMAP-NC VIRGINIAN PROVINCE STATIONS FRM
-------
-------
CTD CAST DATA SHEET - VIRGINIAN PROVINCE
§/ENT
IUMBER
•ro CAST
IWLBD
•ro CAST
•IE NAME:
pPTH(M)
•
ftTD Cast Sample #s: 200-299 (Enter SAMPLEfD and file
• name from computer). If no acceptable CTD cast, use
1 sample number 200 and enter -1 for cast file name.
DATE
(MMDDYY)
PAGE OF
CASTTIME
(24 HOUR)
CTD
BARCODE
SUSPENDED
SOLIDS
SAMPLEID
•
•
BARCODE
SAMPLE NUMBERS 003-005
SURFACE MEASUREMENTS
I'D TEMP.
|l DEG. C)
ffilENTTEMP.
1 DEG. C)
CHLORO-
PHYLL a
5AMPLBD
m
,
CTD SALINITY
(0.1 PPT)
REFRACT. SAL.
(1PPT)
BARCODE
SAMPLE NUMBERS 042-044
„
.
CTD DISS. OX.
(0.1 MG/L)
YSI DISS. OX.
(0.1 MG/L)
CTD VS. YSI DISS. OX.
(DIFFERENCE, MG/L)
TIME
CHLOR. a
COLLECT.
*
FIME
CHLOR. a
ALTERED
„
.
„
;
BOTTOM MEASUREMENTS
DTEMP.
1DEG.C)
/IBIENTTEMP.
1DEG.C)
CHLORO-
PHYLL a
5AMPLEID
.
.
CTD SALINITY
(0.1 PPT)
REFRACT. SAL
(1PPT)
BARCODE
SAMPLE NUMBERS 045-047
.
.
CTD DISS. OX.
(0.1 MG/L)
YSI DISS. OX.
(0.1 MG/L)
CTD VS. YSI DISS. OX.
(DIFFERENCE, MG/L)
TIME
CHLOR. a
COLLECT.
;
[TIME
CHLOR. a
FILTERED
m
m
m
•
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE DIFFERENCE FOR DO QC CHECK: 0.5 MG/L OXYGEN. IF THIS
DIFFERENCE IS EXCEEDED, INFORM THE FIELD OPERATIONS CENTER.
OMMENTS:
IMPLETED BY:
3-NC VIRGINIAN PROVINCE CTDCASTSFRM
CTD
-------
-------
BENTHIC DATA SHEET-VIRGINIAN PROVINCE
PAGE
of
EVENT
NO.
DATE
(MMDDYY)
PLACE A CHECK IN EACH BOX WHICH DESCRIBES THE BENTHIC INFAUNA SAMPLES. DESCRIBE THE THREE
SAMPLES SEPARATELY BY PLACING A CHECK IN EACH COLUMN OF BOXES FOR EACH CATEGORY.
IF "OTHER" IS CHECKED, DESCRIBE IN COMMENTS.
NOTE; MULTIPLE CHOICES MAY ONLY BE SELECTED FOR NOTES AND SURFACE BIOLOGY.
DOMIN. COLOR
DOMINANT TYPE
NOTES
SMELL
SURFACE BIOLOGY
nnn
nnn
OOZY nnn
SULFUR nnn
WORMS
nnn
MUD
nnn
nnn
i/VORM TUBES
nnn
nnn
SAND nnn
nnn
nnn
MUDDY
SAND
nnn
SHELLS nnn
VEGETATION
nnn
ROCKS nnn
NO
SMELL
nnn
MOLLUSCS
OTHER nnn
OTHER nnn
OTHER nnn
OTHER nnn
AMPELISCA | II in
TUBES LJLJLJ
DTHER
nnn
SAMPLE 1
SAMPLE 2
SAMPLES
5RAB NUMBER
5RAB PENET.
IDEPTH (mm)
3RAIN SIZE
WPLEID
BARCODE
SAMPLE # 006-014
BARCODE
SAMPLE #006-014
BARCODE
SAMPLE #006-014
JENTHIC
UNFAUNA
4PLEID
BARCODE
SAMPLE #015-023
BARCODE
SAMPLE #015-023
BARCODE
SAMPLE #015-023
DUMBER OF
S USED
lALL SAMPLES TAKEN?
IF YOU ANSWERED "N", PLACE A CHECK IN THE MENU
BELOW TO EXPLAIN WHY NOT.
IROCKS/
(SHELLS
HARD
SAND
VEGETATION
OTHER-EXPLAIN
IN COMMENTS
JOMMENTS:
COMPLETED BY:
EMAP-NC VIRGINIAN PROVINCE BENTHICS.FRM
BEN
-------
-------
SEDIMENT CHEMISTRY DATA SHEET -- VIRGINIAN PROVINCE
PAGE
OF
HMBER
DATE
(MMDDYY)
MBER OF GRABS .
ECTED/HOMOGENIZED
NUMBER OF
UNSUCCESSFUL GRABS
If this is a chemistry QC station, place barcodes for the QC samples
on the back of this form.
SED|WJENT SAMPLES „ TAKEN AT ALL STATIONS
IF LESS THAN THE REQUIRED VOLUMES ARE COLLECTED, EXPLAIN WHY IN THE COMMENTS SECTION.
[DIMENTTOXICITY
|000 CC REQUIRED,
>E LARGE PLASTIC JAR)
BARCODE
SAMPLE NUMBERS 024-026
=DIMENT GRAIN SIZE
00 CC REQUIRED,
3E SMALL WHIRL PAC)
BARCODE
SAMPLE NUMBERS 027-029
EDIMENT ORGANICS
50 CC REQUIRED,
3E GLASS JAR)
BARCODE
SAMPLE NUMBERS 030-032
;
EDIMENT AVS
25 CC REQUIRED,
IUST COMPLETELY
LL JAR)
BARCODE
SAMPLE NUMBERS 033-035
EDIMENT METALS
25 CC REQUIRED,
3E PLASTIC JAR)
BARCODE
SAMPLE NUMBERS 036-038
ERE ALL SAMPLES TAKEN?
IF YOU ANSWERED "N", PLACE A CHECK IN THE
MENU BELOW TO EXPLAIN WHY NOT.
)CKS/
IELLS
n
HARD SAND
VEGETATION | |
OTHER
(EXPLAIN)
n
DMMENTS:
DMPLETED BY:
EMAP-NC VIRGINIAN PROVINCE SEDIMENT.FRM
SED
-------
-------
SEDIMENT CHEMISTRY QC SAMPLES (QC STATIONS ONLY!!!)
). ORGANIC
(PLICATE
10 CC
5U1RED)
X ORGANIC
-.LAB
11 (250
(REQUIRED)
XAVS
3L!CATE
i CC REQ.-
IST FILL JAR)
BARCODE
QA EVENT-SAMPLE NUMBER 030
BARCODE
QA EVENT-SAMPLE NUMBER 031
BARCODE
QA EVENT-SAMPLE NUMBER 033
SED. ORGANIC
REF.LAB
SAM. 2 (250
CC REQUIRED)
BARCODE
QA EVENT-SAMPLE NUMBER 031
XAVSREF.
t SAM. 1 (125
IREQ.-MUST
.JAR)
BARCODE
QA EVENT-SAMPLE NUMBER 034
SED.AVSREF.
LAB SAM. 2 (125
CC REQ.-MUST
FILL JAR)
BARCODE
QA EVENT-SAMPLE NUMBER 034
). METALS
'LICATE
CC
JIRED)
BARCODE
QA EVENT-SAMPLE NUMBER 036
X METALS
=. LAB
1(125
(REQUIRED)
BARCODE
QA EVENT-SAMPLE NUMBER 037
SED. METALS
REF.LAB
SAM. 2 (125
CC REQUIRED)
BARCODE
QA EVENT-SAMPLE NUMBER 037
NNKQA
BARCODE
STATION EVENT-
SAMPLE NUMBERS 039-041
TAKE QA EVENT BARCODES FROM ONE OF THE
QA EVENT ENVELOPES PROVIDED.
THE BLANK BOTTLE BARCODE IS INCLUDED WITH
THE STATION EVENT BARCODES.
)MMENTS:
-------
-------
STANDARD FISH TRAWL DATA SHEET
VIRGINIAN PROVINCE
DO NOT ENTER DATA FOR NON-STANDARD TRAWLS.
PAGE OF
/ENT]
JDATE
MMDDYY
WL
AMPLEID
0
R/]E STARTED
m HOUR)
•
a
-
DURATION
(mmrss)
•
•
1
•INiMUM DEPTH (m)
WE OUT (m) W/O BRIDLE
IPEED THROUGH WATER
•
•
MAXIMUM DEPTH (m)
TOTAL NUMBER OF RSH
SPECIES CAUGHT IN TRAWL
SPEED OVER BOTTOM
a
•
iAWL SUCCESSFUL? (I=YES, 2=NO, S=NOT ATTEMPTED)
IF 2 OR 3, PUCE A CHECK UNDER
ONE OF THE REASONS BELOW.
TOO
I DEEP
TOO
SHALLOW
VEGE-
TATION
FISHING
GEAR
SUBMERG.
OBJECT
NO
ROOM
DAMAGED
TRAWL
NET HUNG
UP
OTHER
(EXPLAIN)
JJECTS IN NET?
IF OBJECTS WERE PRESENT, PLACE A CHECK BELOW EACH KIND.
DESCRIBE VEGETATION IN THE COMMENTS SECTION.
\BJIC
MEDICAL!
WASTE
CANS
TIRES
GLASS
PAPER
NATURAL]
WOOD
MODIF.
WOOD
FISHING
GEAR
ROCKS
VEGETA-
TION
OTHER-
EXPLAIN
IVERTEBRATES IN NET?
N
IF INVERTEBRATES WERE PRESENT. PLACE A CHECK
BELOW EACH KIND. DO NOT INCLUDE JELLYFISH.
HORSE-
SHOE CR
SPIDER
CRABS
OTHER
CRABS
ECHINO-
DERMS
BI-
VALVES
PASTRO-I
PODS
SQUID
SHRIMP
MANTIS
SHRIMP
LOB-
STERS
OTHER
INVERT.
IMMENTS:
)MPLETED BY:
EMAP-NC VIRGINIAN PROVINCE FSHTRAWLFRM
FT
-------
-------
FISH LENGTH DATA SHEET -- STANDARD TRAWL
RAWL SAMPLEID
PAGE.
.OF.
FOTAL
CAUGHT
CTUAL COUNT=Y
R ESTIMATE=N
ITOTAL SHEETS
[FOR SPECIES
|ATH=PATHOLOGY, TQ=TAXON QA, PQ=PATHOLOGY QA, SM=SPLEEN MACROPHAGE AGGREGATE, S=PART
I SAVED ( W=WHOLE, P=PART). LOOK FOR THE FOLLOWING PATHOLOGIES ONLY: L=LUMPS, G=GROWTHS,
U=ULCERS, AND F=FIN EROSION. PLACE A CHECK IN THE APPROPRIATE BOX(S).
PATH
TO
PQ
3/1
BARCODE LABEL
PAT>
TQ
PQ
EM
BARCODE LABEL
sD
JD
w
D
^•mi
P
D
BARCODE
LC
sC
UC
FC
w
P
D
BARCODE
.D
3D
JD
.D
3D
JD
D
3D
JC
w
D
BARCODE
w
D
PI
Dl
BARCODE
w
D
-p- BARCODE
Q
3D
JD
w
w
D
mmm
P
D
W
P
D
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
D
3C
JD
.a
3D
JD
w
D
nl
BARCODE
_D
3D
w
a
P
D
BARCODE
3D
JC
w
n
mmmmm
fjj
D
w
P
D
BARCODE
BARCODE
D
3D
JC
a
3D
JD
bMPLETED BY:
W
D
p
a
BARCODE
.a
w
Q
P
D
w
g
p
a
BARCODE
BARCODE
L
Pathology and Taxon QA Fish: 048-067;
SMA fish: 3200000-3200499; Path. QA: 3200500-3200999.
Randomly assign SMA and Path. QA SAMPLEIDs from the
dummy events in the SMA and Path. QA envelopes.
||WR1TE COMMENTS ON BACK OF FORM
EMAP-NC VIRGINIAN
PROVINCE FISHPATH FRM
-------
-------
• PATH-PATHOLOGY, TQ=TAXON QA. PQ=PATHOLOGY QA. SM=SPLEEN MACROPHAGE AGGREGATE
• S=PART SAVED { W=WHOLE, P=PART).
1.00K FOR THE FOLLOWING PATHOLOGIES ONLY: L=LUMPS, G=GROWTHS, U±=ULCERS, AND F=FIN EROSION.
• PLACE A CHECK IN THE APPROPRIATE BOX(S).
•Length, mn
f
L
P
p
p
F
n
PATH
LD
GD
uc
••••^
LD
GC
uc
Ffl
LD
GD
uc
^^^^M
LD
GD
uc
LD
GC
uc
LD
GD
uc
LD
GD
UE
PC
D
GD
LJC
TO
PQ
SM
s
w
D
p
D
w
D
p
D
W
L
P
C
W
c
^M
p
w
^^H
p
w
^•1
p
w
1^^—
p
w
p
BARCODE LABEL
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
#
2
4
2
5
2
6
2
7
2
8
2
9
3
Q
_ength,nnT
PATH
LD
GD
UD
FD
-n c Q r~
DDDD
GD
"H
TQ
^g
pN
• • ii
^a
"R
^a
"B
GQ
"B
PQ
SM
S
W
••MM
P
^^•W
•Ml
W
"F
•HI
^^
W
••••
p
•••
w
^H
^-«*
"p
I^H
W
mm*
^^^
P
^^
^^
W
"p
^^
w
"p
BARCODE LABEL
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
Pathology and Taxon QA Fish: 048-067. SMA Fish: 3200000-3200499. Pathology QA Fish: 3200500-3200999.
SMA and Pathology QA fish: Randomly assign
SAMPLElDs from the dummy events in the SMA and pathology QA envelopes.
)MMENTS:
-------
-------
I FISH LENGTH DATA SHEET -
IRAWL SAMPLEID
IDMMON
|\ME
TOTAL
CAUGHT
4 (
• NON-STANDARD
) 0
JACTUAL COUNTRY
PR ESTIMATE=N
TRAWL
PAGE OF
ITOTAL SHEETS
FOR SPECIES
•3=TAXON QA, PQ=PATHOLOGY QA, SM=SPLEEN MACRO. AGG., S=PART SAVED ( W=WHOLE, P=PART). LOOK
VOn THE FOLLOWING PATHS ONLY: L=LUMPS, G=GROWTHS, U=ULCERS, AND F=FIN EROSION (DO NOT save
(PATH fish samples-use the PATH column only to describe SMA fish). PLACE A CHECK IN THE APPROPRIATE BOX(S).
|jLBngth,mirJPATH
1
1
UDDD
-I 0 D U.I
DDDD
_J 0 D U.I
LD
GD
UC
TtC0r-t |Tic0r-| |Tic0r-|
DDDD bnnn baaa
LD
GD
uc
rnc 0 r
yDDD
ID
PQ
aw
S
W
g
w
D
P
W
D
P
D
W
D
^^^
P
W
^M^
P
D
W
D
P
W
n
p
D
W
D
P
D
BARCODE LABEL
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
JDMPLETED BY:
#
9
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
Length, run
PATH
|Ti c 0 r-
DDDP
TI c 0 (~
TI C 0 r~
aann
TIC 0 r
PDDD
LD
GD
UC
FD
T| C 0 1-
DPDP
TI c: 0 r-
IPPDP
111
HU
SUl
S
W
n
i^m^
P
D
W
D
•O^B
P
W
D
^^H
P
n
w
"p"
w
n
m^^m
p
w
n
p
D
W
D
P
BARCODE LABEL
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
Sample Numbers: Taxon QA: 048-067; SMA: 3200000 -
3200499; Path. QA: 3200500 - 3200999. Do not save
path fish samples; use path column to describe SMA fish.
Randomly assign SMA and Path. QA SAMPLEIDs from the
dummy events in the SMA and Path QA envelopes.
WRITE COMMENTS ON BACK OF FORM.
EMAP-NC VIRGINIAN f
PROVINCE NEWNONS.FRM ~
-------
-------
TQ«TAXON QA, PQ=PATHOLOGY QA, SM=SPLEEN MACROPHAGE AGGREGATE,
S=PART SAVED { W=WHOLE, P=PART). DO NOT SAVE FISH AS PATH SAMPLES-USE THE PATH COLUMN TO
DESCRIBE SMA FISH ONLY. LOOK FOR THE FOLLOWING PATHOLOGIES ONLY: L=LUMPS, G=GROWTHS,
U=ULCERS, AND F=F1N EROSION. PLACE A CHECK IN THE APPROPRIATE BOX(S).
j9ogthr mr
^^^H^^tfftB
^^^•^••PMM
mmmmmmmmmm*
••••••••MPHB
•^•••••^^^M
•MHM^^^^M
HATH
LD
GC
FC
GC
UC
r r~
LD
GC
FC
LD
GC
: r~
GC
uc
GC
uc
LD
GP
uc
^M^M^
LD
GD
uc
: r~
ID
HQ
SM
S
W
^•i
P
W
T
w
^«B
P
W
••^H
P
W
MMM
P
W
MBMi
P
W
^^
p
w
p
BARCODE LABEL
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
. BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
#
2
4
2
5
2
6
2
7
2
8
2
9
3
0
Length, mn
^
PATHJTQ
GQ
F!
GC
uc
: rn
GD
UD
F n
GD
UD
LD
GD
UD
: [H
3
PQ
SM
S
W
T
w
^M
^H
"F
w
^^^
p
^H
W
"p"
^»
••i
w
•^
^H
p
w
^H
P
W
•^
p
•••
BARCODE LABEL
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
BARCODE
SAMPI F NUMBERS
Pathology and Taxon QA Fish: 048-067. SMA Fish: 3200000-3200499. Pathology QA Fish: 3200500-3200999.
DO NOT save pathology fish samples-use the PATH column to describe SMA fish.
SMA and Pathology QA fish: Assign SAMPLEIDs from the dummy events in the pathology QA and SMA envelopes.
)MMENTS:
-------
-------
TAXON QA FISH DATA SHEET
VIRGINIAN PROVINCE
fcw CHIEF
|E SHIPPED (MMDDYY)
TOTAL # OF FISH SENT
ItiNATION:
IQA FISH SAMPLEID
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ID BY CREW
FULL COMMON NAME
CORRECT?
(Y/N)
ID BY EXPERT
FULL COMMON NAME
TAXON QC PERFORMED (MMDDYY)
HMOMIST PERFORMING QC:
MENTS:
PLETED BY:
EMAP-NC V1RG1MAN PROVINCE
QARSHJ=HM
QAF
-------
-------
NUTRIENT SAMPLE DATA SHEET
FOR UNIVERSITY OF RHODE ISLAND
THESE SAMPLES ARE NOT TRACKED AS EMAP SAMPLES,
•HESE DATA ARE NOT ENTERED ANYWHERE IN THE FIELD COMPUTER
'STEM (DO NOT ENTER THESE SAMPLES IN THE SHIPMENT PROGRAM
OR IN ANY OTHER DATA SHEET).
NT
dBER
DATE
(MMDDYY)
•KMPLEID FOR
IURFACE NUTRIENT SAMPLE
IKMPLEID FOR
IOTTOM NUTRIENT SAMPLE
5
5
0
0
0
1
IMMENTS:
>MPLETED BY:
-------
-------
CTD/YSI QC DATA SHEET -- VIRGINIAN PROVINCE
•DATE (MMDDYY)
CTD QC CHECK
)TD BARCODE #
CTD UNIT
AMBIENT
DIFFERENCE
UNIT)
pH
BUFFER
1
0.
JNiTY
L1PFT)
REFRACTOMETER
(1PFT)
1PERATURE
.1DEGC)
THERMOMETER
(0.1 DEG. C)
PXYGEN
3.1 MG/L)
YSI
(0.1 mg/l)
'ASSEDQC? Y
N
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE DIFFERENCES FOR QC CHECKS: 0.5 pH UNIT,
2 PPT SALINITY, 2 DEG. C, 1 MG/L OXYGEN. IF THESE DIFFERENCES
ARE EXCEEDED, CONTACT THE FIELD OPERATIONS CENTER.
YSI QC CHECK - USE AIR-SATURATED FRESH WATER
BARCODE
(EMAP)
YSI PROBE
BARCODE*
i/ATERTEMP.,
[0.1 DEG. C)
WATER TEMP., THER-
MOMETER (0.1 DEG.C)
DIFFERENCE
(0.1 DEG. C)
[DIGITS TO TITRATE
3ATE-IODIDE STAND.
AVERAGE
(1-3)
IDIGITS TO TITRATE
/IPLE
1
AVERAGE
d-3)
INKIER DISSOLVED
IXYGEN OF SAMPLE (mg/L)
DISSOLVED
OXYGEN (mg/L)
500 X SAMPLE DIGITS
STANDARD DIGITS
X0.02
ilSSOLVED OXYGEN
>M YSI (0.1 mg/L)
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN WINKLER AND
YS! DISSOLVED OXYGEN VALUES (0.1 mg/L)
ilSSOLVED OXYGEN
WDM TABLE (0.1 mg/L)
PASSED QC? Y
N
IF DIFFERENCE BETWEEN YSI AND WINKLER I
i 0.5 MG/L, RECALIBRATE THE YSI.
OMMENTS:
OMPLETED BY:
EMAP-NC VIRGINWN PROVINCE CTOYSIQC J=RM C T D Y SIQ C
-------
-------
PHONE LOG - EMAP VIRGINIAN PROVINCE
CHECK BULLETIN BOARD FOR MESSAGES TO RELAY TO CREWS!!
PATE:
TIME
RECEIVED BY:
ERSON CALLING:
TEAMS:
ff-fUINt ff AINU LUUAI lUlN
IOR CREW TONIGHT:
STA.
#
STA.
CLASS
EVENT
#
VISIT
#
LAST
VISIT?
•0* DOWNLOADED vj 1 ..I 1
1ST NIGHT? Y| I N| 1
SAMPLING PERFORMED EVENT COMPLETE?
CTO CAST SUSP. SOL BEN/CHM FSHTTlAWLl (IF NO, ENTER COMMENT)
"
COMMENTS (DO NOT ENTER SAMPLING PERFORMED):
COMMENTS:
IF"N',
WHY NOT?:
NEW SHIPMENT INFORMATION
IPMENT NUMBER
M*MM>IW^«^^^^^^^^^^H^*IMIM^^M>^^
SHIP DATE
DESTINATION
SAMPLE TYPE(S)
COURIER ID
lUIPySUPPLIES
loUESTED:
TURNED? Y 1 1 N j j
EQUIP. TYPE:
BARCODE OR
SERIAL ft
>MMENTS/PROBLEMS:
IkP-NC VIRGINIAN PROVINCE PHONB.OG.FFW
PL
-------
-------
WEEKLY MAINTENANCE REPORT
VIRGINIAN PROVINCE
THIS FORM SHOULD BE COMPLETED ATTHE END OF EVERY SHIFT AND WHEN ANY OFTHE BOATS,
BILE LABS, TRUCKS, OR BOAT TRAILERS ARE TRANSFERRED AMONG CREWS. RETURN THIS FORM
TO THE FIELD OPERATIONS CENTER WITH THE NEXT SHIPMENT OF DATA SHEETS OR DISKETTES.
;REW#
CREW CHIEF
)ATE COMPLETED (MMDDYY)
)ATNAME
ENGINE HOURS PORT:
STARBOARD:
ROBILE LAB LICENSED
MILEAGE:
WCK LICENSE ft
MILEAGE
lOAT TRAILER LICENSE #:
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED THIS SHIFT
OMMENTS/PROBLEMS (Include scheduled maintenance that was not performed)
[ORM COMPLETED BY(SIGNATURE):
PA-eWAP-NC VIRGINIAN PROVINCE MAINTAIN FRM
-------
-------
EQUIPMENT REPAIR/RETURN FORM
VIRGINIAN PROVINCE
RETURN THIS FORM WITH THE EQUIPMENT.
INCLUDE THIS INFORMATION ON THE DAILY PHONE LOG.
IREW #
^^^^^^^^^•^•^•^MWB^^^^^^MM^qg^^^M
CREW CHIEF
(MMDDYY)
IfPE OF EQUIPMENT:
fcl=»AL #:
BARCODE #:
(IF THE EQUIPMENT HAS ONE)
FOR REPAIR/RETURN:
JDITIONAL COMMENTS:
IRM COMPLETED BY:
'•NC VIRGINIAN PROVINCE RSPAIRFFIM
ER
-------
-------
SAMPLE SHIPMENT FORM - VIRGINIAN PROVINCE
DATA ENTERED INTO THE COMPUTER?
*N«, DATA MUST BE ENTERED WHEN COMPUTER IS AVAILABLE.
YDC3
PAGE
Of
HPMENTID
WCODE)
UPS Q
™ n
us
MAIL
^RRIER ID
DATE
SENT
AIRBRN j 1
EXP. 1 1
EMERY Q
DHL Q
HAND
CARRY
ACKED BY:
VTION
NARR-
SEDCHM
NARR-
FISH
D
NARR-
FOG
D
NARR-
BG/SG
TESTING j—|
CENTER I—I
URl/GSO-f
TSS/CHL
n EPA- n
I—lONN I—I
SAMPLEID
SS
BG
Bl
ST
SG
SO
SA
SM
BB
CS
CB
FP
FT
SMAFQA
SS=SUSPENDED SOLIDS, BG=BENTHIC GRAIN, BI=BENTHIC INFAUNA, ST=SEDIMENT TOXICfTY,
SG=SEDIMENT GRAIN SIZE, SO=SEDIMENT ORGANICS, SA=SED1MENT AVS, SM=SED1MENT METALS,
BB=BLANK BOTTLE, CS=CHLOROPHYLL a SURFACE, CB=:CHLOROPHYLL a BOTTOM, FP=FISH PATHOLOGY,
FT=FISH TAXON QA, SMA=FISH SPLEEN MACROPHAGE AGGREGATE, PQA=FISH PATHOLOGY OA
OMMENTS/PACKING CONDITIONS:
OMPLETED BY:
EMAP-NC VIRGINIAN PROVINCE SHIPMENT.FRM
SSH
-------
-------
DISKETTE, DATA SHEET, AND EQUIPMENT
SHIPMENT FORM-VIRGINIAN PROVINCE
NOTIFY FOG ABOUT THIS SHIPMENT IN THE PHONE LOG,
. BUT DO NOT ENTER IN COMPUTER
PAGE
Of
SHIPMENT ID!
CODE)
DATE
SENT
RN
CARRIER ID
ACKED BY:
JESTINATION FOC
NJ
N
OTHER:
lAMPLBD, BARCODE #, OR STATION #
DK
DS
EQ
OTHER (DESCRIBE)
t>K=DISKETTE. DS=DATA SHEETS. RS=RESEARCH SAMPLES. EQ=EQUIPMENT. IF OTHER. PLEASE DESCRIBE.
OMMENTS/PACKING CONDITIONS:
lOMPLETED BY:
EMAP-WC V!RG!N!AN PROVINCE O7HSHIRFRM
OSH
-------
-------
DATA QC CHECK OFF FORM
;REW #:
ATE:
ITATION NUMBER:
VENT NUMBER:
1 DATA TYPE
ITATION INFORMATION,
LL VISITS
|TD CAST INFORMATION,
|_L VISITS
I'D CAST DATA FILE NAME
tNTHIC INFORMATION,
1.L PAGES
IDIMENT GRAB
PIMPLE INFORMATION
IANDARD FISH
BAWL INFORMATION
EH LENGTH DATA
bNltHfcU
REVIEWED
QCFUGS
COMMENTS
IMPLETED BY:
iEW CHIEF SIGNATURE:
-------
-------
END OF SHIFT CHECK LIST
DATE:
OUTGOING CREW #:
INCOMING CREW #:
D
A
T
A
M
A
N
A
G
E
M
E
N
T
U
P
A
T
E
S
••••
s
H
P
/
E
Q
II
I
WERE THE COMPUTERS EQUALIZED
IF "N", WHERE ARE THE DISKETTES?
WERE ALL CTDS DOWNLOADED?
IF "N", WHICH CTDS NEED DOWNLOADING?
WHICH CASTS ARE ON THESE CTDS?
WERE ALL FIELD DATA ENTERED/QC'D?
IF "N", WHICH DATA NEED TO BE ENTERED?
WHERE ARE THE NECESSARY DATA SHEETS?
WERE ALL SHIPMENTS ENTERED iN COMPUTER?
NOTE: ALL SHIPMENTS MUST BE ENTERED!!
IF "N", WHERE ARE THESE SHIPMENT FORMS?
ANY CHANGES IN FIELD PROCEDURES?
IF "Y", WAS INCOMING CREW NOTIFIED?
ANY CHANGES TO COMPUTER SYSTEM?
IF "Y", WAS INCOMING CREW NOTIFIED?
ALL MESSAGES FROM FOC RELAYED?
ALL SHIPMENTS SENT?
IF "N", WHAT SHIPMENTS ARE LEFT?
ALL UlSKb I 1 ES AND DATA SHEETS SENT?
IF BNU, WHICH EVENTS ARE LEFT?
MAINTENANCE LOG COMPLETED?
VEHICLE STATUS/PROBLEMS RELAYED?
EQUIPMENT STATUS/PROBLEMS RELAYED?
Y
•
&«|
It
tt
P
^m
11
•
Hi
I
N
m
ill
V
•
•
ill
IsM
II
im
S
sssss?
inis
M
COMMENTS
COMMENTS:
-------
-------
|